JP2021106962A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of reducing a processing load for displaying an image.SOLUTION: Pieces of image data are stored in a memory module 74. A VDP 76 reads the image data on the basis of a drawing instruction from a display CPU 72, then sets the read image data on a frame buffer 82 for creating drawing data, at the time, a ground color is displayed to a display region corresponding to a region where the image data is not set on the frame buffer 82. Then, according to a content of the image, setting of background data is not performed to the frame buffer 82.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory (. For example, see Patent Document 1).

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character etc. are stored in the memory for the image data. Has been done. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

JP-A-2007-7465

Here, the image displayed on the display screen is updated in a predetermined update cycle, and the drawing data is created and the signal is output to the display device in time for the update cycle. Need to be done. Further, when creating drawing data, an operation for specifying the coordinates and size of each of the individual images displayed at the same time on the display screen is performed, and the drawing data is created based on the calculation result.

In the above configuration, the processing load increases as the number of individual images to be calculated at the same time increases. Then, when the processing load is locally increased, there is a concern that processing omission may occur.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the processing load for displaying an image.

The present invention
A display means having a display screen composed of a large number of dots arranged vertically and horizontally, and
A display storage means that stores image data in advance,
Based on setting the image data in the setting storage means having a large number of unit setting areas, drawing data is created in the setting storage means, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. A display control means for displaying an image on the display screen and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with numerical information that defines color information.
Each unit setting area has a configuration in which numerical information can be set within a range up to the limit value.
The image signal is output by the display control means so that the larger the numerical value is set as the numerical information, the brighter the color is displayed at the dots corresponding to the unit setting area.
The display control means
An image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to the individual images so that the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, and
An addition processing execution means for executing an addition process for adding numerical information corresponding to each unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images.
A setting process executing means for setting the data of the result of the addition process in the unit setting area corresponding to each overlapping unit image data in the setting storage means.
Of the back-side individual image and the front-side individual image displayed so as to overlap in the depth direction, the numerical information of the unit image data corresponding to the portion of the back-side individual image that overlaps with the front-side individual image is reduced. Reflection reduction means that does not reduce the unit image data corresponding to the portion of the back side individual image that does not overlap with the front side individual image.
Is equipped with
The gaming machine
After setting the image data of the back side individual image in the setting storage means, the image data of the front side individual image can be set in the setting storage means.
When the image data of the front side individual image is set in the setting storage means, the means capable of executing the reduction by the reflection reduction means is provided.
The addition processing executing means is characterized in that the numerical information of the front side individual image corresponding to the overlapping portion is added to the numerical information of the back side individual image on which the reduction is executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the processing load for displaying an image.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(j) Explanatory drawing for explaining display contents on a display screen of a symbol display device. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for explaining the display content on the display screen of the symbol display device. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for explaining contents of various counters used for winning or failing lottery. A block diagram for explaining the hardware configuration of the memory module. A flowchart showing the data transfer process executed by the controller. A timing chart showing the state of data transfer. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the display CPU. A flowchart showing an initial setting process executed by the display CPU. A flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the display CPU. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for explaining the contents of the drawing list. A flowchart showing a drawing process executed by VDP. An explanatory diagram for explaining a range of a virtual two-dimensional plane to be calculated in a display CPU. A flowchart showing a task process executed by the display CPU. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for explaining how each individual image is controlled. Explanatory drawing for explaining background data for scrolling. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the action by setting the overlap area. A flowchart showing an arithmetic process for a scroll background executed by a display CPU. A flowchart showing a setting process of divided part data executed by VDP. Explanatory drawing for explaining the background data for a small unit group. A flowchart showing an arithmetic process for a displacement background executed by a display CPU. (A)-(e) Explanatory drawing for explaining addition processing of effect images. A flowchart showing a calculation process for the first effect effect executed by the display CPU. A flowchart showing a setting process for the first effect effect executed by VDP. (A) A flowchart showing a first effect addition process, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a state of the first effect addition process. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining a data structure for performing partial addition, and (b) a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for a second effect effect executed by a display CPU. A flowchart showing a setting process for the second effect effect executed by VDP. (A) A flowchart showing a second effect addition process, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a state of the second effect addition process. A flowchart showing arithmetic processing for multiple effect effects executed by the display CPU. (A) A flowchart showing a setting process for a plurality of effect effects executed by VDP, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a composite data area. (A)-(g) Explanatory drawing for explaining α data. A flowchart showing a symbol arithmetic process executed by the display CPU. (A) A flowchart showing a symbol sprite data setting process executed by VDP, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining how a part of the symbol is displayed. (A)-(h) Explanatory drawing for explaining the first alternative form. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining the second alternative form, and (b) a flowchart showing a symbol sprite data setting process executed by VDP. (A) A flowchart showing a character transition process executed by VDP, and (b) to (f) an explanatory diagram for explaining how character transition display is performed. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for explaining a wipe switching effect. A flowchart showing an arithmetic process for a wipe switching effect executed by a display CPU. An explanatory diagram for explaining a drawing list created when the wipe switching effect is executed. The flowchart which shows the setting process for the wipe switching effect executed by VDP. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for explaining a wipe switching effect. (A) Explanatory drawing for explaining the sprite for smooth movement, (b), (c) explanatory drawing for explaining the sprite data for displaying the sprite for smooth movement. A flowchart showing arithmetic processing for smooth movement executed by the display CPU. (A) A flowchart showing a setting process for smooth movement executed by VDP, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining how the setting process for smooth movement is executed. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for explaining the state of resolution adjustment by a scaler. A flowchart showing an arithmetic process for a zoom-in effect executed by a display CPU. A flowchart showing a setting process for zoom-in effect executed by VDP. A flowchart showing an output process executed by the display circuit. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for explaining the state of the zoom-in effect. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for explaining the data structure of moving image data. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for explaining display contents by moving image data. A flowchart showing arithmetic processing for a moving image executed by a display CPU. (A) A flowchart showing a decoding process by a moving image decoder, and (b) a flowchart showing a setting process for moving images executed by VDP. Flowchart showing operation occurrence command correspondence processing. Flowchart showing arithmetic processing for display mode background. Explanatory drawing for explaining a drawing list. A flowchart showing the writing process. (A) Explanatory drawing for explaining the image of the display screen when the rearmost image is drawn, (b) Explanatory drawing for explaining the image of the display screen when the rearmost image is not drawn. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. A block diagram for explaining the hardware configuration of the memory module. A flowchart showing a task process executed by the display CPU. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for explaining the contents of the drawing list. A flowchart showing a drawing process executed by VDP. Explanatory drawing for explaining how drawing data is created with execution of drawing processing. The flowchart which shows the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer executed by VDP. A flowchart showing an arithmetic process for a mask executed by a display CPU. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for explaining the specific content of the first mask display. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for explaining the specific content of the second mask display. A flowchart showing an arithmetic process for a mask executed by a display CPU. A flowchart showing a process corresponding to an operation occurrence command executed by the display CPU. A flowchart showing arithmetic processing for a display mode background executed by a display CPU. A flowchart showing a symbol arithmetic process executed by the display CPU. A flowchart showing a setting process for the background executed by VDP. A flowchart showing a drawing data creation process for the background executed by VDP. A timing chart showing the timing at which the separately stored data for the first display mode and the separately stored data for the second display mode are created. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for explaining a concatenated object. A flowchart showing arithmetic processing for a concatenated object executed by a display CPU. A flowchart showing a setting process for a connected object effect executed by VDP. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for explaining connected object effect. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the background executed by the display CPU in 4th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of the main control unit in the 1st processing configuration. The flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the MPU of the main control unit in the 1st process configuration. The flowchart which shows the game time control process which is executed by the MPU of the main control device in the 1st process configuration. The flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU of the main control unit in the 1st processing configuration. The flowchart which shows the main process which is executed by MPU of a main control unit in the 2nd process configuration. The flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of the main control unit in the 2nd processing configuration.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

The inner frame of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. Further, the back pack unit is rotatably supported on the inner frame, and one of the left and right side portions is rotatably supported as the support side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. At the same time, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

A game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. The game board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating port 23, a lower operating port 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, a main display unit 33, a character display unit 34, and the like. ing.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, and the lower operating port 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 20. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In addition, an out opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the game board 20, and game balls that do not enter various winning openings or the like are discharged from the game area through the out opening 27. Further, in the game board 20, a large number of nails 28 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Aspects that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 27, the ball may enter the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24, or the through gate 25. Is also expressed as a prize.

The upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 20. Both the upper actuating port 23 and the lower actuating port 24 are opened upward. Further, both operating ports 23 and 24 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operating port 23 faces upward. The lower operating port 24 is provided with an electric accessory 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 24a is closed (non-supported state or non-guided state), the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 24, and the electric accessory 24a is opened (supported or guided state), so that the lower operating port is opened. It is possible to win a prize in 24.

The variable winning device 22 includes a large winning opening 22a leading to the back side of the game board 20, and also includes an opening / closing door 22b for opening and closing the large winning opening 22a. The opening / closing door 22b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and a predetermined opening / closing door 22b is likely to win the game ball when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution state) is won in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big hit is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 22, the variable winning device 22 is repeatedly opened up to a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds), with the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces) as one round. There is an aspect to be done.

The main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 are provided on the lower side of the game area. In the main display unit 33, the variation display of the pattern is performed by triggering the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is performed. The result of the internal lottery based on this is clearly indicated by the display. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning of the upper operating port 23 and the winning of the lower operating port 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the winning is based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. The result of the internal lottery is clearly shown on the main display unit 33, which is a common display area. Then, when the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 33. After being displayed and the variable display is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

The main display unit 33 is composed of a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as CRT and dot matrix. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 33, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a plurality of patterns are displayed. It is conceivable that the seed colors are switched and displayed.

In the accessory display unit 34, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through gate 25 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 25 is obtained. Explicitly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 25 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 34 and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 24a provided in the lower operating port 24 is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol which is a kind of symbol. Further, in the variable display unit 26, a center frame 32 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 31. The upper portion of the center frame 32 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 31, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is not deteriorated due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. ..

The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

In the symbol display device 31, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. That is, when the main display unit 33 performs the variable display, the symbol display device 31 performs the variable display accordingly. Then, for example, in a game round in which the game result is a big hit result, the symbol display device 31 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset effective line.

The display contents of the symbol display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing individual symbols that are variablely displayed by the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

As shown in FIGS. 2 (a) to 2 (j), a design which is a kind of design consists of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped design. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 3A, the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 is set with three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the upper, middle, and lower rows as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 3B, on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become like. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on one of the effective lines. When the variation display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol The combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. NS.

Further, in the case of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and then, An explicit video is displayed.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

Further, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 23 and 24, the variation display is started on the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped. It corresponds to one game.

A first reserved light emitting unit (first reserved lamp unit) 35 corresponding to the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided on the upper left portion on the front surface side of the center frame 32. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the first reserved light emitting unit 35.

A second holding light emitting unit (second holding lamp unit) 36 corresponding to the accessory display unit 34 is provided in the upper right portion of the center frame 32. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 25 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the second holding light emitting unit 36. It should be noted that the functions of the reserved light emitting units 35 and 36 may be fulfilled by the display in a part of the area of the symbol display device 31.

A rail portion 37 is attached to the game board 20, and a guide rail is formed by the rail portion 37, and is launched from a game ball launching mechanism (not shown) mounted below the game board 20 in the inner frame. The game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. In the game ball launch mechanism, the game ball is launched by operating the launch handle 41 provided on the front door frame 14.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 so that almost the entire area of the game area can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel (not shown) is fitted therein. The window panel is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the window panel may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin.

Light emitting means is provided around the window portion 42. A display light emitting unit 44 is provided above the window unit 42 as a part of the light emitting means. Further, speaker units 45 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 44.

Below the window portion 42 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47 bulging toward the front side are arranged vertically. An upper plate 46a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 47a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 46a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 46a and the lower plate 47a.

In the region of the upper bulging portion 46 facing the front of the pachinko machine 10, an effect operating device 48 including an operating portion manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is manually operated by the player in order to set the effect content on the display screen G or the like of the symbol display device 31 to a predetermined effect content.

A main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame as described above, and the back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, a power supply and a launch control device. Is installed. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 includes a main control board 51 that controls the main control of the game. In the main control device 50, the board box accommodating the main control board 51 and the like is provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening is provided. It may be. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded, and a joint portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation thereof is formed, or an adhesive layer is peeled off and adhered to an adhesive layer. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining on the case is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 is a ROM 53 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 52, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in.

As the ROM 53, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require an external power supply for storage retention is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be mounted as separate chips. It may be installed.

The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power supply and a launch control device 57 are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power supply and launch control device 57 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, the main control board 51 is generated with the required operating power based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 70 described later.

A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply and the launch control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52, so that the MPU 52 executes a process for a power failure. It becomes possible to do.

Further, various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, a detection sensor provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to a winning ball winning portion such as a general winning opening 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating port 23, a lower operating port 24, and a through gate 25 is provided. It is included, and the MPU 52 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 52, a big hit generation lottery and a big hit result type lottery are executed based on the winnings in the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24, and a reach generation lottery for each game and a lottery for determining the display continuation period are executed.

Here, a configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 52 will be described.

The MPU 52 uses various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot generation lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 33, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 31, a display setting of the accessory display unit 34, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot generation lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result, and the symbol. Reach generation when the display device 31 deviates and fluctuates The reach random number counter C3 used for lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the fluctuations in the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31. A variable type counter CS that determines the display time is used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24 is set to the electric service open state is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 54a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54. Of these, in the lottery counter buffer 54a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as acquired information when a prize is generated in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b as a means.

The hold ball storage area 54b includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, according to the winning history of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. , Each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 54a is stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE1 → the second holding area. Each numerical information is stored in the order of RE2 → 3rd holding area RE3 → 4th holding area RE4 in chronological order. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 can be reserved and stored. Further, the hold area RE includes a hold number storage area NA, and the hold number storage area NA is used to specify the number of winning histories stored in the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24. Information is stored.

The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to 4, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 33, and at the start of one game round. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 53. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low-probability mode (low-probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high-probability mode (high-probability pass / fail information group) are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of jackpot results are (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) the lower after the opening / closing execution mode ends. By providing differences in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 24a of the operating port 24, a plurality of jackpot results are set.

The mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode is high so that the frequency of winning the variable winning device 22 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high or low. Frequent winning mode and low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 22a is opened and closed 15 times (high-frequency use times) from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one opening is 30 sec (high-frequency time). ) Elapses, or until the number of winnings in the large winning opening 22a reaches 10 (high frequency number). On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 22a is opened and closed twice (low-frequency use times) from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low-frequency time). Is continued or until the number of winnings in the large winning opening 22a reaches 6 (low frequency number).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the launching handle 41 is operated by the player, the gaming ball launching mechanism 58 is driven and controlled so that one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec. .. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening 22a is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening 22a is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low-frequency winning mode is applied, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

The number of times the large winning opening 22a is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time limit (or opening limit period) for one opening, and the number of opening limits for one opening are the same as those in the high-frequency winning mode. If the frequency of winning the variable winning device 22 from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode is higher than that of the low-frequency winning mode, the value is not limited to the above value. It is optional. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time limit for one opening is long, or the number of opening limits for one opening is set to be large. good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 22 is not substantially won in the open / close execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode. It is good to have a configuration. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening time limit for one opening, while in the low frequency winning mode, one opening is set. The product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number may be set longer than the opening time limit. Further, even if the firing interval of the game ball and the opening time of one large winning opening 22a are not as described above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set to be shorter than the former. It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a prize is not substantially generated in the variable winning device 22.

As a support mode in the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24, the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24 is compared in a situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area. Low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency of opening states per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 24a is opened when the electric accessory open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more opening. The time is set long. In this case, when the electric accessory open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 24a is opened multiple times, the electric accessory 24a is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured as the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be performed after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that a prize is generated in the lower operating port 24 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper operating port 23 is higher than that of the lower operating port 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 24 is more likely than the upper operating port 23. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is won in the lower operating port 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. be able to.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. In addition, the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (for example, on the accessory display unit 34 based on the winning of the through gate 25). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is easier to select or the average reservation time is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. It may have been done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened (that is,). , Shortening the one-time variable display time on the accessory display unit 34), shortening the average time of the securing time, and increasing the winning probability, any one condition or any combination of conditions is applied. This may increase the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 53. Then, as such distribution destinations, a normal jackpot result (low probability correspondence special game result), an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result (explicit high probability correspondence game result or a result of sudden probability change state), and a 15R probability variation jackpot result (high probability). Corresponding special game result) is set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (low probability corresponding special gaming state).

The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. .. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / losing lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the 15R probability variation jackpot state (high probability corresponding special gaming state).

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state means a state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "10 to 14" corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. And "15-29" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result, the mode of the probability variation jackpot result is diversified. That is, when comparing the two types of probability variation jackpot results, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high frequency winning mode in the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest, and the opening / closing execution is executed. In the mode, the low-frequency winning mode is set, but in the support mode, the high-frequency support mode is set, and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is the lowest. As a result, the monotonousness of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In addition, as a kind of probability change jackpot result, the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / losing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. The result of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot (the result of the unspecified high-probability corresponding game or the result of the latent probability variation state) may be included. In this case, the probabilistic jackpot results will be further diversified.

Furthermore, as a kind of the winning / failing result in the winning / failing lottery, a special losing result that shifts to the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode and does not cause the transition to the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode after the end may be included. .. In the configuration in which both the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special deviation result are set as described above, the open / close execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. On the other hand, when the transition mode of the winning / failing lottery mode is different, for example, when either the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or the special deviation result occurs in the normal game state, it is determined. It is possible to make the player predict which result actually corresponds to.

The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 31. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 31 capable of displaying (or variablely displaying) the symbol (picture), and the variable display is performed in a game in which the open / close execution mode of the variable winning device 22 is the high-frequency winning mode. In a gaming machine in which the subsequent stop display result is a special display result, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 31 is started. A display state that makes the player think that it is a variable display state that tends to be a special display result.

Two types of expected effects are set: the above-mentioned reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the occurrence of the special display result in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of a high-frequency winning mode can be obtained by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 31. A display state is included in which a combination of reach symbols that may be established is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol sequence. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to produce a reach effect. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen to perform a reach effect.

Regarding the reach display related to the variable display of the symbol, specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of the symbol, a high frequency winning mode is generated on a preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 31. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the combination of reach symbols that may form the corresponding jackpot symbol combination, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variation display of the symbol is displayed by the final stop symbol sequence. To do.

Specifically, the display contents of FIG. 3 will be described in detail. Either is valid when the variable display of the symbol is first completed in the upper symbol row Z1 and then the variable display of the symbol is completed in the lower symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the middle symbol column Z2. It becomes a reach display by being told. Then, when the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of the symbol is finished.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbol is started on the display screen of the symbol display device 31, the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or a part of the symbol rows. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. In addition, the background image has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in both the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, in the game round that does not shift to the open / close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53. If so, it will be executed. On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to display the notice is not performed by the main control device 50, but by the voice emission control device 60.

The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 52 to determine the variation display time (display continuation period) in the main display unit 33 and the variation display time (display continuation period) of the symbol in the symbol display device 31. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the variation display on the main display unit 33 and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 31. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area (variable display time information storage means) of the ROM 53 is referred to.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 24a to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4.

A payout control device 55 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and a power supply and a launch control device 57 are also connected. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55, for example, based on a winning determination result for the winning ball unit corresponding to the winning. The payout control device 55 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 56 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50. A launch permission command is transmitted to the power supply and launch control device 57 based on the fact that the launch handle 41 is operated. The power source and the launch control device 57 drive the game ball launch mechanism 58 to launch the game ball toward the game area based on the launch permission command received from the main control device 50.

Further, the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and the display control of the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, at each game round, the display control of the main display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 52. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 24a is clearly indicated, the display control of the accessory display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 52.

Further, a variable winning drive unit for opening and closing the opening / closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22 and an electric accessory driving unit for opening / closing the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24 are connected to the output side of the MPU 52. .. That is, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit is executed in the MPU 52 so that the large winning opening 22a is opened and closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory 24a is won in the open state, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit is executed in the MPU 52 so that the electric accessory 24a is opened and closed.

Further, a voice emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and various commands for effect are transmitted to the voice emission control device 60.

Here, the processing executed by the MPU 52 will be briefly described.

The MPU 52 repeatedly executes a predetermined game progress process after the power is turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, as the game progress process, a normal process that is repeatedly executed in the first cycle and a second cycle that is shorter than the first cycle are started and executed by interrupting the normal process. Timer interrupt processing is set, but the specific processing configuration is arbitrary as long as the progress of the game can be controlled.

As a part of the game progress process, a hold information acquisition process, a game turn control process, a game state transition process, and a demo display process are set. In the hold information acquisition process, if a prize is detected in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 in a situation where the holding information of the upper limit number of holdings is not stored in the holding ball storage area 54b, a lottery is performed at that time. A process of storing the combination of the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the counter buffer 54a, the numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2, and the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in the hold ball storage area 54b is executed. NS. It should be noted that the hold information is stored in the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4 in chronological order as described above.

In the game time control process, the data shift process of the hold ball storage area 54b is performed on the condition that the hold information is held and stored in the hold ball storage area 54b while neither the game time is being executed nor in the open / close execution mode. Is executed. Specifically, the data stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE is shifted to the execution area AE. After that, the data stored in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. When the data shift process is executed, the winning / failing lottery process, the type determination process, and the game round start process are executed.

In the winning / failing lottery process, the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 among the pending information shifted to the execution area AE and the winning / failing table corresponding to the current winning / failing lottery mode are referred to to determine whether or not the winning / failing is won. judge. If the jackpot is won, the type determination process is further executed. In the type determination process, the jackpot type is specified by referring to the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 and the distribution table among the pending information shifted to the execution area AE.

In the game round start process, whether or not reach occurs even if the jackpot is not won by referring to the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 among the hold information shifted to the execution area AE and the reach table. To judge. Further, in the game round start processing, a variable display time table corresponding to the presence / absence of a jackpot winning, the jackpot type, and the presence / absence of a reach is read from the ROM 53, and the read variable display time table and the variable type counter CS at that timing are used. The variable display time of this game is determined from the numerical information. Then, in the game round start processing, the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the determined variable display time is started on the main display unit 33, the variable command including the information of the variable display time, the presence / absence of the jackpot winning, and the presence / absence of the jackpot winning. A type command including information on the jackpot type is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60.

By the way, the variable display time is determined by reading the variable display time table corresponding to the presence / absence of the jackpot winning, the jackpot type, and the presence / absence of the reach. Therefore, the variable display time includes information on the presence / absence of the reach. It can be said that it is. Further, as will be described later, since the voice emission control device 60 determines the reach display type according to the fluctuation display time, it can be said that the variation command includes the reach type information.

Further, in the game time control process, the variation display processing is executed during the execution of the game time, and when the fluctuation display time determined in the fluctuation start processing has elapsed, the game time is displayed on the main display unit 33. The variable display of the pattern is terminated with the presence / absence of the jackpot winning in the above and the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type displayed. In addition, an end command for instructing the end of the game round is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60.

In the game state transition process, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot winning is completed, the transition process to the open / close execution mode is executed, and the open / close process of the big winning opening 22a in the variable winning device 22 is started. When starting the open / close execution mode, during the open / close execution mode, ending the open / close execution mode, etc., various commands for the open / close execution mode are transmitted to the voice emission control device 60. In addition, when the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode are changed according to the jackpot type related to the game times that triggered the start of the mode.

In the demo display process, a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) for starting the demo elapses without starting a new game round after the end of the game round in a situation where the open / close execution mode is not in progress. Executes the determination process of whether or not it has been done. Further, after the power supply to the MPU 52 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) for starting the demonstration has elapsed without starting a new game round. The determination process of whether or not it has been performed is executed. Then, when it is determined that the elapse has passed, a command for displaying a demo is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60.

The demo display refers to a start waiting effect displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 when a predetermined start waiting period has elapsed. In the demo image, an image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 perform a predetermined operation is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the symbols perform a predetermined operation. After or instead of displaying the image, a moving image with a manufacturer name, a model name, or a predetermined character may be displayed. Further, in the configuration in which the demo display is performed by the animation of the symbols that are variablely displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding game may be used as the symbol. In this case, the demo display will be diversified.

<Voice emission control device 60>
Next, the voice emission control device 60 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 4, the voice emission control device 60 includes a voice emission control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 is a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 62, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A certain RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in.

As the ROM 63, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require an external power supply for storage retention is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be mounted as a separate chip. It may be installed.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The effect operation device 48 and the main control device 50 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and various light emitting units 35, 36, 44, the speaker unit 45, and the display control device 70 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. There is.

The MPU 62 recognizes that it is necessary to start the game rotation effect by receiving the variation command transmitted from the main control device 50, and executes the game rotation effect start process. Further, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that it is necessary to end the effect for the game round, and executes the effect end process for the game round. Further, by receiving various commands for the jackpot effect transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that the jackpot effect needs to be started or progressed, and the jackpot effect process is executed. Further, by receiving the demo display command transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that the demo display needs to be started, and the demo display process is executed.

Note that receiving a command from the main control device 50 in the MPU 62 is not limited to a configuration in which the command is directly received from the main control device 50, but also includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received.

In the game rounding effect start processing, based on both the variable command and the type command, the variable display time grasping process for grasping the variable display time (display duration) of the corresponding game round and the presence / absence of reach display are grasped. The reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process for grasping the presence or absence of the jackpot result, and the jackpot type grasping process for grasping the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs are executed. Further, based on the grasp results in the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, the display effect for determining the type of display effect to be performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 in this game round. In addition to executing the grasping process, the symbol type grasping process for determining the type of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 is executed in this game. Then, based on the results of each of these grasping processes, the display control device issues a variation pattern command including information on the variation display time and information on the type of display effect, and a symbol designation command including information on the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed. Send to 70.

Further, in the game rounding effect start process, in addition to the above-mentioned grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for whether or not to display a notice is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery of the notice display is also executed. Then, if the notice display is won, a notice command including information on the type of the notice display is transmitted to the display control device 70.

Further, in the game rotation effect start processing, the display light emitting table for the game rotation and the voice table for the game rotation are read from the ROM 63 based on the processing results of each of the above processes. The display light emitting table for the game round defines the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 44 in the progress process of the corresponding game round. In addition, the audio table for the game round defines the output mode from the speaker unit 45 in the progress process of the game round.

In the game round production end process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the voice output control of the speaker unit 45 in the current game round are ended. Further, in the game rotation effect end process, an end command including information for terminating the game rotation effect is transmitted to the display control device 70.

In the jackpot production process, based on the various commands for jackpot production received, the production mode such as at the opening, each round, between each round, and at the ending is grasped, and the jackpot production corresponding to the grasped result is grasped. Command is transmitted to the display control device 70. Further, based on the grasping result, the display light emitting table for the jackpot effect and the audio table for the jackpot effect are read from the ROM 63, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the jackpot effect. To specify.

In the demo display process, based on the received demo display command, the effect mode of the demo display is grasped, and the demo display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 70. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emitting table for the demo display and the audio table for the demo display are read from the ROM 63, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the demo display. To specify.

In addition to the above processing, the processing executed by the MPU 62 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50 includes processing for controlling the light emission of the first reserved light emitting unit 35 and the second reserved light emitting unit 36. included.

Further, the MPU 62 recognizes that the effect operating device 48 has been operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the effect operation device 48 based on the operation of the operation unit of the effect operation device 48. Then, the operation correspondence process is executed. In addition, even when the operated state is released, it is recognized by the falling edge of the operation signal, and the operation corresponding process is executed.

Here, as a part of the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 48, an effect is executed such that the image displayed on the symbol display device 31 is shifted to a different position on the two-dimensional plane. Then, as the shiftable position, a plurality of positions, specifically, two positions are set. Correspondingly, the operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is provided as, for example, a cross key or an operation lever that can rotate in a plurality of directions so that these plurality of positions can be individually specified. An operation signal corresponding to each operation is transmitted from the device 48. In the operation correspondence process, the operation mode is specified according to the type of the operation signal, and the operation generation command including the information that the effect operation device 48 is operated and the information of the operation mode is transmitted to the display control device 70. Further, in the operation correspondence process, when the operation of the operation unit is canceled, the operation release command is transmitted to the display control device 70. Further, in the operation correspondence process, in addition to the transmission of the above command, it is defined that the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 correspond to the operation of the effect operation device 48. ..

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 4, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. ..

The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads (fetches), interprets (decodes), and executes a control program or the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected to the input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77. Will be done. Note that receiving a command from the voice emission control device 60 in the display CPU 72 is not limited to a configuration in which the command is directly received from the voice emission control device 60, and includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received. Is done.

The display CPU 72 is connected to the work RAM 73, the memory module 74, and the VRAM 75 via a bus, and various data stored in the memory module 74 are transmitted to the work RAM 73 and the VRAM 75 based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60. Give a transfer instruction to transfer. Further, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and gives a drawing instruction to the symbol display device 31 to output an image signal based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60. Hereinafter, the memory module 74, the work RAM 73, the VRAM 75, and the VDP 76 will be described.

The memory module 74 stores control data (control information) including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 31, background data, and moving images. It is a storage means that stores various image data (image information) including image data in advance. The memory module 74 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage, and in detail, a NAND flash memory is used as the semiconductor memory. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily executed. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is used, the memory module 74 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM).

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outline and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color of the bitmap image at each pixel. There is. Further, the background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in which the still image data is compressed. The moving image data will be described in detail later.

The work RAM 73 is a storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 74 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storage, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. In this case, the control data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the display CPU 72 corresponding to the control data. Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into the internal memory area (register group) as needed, and executes various processes.

Incidentally, as the work RAM 73, a work RAM 73 having a read speed (transfer speed) faster than that of the NAND flash memory 102, which will be described later, is used when compared by reading data of the same capacity. In other words, as the work RAM 73, a work RAM 73 having a shorter reading period than the NAND flash memory 102 is used when compared by reading data of the same capacity.

The VRAM 75 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 31. The VRAM 75 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage, and in detail, SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 75 includes an expansion buffer 81, and image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. In this case, the image data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the VDP 76 using the image data. Further, the VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76.

Incidentally, as the VRAM 75, a VRAM 75 having a read speed (transfer speed) faster than that of the NAND flash memory 102, which will be described later, is used when compared by reading data of the same capacity. In other words, as the VRAM 75, a VRAM 75 having a shorter reading period than the NAND flash memory 102 is used when compared by reading data of the same capacity. The VRAM 75 may be built in the VDP 76.

The VDP 76 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 31 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the expansion buffer 81 based on the drawing instruction from the display CPU 72. This is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 31b incorporated so as to drive and control a liquid crystal display unit 31a in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP76 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control unit 91, a register 92, a moving image decoder 93, and a display circuit 94. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to the I / F95 for the display CPU 72 and the I / F96 for the VRAM75.

In the VDP 76, the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72 is stored in the register 92. When the drawing list is stored in the register 92, the control unit 91 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes a predetermined process. In addition, all the control programs for operating the control unit 91 may be provided by the drawing list, and a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the control unit 91, and the contents of the control program and the drawing list are combined. The control unit 91 may be configured to execute a predetermined process. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 74.

As the above processing, the control unit 91 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 82 using (or by processing) the image data expanded in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. The drawing data for one frame is the data required to display the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say that.

Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame region 82a and a second frame region 82b are provided. Each of these frame areas 82a and 82b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas (unit setting areas) corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a (that is, the display screen G) at a predetermined magnification. ing. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, a full-color method is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) at each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

The method is not limited to the full-color method. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed at each dot, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 82 is provided with the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b, in a situation where drawing to the symbol display device 31 is executed using the drawing data created in one frame area. , Creation of drawing data to be used in the future is executed for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 82.

In the display circuit 94, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b, and the image signal is transmitted to the display circuit 94. It is output to the symbol display device 31 via the connected output port 78. Further, a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal is also output from the display circuit 94. The display circuit 94 is provided with a scaler 97 and an image signal output unit 98 in order to generate and output the image signal. The scaler 97 and the image signal output unit 98 will be described in detail later.

Further, the moving image decoder 93 decodes the moving image data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. The content of the process will be described in detail later.

<Specific configuration of memory module 74>
Next, a specific configuration of the memory module 74 will be described.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram for explaining the hardware configuration of the memory module 74. As shown in FIG. 6, the memory module 74 is configured by packaging the controller 101 and the NAND flash memory 102 in one package. The NAND flash memory 102 is provided with a memory cell array, and the memory cell array has an area 103 for a control program that stores control program data of the display CPU 72, and a symbol display device 31 for displaying an image. An area 104 for image data that stores the image data to be used is provided.

The controller 101 is a storage side I / F 111 for transmitting / receiving data between the display CPU 72 of the transfer instruction source and the work RAM 73 and VRAM 75 of the data transfer destination, and a storage side I / F 111 for transmitting / receiving data between the NAND flash memory 102. / F112, controller CPU 113, control ROM 114 and control RAM 115, which are control units that perform data control processing in controller 101 and physical block management processing of NAND flash memory 102, and NAND flash based on transfer instructions from controller CPU 113. A transfer execution circuit 116 that executes reading of data from the memory 102, a cache memory 117 that temporarily stores the data read by the transfer execution circuit 116, and a data read from the NAND flash memory 102. It includes an error correction circuit 118 that detects an error and corrects the detected error.

Generally, even if a block containing a defect exists in the memory cell array, the NAND flash memory 102 is used by avoiding the block. The presence / absence and site of this defective block are different for each solid. Therefore, it is necessary to associate the logical address transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74 with each page of the physical block in the NAND flash memory 102, and the association is executed by the controller CPU 113.

Specifically, the control ROM 114 stores in advance an address management table (address management information group) that associates the logical address with the address of each page of the physical block. The address specification command received from the display CPU 72 is temporarily stored in the address specification buffer of the control RAM 115. When the address designation command is stored in the control RAM 115, the controller CPU 113 reads the address management table from the control ROM 114 and grasps the page address of the physical block corresponding to the designated logical address. Then, a transfer instruction is given from the controller CPU 113 to the transfer execution circuit 116, and data transfer is performed in the transfer execution circuit 116 so that the data of the physical address related to the transfer instruction is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 to the cache memory 117. The process is executed. The data transferred to the cache memory 117 is transferred to the work RAM 73 or the VRAM 75.

Incidentally, as the control ROM 114, a memory such as a mask ROM or a NOR type flash memory capable of reading data by random access is used. Further, as the cache memory 117, a memory whose read speed (transfer speed) is faster than that of the NAND flash memory 102 when compared by reading data of the same capacity is used. In other words, as the cache memory 117, a memory whose read period is shorter than that of the NAND flash memory 102 is used when compared by reading data of the same capacity. Specifically, it has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storage, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used.

The memory module 74 is provided with a boot memory 119 that stores boot data for initial booting in the display CPU 72 in advance. A mask ROM is used as the boot memory 119 so that random access is possible, and when compared by reading data of the same capacity, the read speed (transfer speed) is faster than that of the NAND flash memory 102. It is used. In other words, as the boot memory 119, a memory having a shorter reading period than the NAND flash memory 102 when compared by reading data of the same capacity is used.

The boot memory 119 is not limited to the mask ROM, and may be a NOR flash memory as long as the data read speed is faster than that of the NAND flash memory 102, and an internal power source such as a battery may be used. It may be a DRAM unit or a SRAM unit provided with.

The storage capacity of the boot memory 119 is set to be smaller than the storage capacity of the NAND flash memory 102. Specifically, the storage capacity of the NAND flash memory 102 is the same, substantially the same, or the same as the storage capacity of one page. Boot data for initial boot is stored in advance in the boot memory 119, and when the display CPU 72 executes the process at the time of initial boot, the data is not from the NAND flash memory 102 but from the boot memory 119. Is read out. As the boot data for the initial startup, an instruction code for initializing the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 and an instruction code for transferring the data stored in the NAND flash memory 102 to the work RAM 73 and the VRAM 75 are set.

The data transfer process executed by the controller 101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The data transfer process is started when an unprocessed address designation command is stored in the control RAM 115.

First, in step S101, it is determined whether or not the address designation this time is related to the access to the boot memory 119. Here, the display CPU 72 includes an initial transmission circuit so as to transmit an address designation command related to access to the boot memory 119 to the controller 101 when the supply of operating power is started. Specifically, the initial transmission circuit is configured to transmit an addressing command in which all bits are "1" via a bus that electrically connects the display CPU 72 and the memory module 74. .. The addressing command in which all the bits are "1" corresponds to the access to the boot memory 119, and the controller 101 relates to the access to the boot memory 119 when the command is received. Judge that there is.

The address specification command related to the access to the boot memory 119 does not have to have the above data structure, and may be, for example, a command in which all bits are "0". Further, as an electric wiring for electrically connecting the display CPU 72 and the memory module 74, a dedicated electric wiring is provided separately from the electric wiring for transmitting another address designation command, and the operating power to the display CPU 72 is supplied. When the supply is started, the signal output to the dedicated electric wiring may be started. In this case, when the signal output from the dedicated electrical wiring is started, the controller 101 starts the transfer of the data on the assumption that the transfer instruction of the data stored in the boot memory 119 is received. May be good.

If it is related to the access to the boot memory 119, the data transfer process is terminated after the process of transferring the boot data of the boot memory 119 to the display CPU 72 is executed in step S102. As a result, the boot data is read out by the display CPU 72.

On the other hand, if it is not related to the access to the boot memory 119 (step S101: NO), that is, if it is related to the access to the NAND flash memory 102, the process proceeds to step S103. Incidentally, although the details will be described later, the execution timing of the transfer instruction in this case is the timing before the program data and the image data stored in the NAND flash memory 102 are required by the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76, and the work RAM 73. And the transfer to the VRAM 75 is set to be completed.

In step S103, it is determined whether or not the address is the target address for predictive transfer. The target address for predictive transfer refers to a physical address corresponding to one page of logical addresses consecutive to the logical address when one page of logical address is specified by the display CPU 72.

If the address is not the target address for predictive transfer (step S103: NO), in step S104, the physical address corresponding to the logical address to be designated this time is grasped by using the address management table. By this processing, even in a configuration using the NAND flash memory 102 in which a defective block is likely to occur when writing data, it is possible to satisfactorily associate the physical address with the logical address.

In the following step S105, the controller CPU 113 issues a transfer instruction to the transfer execution circuit 116 so that the data stored in the grasped physical address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 to the cache memory 117. As a result, the transfer of the data to the cache memory 117 is started.

In the following step S106, it is determined whether or not the transfer to the cache memory 117 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. When the transfer to the cache memory 117 is completed, the data transfer instruction related to the target address of the predicted transfer is executed in step S107. As a result, in the transfer execution circuit 116, the transfer of the data stored in the physical address corresponding to the logical address consecutive to the logical address of the data whose transfer was completed immediately before is started to the cache memory 117.

In this case, the cache memory 117 has a storage capacity capable of simultaneously storing data for a plurality of pages, specifically, two pages. Then, in the transfer execution circuit 116, when the data related to the target address of the predicted transfer is transferred to the cache memory 117, the data of the immediately preceding address that triggered the prediction and the data already transferred to the cache memory 117 is transferred. The data related to the target address of the predictive forwarding is transferred so as not to be erased, that is, to an area different from the area where the data is stored. As a result, the data in the process of being transferred from the cache memory 117 to the work RAM 73 or the VRAM 75 can be prevented from being erased when the data related to the target address of the predicted transfer is transferred.

In the following step S108, a process of transferring the data determined to have been transferred to the cache memory 117 in step S106 to the side of the work RAM 73 and the VRAM 75 set as the transfer destination target is executed. In this case, when transmitting the address designation command, the display CPU 72 transmits the information of the data transfer destination RAM and the transfer destination address by including it in the address designation command or as another command. Therefore, in step S108, the data is transferred to the transfer destination address in the designated transfer destination RAM.

After that, in step S109, it is determined whether or not the data transfer from the cache memory 117 to the transfer destination target is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. Note that the data transfer request may not be accepted during this period. When the data transfer to the transfer destination target is completed (step S109: YES), the data transfer process ends.

If it is determined in step S103 that the address designation this time relates to the target address for the predicted transfer, the process proceeds to step S106 without executing the processes of steps S104 and S105. Then, when the transfer of the data related to the address designation to the cache memory 117 is completed (step S106: YES), the processes of steps S107 to S109 are executed, and the data transfer process is terminated.

The state of data transfer will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

FIG. 8A shows a state in which data is transferred from the boot memory 119, FIG. 8A shows a state of a read request from the display CPU 72, and FIG. 8B shows a state in which data is transferred from the boot memory 119. It is a state of data transfer. Further, FIG. 8B shows a state in which the data of the NAND flash memory 102 is transferred, FIG. 8C shows a state of a read request from the display CPU 72, and FIG. 8D shows a state for caching. A state of data transfer to the memory 117, and FIG. 8 (e) shows a state of data transfer from the cache memory 117.

First, a case where data is transferred from the boot memory 119 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the display CPU 72 transmits an address designation command at the timing of t1, and the controller CPU 113 recognizes the reception of the address designation command at the timing of t2.

After that, at the timing of t3, the controller CPU 113 grasps that the boot data of the boot memory 119 is designated as a read target, and data transfer from the boot memory 119 is started. In this case, the period from the recognition of the read request from the display CPU 72 by the controller CPU 113 to the start of data transfer is T1. After that, the data transfer is completed at the timing of t4.

Next, a case where data is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8B, the display CPU 72 transmits an address designation command at the timing of t5, and the controller CPU 113 recognizes the reception of the address designation command at the timing of t6.

After that, at the timing of t7, the controller CPU 113 grasps that the data of the NAND flash memory 102 is designated as the read target, and also grasps the physical address corresponding to the designated logical address, and further. The transfer execution circuit 116 sequentially recognizes the page corresponding to the physical address, and data transfer to the cache memory 117 is started. In this case, the period T2 from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7 is from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3 because the physical address corresponding to the logical address is recognized and the recognition is performed sequentially instead of random access. Longer than period T1.

After that, at the timing of t8, the data transfer to the cache memory 117 is completed, so that the data transfer from the cache memory 117 to the transfer destination RAM is started. In this case, the period from the recognition of the read request from the display CPU 72 by the controller CPU 113 to the start of data transfer to the transfer destination RAM is T3, and the data transfer from the boot memory 119 is performed. The period required to start is longer than T1.

After that, at the timing of t9 during the data transfer to the RAM, the transfer of the data corresponding to the target address of the predicted transfer to the cache memory 117 is started. In this case, in the controller CPU 113, the physical address corresponding to the continuous logical address may be specified by the transfer execution circuit 116, so that the address of the defective block is intervened between the physical addresses corresponding to the continuous logical address. Even if they are, by associating their continuity in advance, the time required for recognizing the physical address can be shortened as compared with the case where the physical address is recognized from the address specification command. The image data group for executing a predetermined effect such as the super reach display is stored over a plurality of physical blocks.

After that, at the timing of t10, the data transfer from the cache memory 117 to the transfer destination RAM is completed. Then, a new address designation command is transmitted from the display CPU 72. By the way, the NOR type flash memory is provided with an address terminal and a data input / output terminal separately, but the memory module 74 having the NAND type flash memory 102 has an address terminal and a data input / output terminal as its specifications. Are not provided separately. Therefore, after the data is transferred from the cache memory 117, the display CPU 72 sends an address designation command.

After that, at the timing of t11, the transfer of the data related to the predicted transfer to the cache memory 117 is completed, and at the timing of t12, the controller CPU 113 recognizes the reception of the new address designation command from the display CPU 72. Since the logical address specified by the address specification command corresponds to the logical address of the data that was the target of the predictive transfer, the memory for caching the data that was the target of the predictive transfer at the timing of t13 thereafter. The transfer from 117 to the transfer destination RAM is started.

In this case, the period from the recognition of the read request from the display CPU 72 by the controller CPU 113 to the start of data transfer is T4. As described above, the data related to the predictive transfer is transferred while the data is being transferred from the cache memory 117 to the RAM, and the start timing is before the read request from the display CPU 72 is made. It is the timing of. Therefore, the period T4 is shorter than the period T3 required until the data transfer is started when the data is read from the NAND flash memory 102 without the predictive transfer. Incidentally, the period T4 is shorter than the period T1 required until the data transfer from the boot memory 119 is started, but the period T4 is not limited to this and may be longer than the period T1. After that, at the timing of t14, the transfer of the data related to the predicted transfer is completed.

When data transfer related to predictive transfer is continuous, the transfer mode in which the period required from the cache memory 117 to the start of data transfer to the RAM is T4 in response to the read request from the display CPU 72. Will be continuous. On the other hand, if the logical address of the data related to the predicted transfer and the logical address related to the read request from the display CPU 72 do not match, the period required for the data transfer from the cache memory 117 to the RAM is started is T3. Data transfer is performed in such an manner.

As described above, since the NAND flash memory 102 is used as the memory for storing the control program data and the image data in advance, the capacity can be increased while suppressing the manufacturing cost as compared with the configuration using the NOR flash memory. Can be done. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 102, rewriting can be repeated at the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the development cost can be suppressed. It can also be recycled. In particular, instead of storing the control program data and the image data in individual memories, both data are stored in a single memory module 74, so that the transfer path to and from the display CPU 72 can be made compact. Can be done.

However, the NAND type flash memory 102 has a slower data transfer rate than the NOR type flash memory due to its specifications. On the other hand, since the boot data for initial startup is stored in advance in the boot memory 119, which requires a faster read speed than the NAND flash memory 102, the supply of operating power to the display CPU 72 is started. In this case, or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the display CPU 72 can promptly start the initial startup process. Therefore, the control in the display CPU 72 can be started smoothly as compared with the configuration in which the program data for initial startup is stored in the NAND flash memory 102.

Further, data having consecutive logical addresses with respect to the data designated as the transfer target by the display CPU 72 is set as the data related to the predictive transfer, and one page of data is transferred from the cache memory 117 to the transfer destination RAM. Using the period, the data related to the predicted transfer is pre-transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 to the cache memory 117. As a result, the time required for data transfer of pages having consecutive logical addresses can be shortened. Then, the display CPU 72 reads the program data previously transferred to the work RAM 73 and executes the process, and the VDP 76 reads the image data previously transferred to the VRAM 75 and executes the process. It is possible to prevent the data transfer waiting time from occurring, and each process can proceed smoothly.

Further, the NAND flash memory 102 and the boot memory 119 are packaged as a memory module 74, and the management of reading data from the memories 103 and 119 is performed by the controller CPU 113. As a result, the display CPU 72 may transmit a command for specifying an address to the controller CPU 113 regardless of whether the data transfer is performed from the NAND flash memory 102 or the boot memory 119. As a result, the configuration of the signal path related to the transmission of the command can be simplified. Further, since the parts of the memory module 74 that receive commands from the display CPU 72 are concentrated in the I / F 111, the configuration of the signal path can be simplified from this point as well.

By the way, the NAND flash memory 102 needs to input a write command signal to the WE terminal when reading data, but the HWE (HOST LIGHT ENABLE) terminal to which the write command signal is input from the outside in the controller 101 is in a pull-up state. However, since the FWE (FLASH WRITE ENABLE) terminal of the controller 101 is connected to the WE terminal of the NAND flash memory 102, it is not possible to input a substantial write command signal from the outside of the controller 101, and the NAND is used. A pseudo write command signal is input to the type flash memory 102. Therefore, while making it possible to read the data from the NAND flash memory 102 satisfactorily, unauthorized modification of the data in the NAND flash memory 102 is prevented.

<Expansion buffer 81 for work RAM 73 and VRAM 75>
Next, the expansion buffer 81 of the work RAM 73 and the VRAM 75 to which data is transferred from the memory module 74 in advance will be described.

First, the work RAM 73 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 4, the work RAM 73 specifically supplies electric power to itself while the transferred data is used even after it has been used for a period of time in which it may be used thereafter. A regular area 73a for storing and holding the data while the supply is continued, and a changing area 73b for being overwritten when transferring other data after use are provided.

Program data necessary for advancing main processing, V interrupt processing, command interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is written in the regular area 73a. By providing the regular area 73a, the main process, the V interrupt process, the command interrupt process, and the like, which are repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals, can be smoothly started.

If it becomes necessary to temporarily store data that exceeds the storage capacity of the change area 73b, all or part of the data in the regular area 73a will be stored within the range that does not hinder the smooth execution of processing in the display CPU 72. It may be configured to be temporarily erased. In this case, it is necessary that the data is returned to the regular area 73a by the start of the corresponding process.

In the change area 73b, program data necessary for executing a subroutine that is started as needed in each of these processes is written. Further, the program data required for the next subroutine to be executed may be transferred to the change area 73b while the predetermined subroutine is being executed, but the transfer transfers the program data of the subroutine being executed. It is done so as not to erase. Since the change area 73b is provided as described above, data transfer can be performed satisfactorily in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the work RAM 73 is suppressed to be smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 74.

Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main control device 50, the work RAM 73 is not supplied with backup power. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power source to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored and held in the work RAM 73 up to that point is erased or destroyed.

Next, the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 will be described.

Specifically, power is continuously supplied to the expansion buffer 81 while the transferred image data is used even after it has been used for a period of time in which it may be used thereafter. A regular area 81a for storing and holding the image data during the operation, and a change area 81b for being overwritten when transferring other image data after use are provided.

In the regular area 81a, background data and symbol sprite data used when the symbol display device 31 starts variable display of the symbol are written, and when a predetermined fraud or abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification image is displayed. The abnormality notification data used for display is written. Since the regular area 81a is provided, even if a drawing instruction is suddenly given from the display CPU 72, the VDP 76 can satisfactorily draw an image corresponding to the drawing instruction by accessing the regular area 81a. can.

When it becomes necessary to temporarily store image data that exceeds the storage capacity of the change area 81b, all or one of the regular areas 81a is used as long as the smooth image display on the symbol display device 31 is not hindered. The data of the part may be temporarily erased. In this case, it is necessary that the image data is returned to the normal area 81a by the drawing timing of the corresponding image.

The effect sprite data such as the effect character and the moving image data are written in the change area 81b. Further, the image data required for the next effect may be transferred to the change area 81b during the execution of the predetermined effect, but the transfer erases the image data necessary for the effect during the execution. It is done so as not to. Since the change area 81b is provided as described above, data transfer can be performed satisfactorily in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the expansion buffer 81 is suppressed to be smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 74.

Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main control device 50, the backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 75. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power source to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored and held in the VRAM 75 up to that point is erased or destroyed.

<Basic processing in the display CPU 72>
Next, the basic processing in the display CPU 72 will be described.

<Main processing>
First, the main process that is started when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 72 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main process.

In the main process, first, in step S201, the initial setting process is executed. In the initial setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 10, first, in step S301, a boot data transfer request is made to the memory module 74. Here, the processing is performed by operating the initial transmission circuit of the display CPU 72 as described above, but is shown in the processing flow for convenience of explanation. An address indicating the boot memory 119 is written in the area first referred to in the address map of the display CPU 72, and an address designation command may be transmitted to the memory module 74 based on the information.

After that, in step S302, it is determined whether or not the reading of the boot data is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the reading is completed. When the reading of the boot data is completed, the initialization process is executed in step S303. As the initialization process, the register of the display CPU 72, the register 92 of the VDP 76, the work RAM 73, and the VRAM 75 are initialized.

In the following step S304, the transfer of the latter half data for the initial setting is requested. In other words, the program data for initial setting is composed of the data for initial startup that constitutes the first half of the data and the data for the second half that is continuous with it, and the data for initial startup is set in the boot data. There is. Then, a data read instruction for the latter half of the initial startup data is set. In this way, by storing only the data from the beginning to the middle of the initial setting program data in the boot memory 119 as boot data in advance, the amount of data to be stored in the boot memory 119 can be suppressed. Along with this, the storage capacity of the boot memory 119 can be suppressed.

By the way, if the entire program data for initial setting is regarded as boot data, the data stored in advance in the boot memory 119 can be regarded as the initial program data, and the data in the latter half of the above can be regarded as the second program data. You can see it.

In the following step S305, the initial adjustment process of the scaler 97 is executed. In the initial adjustment process, when an image signal is output based on the drawing data created in each frame area 82a, 82b of the VRAM 75, the image signal is output corresponding to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a. As described above, the resolution initial adjustment command (resolution initial adjustment information) is transmitted to the VDP 76. This initial adjustment value is adjusted at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is included in the boot data as a command for initial resolution adjustment.

When the resolution initial adjustment command is transmitted to the VDP 76, the numerical information corresponding to the initial adjustment value is stored in the resolution adjustment area of the scaler 97 in the register 92 of the VDP 76. As a result, when the image signal is output from the VDP 76 to the symbol display device 31, the image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output in a state adjusted to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a.

In the following step S306, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the latter half of the data to the change area 73b of the work RAM 73 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. The data transfer instruction timing and the data capacity of the latter half are set so that the waiting time in step S306 is as short as possible or does not substantially occur. When the transfer of the data in the latter half is completed, the process proceeds to step S307.

Incidentally, step S301 is executed on the circuit of the display CPU 72 as described above, and the processes from step S302 to step S306 are executed based on the boot data stored in advance in the boot memory 119, and the processes from step S307 to step S314 are executed. Is executed based on the data in the latter half.

In step S307, a transfer request for initial image data is made to the memory module 74. Here, the initial image data is the minimum image data for displaying the image related to the system test on the symbol display device 31, and the symbol is variablely displayed in front of the predetermined background image on the display screen G. The data capacity is set smaller than the image data required for this purpose and the image data required for displaying the demo image.

The image related to the system test is an image for confirming that the symbol display device 31 is normal at the manufacturing factory of the pachinko machine 10 or the game hall. For example, an image in red on the entire surface of the display screen G. Is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image in which a plurality of colors are divided and displayed may be used, or an image in which the manufacturer name and model name of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed may be used. The memory module 74 receives an address designation command corresponding to the initial image data from the display CPU 72 to start transferring the initial image data to the change area 81b in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

In the following step S308, the display mode is initially set. Although a specific description will be described later, the pachinko machine is set with a plurality of display modes (two types in detail) having background images having different base colors, and a predetermined display mode among the plurality of display modes is set. Executes the process of initializing the display mode.

In the following step S309, the ground color initial adjustment process is executed. In the initial adjustment process, a command for initial ground color adjustment (ground color initial adjustment) is given to VDP so that the numerical information set as the initial value in the unit area of each frame area 82a, 82b of the VRAM 75 becomes the initial numerical information. Information) is sent. This initial numerical information is adjusted at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is included in the data of the latter half as a command for initial ground color adjustment.

When the ground color initial adjustment command is transmitted to the VDP76, the initial numerical information is stored in the ground color adjustment area in the register 92 of the VDP76. As a result, when the drawing data is created, the ground color is displayed at the dots corresponding to the unit areas that have not been updated from the initial numerical information. As the initial ground color, blue is set in the pachinko machine 10. As described above, 256 colors can be set for blue, and the ground color is set to the brighter side of the colors. This makes it easier for the administrator to detect missing dots.

The color is not limited to bright blue, and may be set to dark blue. Further, the ground color is not limited to blue, and may be arbitrary, for example, white in which all RGB values are set on the bright side. Even in this case, the missing dots can be easily confirmed.

After that, in step S310, a ground color display process, which is a process for displaying the ground color on the display screen G, is executed. The process will be described later.

In the following step S311, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the initial image data to the VRAM 75 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. Even when the transfer of the initial image data is completed, the ground color display process is repeatedly executed over the predetermined period so that the ground color is displayed over the predetermined period. May be. When the transfer of the initial image data is completed, the process proceeds to step S312.

In step S312, a transfer request for regular program data is made to the memory module 74. As described above, this regular program data includes program data necessary for advancing the processing after step S201 in the main processing and various interrupt processing. The memory module 74 starts transferring the regular program data to the regular area 73a of the work RAM 73 by receiving the address designation command corresponding to the regular program data from the display CPU 72.

In the following step S313, the task process for the initial image is executed. In the task process, a process of grasping various parameters necessary for instructing the VDP76 to display the initial image is executed. Specifically, as various parameters, the address information of the area to which the initial image data is transferred in the VRAM 75, the information of the target frame areas 82a and 82b for which drawing data should be created using the initial image data, and the frame area to be created. In 82a and 82b, information on coordinates when writing the initial image data, information on the scale when writing the initial image data, and information on a uniform α value (semi-transparent value) when writing the initial image data are included. There is.

In the following step S314, a drawing list is created as drawing instruction information including information corresponding to the processing result of the task processing in step S313, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76. The VDP 76 creates drawing data corresponding to the initial image according to the drawing list in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be created, and further outputs an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data. As a result, the display of the initial image is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. The display of the initial image is continued until a new drawing list is transmitted from the display CPU 72 and the image is updated by the VDP 76. By displaying the initial image in this way, the display of the image on the display screen G is started at an earlier timing than in the configuration in which no image is displayed on the display screen G until the display of the image for the game is started. can do.

In the following step S315, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the regular program data to the work RAM 73 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. The transfer instruction timing and data capacity of the regular program data are set so that the waiting time in step S315 is as short as possible or does not substantially occur. When the transfer of the regular program data is completed, the process proceeds to step S316.

In step S316, a transfer request for regular image data is made to the memory module 74. After that, the initial setting process is terminated. As described above, the common image data includes background data and symbol sprite data used when the symbol display device 31 starts the variable display of the symbol. In addition, the abnormality notification data used when displaying the abnormality notification image when a predetermined fraud or abnormality is detected is included. The memory module 74 receives an address designation command corresponding to the regular image data from the display CPU 72 to start transferring the regular image data to the regular area 81a of the expansion buffer 81.

Here, when the main process is started in the display CPU 72 by executing the initial setting process as described above, (1) the boot program data consisting of the boot data and the latter half data, (1) 2) initial image data, (3) regular program data, and (4) regular image data are transferred from the memory module 74. In this case, the data is transferred in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4). Further, by executing the processes of step S302, step S306, step S311 and step S315, the transfer timings of the respective data are not duplicated. Therefore, the transfer of each of the above data can be performed satisfactorily.

Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 9), after executing the initial setting process in step S201, various interrupts are permitted in step S202. As a result, the display CPU 72 is allowed to execute the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. After that, in the main process, the process of step S202 is repeated.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing will be described.

The command interrupt process is a process that is activated with the highest priority when a strobe signal is received from the voice emission control device 60, regardless of the process being executed at that time. In the command interrupt process, the command received on the input port 77 is transferred to the command buffer provided in the change area 73b of the work RAM 73, and a flag indicating that a new command has been received is set in the corresponding area. set. After that, the command interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the process before the command interrupt process was started.

The process of confirming the command is not limited to the above configuration. For example, instead of confirming whether or not a strobe signal is received, the input port 77 is periodically monitored, and the command is received as the monitoring result. It may be configured to transfer to the command buffer when is confirmed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle, specifically, a 20 msec cycle.

When the VDP76 outputs an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 31, the VDP76 starts outputting the image signal from a dot in the upper left corner of the display screen G and is on a horizontal line including the dot at one end. The image signals are sequentially output to the dots that are lined up, and the image signals are output to the dots from left to right in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, the image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner of the display screen G. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, and causes the display CPU 72 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this respect, the V interrupt process can be regarded as being activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started.

In the V interrupt process, first, the command analysis process is executed in step S401. Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 73 is analyzed. In the following step S402, it is determined whether or not a new command is received based on the analysis result of step S401. If a new command has been received, the command correspondence process is executed in step S403.

In the command correspondence process, the data table for executing the program corresponding to the received command is grasped. The data table defines the processing required to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the received command is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. It is a group of information.

Here, as the command received by the display CPU 72 from the voice emission control device 60, there are a variation pattern command, a symbol designation command, and a notice command as described above. When these commands are received, the data table required for executing the game rotation effect corresponding to each command on the symbol display device 31 is grasped. In addition, there is an end command as the command to be received, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for finally stopping the currently executed game rotation effect is grasped. In addition, the commands to be received include various commands for the jackpot effect, and when the command is received, the data table required to execute the jackpot effect is grasped. Further, as the above-mentioned received command, there is a command for demo display, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for executing the demo display is grasped. In addition, grasp other program data necessary when executing processing based on the data table that is grasped as necessary.

Of the data tables required to execute the game circulation effect, the data table required to start the game rotation effect has already been transferred to the regular area 73a of the work RAM 73 as regular program data. In addition, the data table required to finally stop the game forwarding effect, the data table required to start the jackpot effect, and the data table required to execute the demo display are also used as regular program data in the work RAM 73. It has already been transferred to area 73a. Further, other program data necessary for executing the process based on these data tables has already been transferred to the regular area 73a of the work RAM 73 as regular program data.

After executing the command correspondence process in step S403, it is determined in step S404 whether or not the program data needs to be transferred in advance. The data determined to be necessary here are the data tables determined to be necessary in step S403 that are not included in the regular program data, and are necessary for executing the processing based on the data tables. Other program data.

If the program data needs to be transferred in advance, the memory module 74 is requested to transfer the necessary program data in step S405. The memory module 74 starts transferring the program data to the change area 73b of the work RAM 73 by receiving the address designation command corresponding to the program data from the display CPU 72.

That is, when a new command is received, the display CPU 72 determines whether or not new program data transfer is necessary at the timing of analyzing the command, and requests the transfer of program data if necessary. As a result, the advance transfer of the program data can be started at the earliest possible timing. Incidentally, at the time of this transfer request, not only the logical address in which the program data of the transfer request target is stored but also the address of the transfer destination is specified. In addition, since the data table and program data including the processing of the first timing in executing the processing corresponding to the command are transferred as regular program data at the initial startup, the processing corresponding to the command is performed after receiving the command. There is no waiting time before it is started.

After the negative determination is made in step S402, the negative determination is made in step S404, or the process of step S405 is executed, the process proceeds to step S406. In step S406, the pointer update process is executed. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. As a result, the display CPU 72 can grasp the processing required to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time.

In the following step S407, task processing is executed. In the task processing, in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time, the parameters necessary for giving the drawing instruction to the VDP 76 are calculated. The details of the task processing will be described later.

In the following step S408, the drawing list output process is executed. In the drawing list output processing, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing related to the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP76 creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to this drawing list. The processing in this VDP 76 will be described in detail later.

In the following step S409, it is determined whether or not the program data is being transferred. If the program data is being transferred, this V interrupt process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the program data is not being transferred, it is necessary to transfer the image data by referring to the information set as the update timing after the current status in the currently set data table in step S410. Is determined.

Of the various image data, the image data used for drawing instructions based on the regular program data is set as the regular image data. That is, as the regular image data, the image data necessary for starting the game rounding effect, the image data necessary for starting the jackpot effect, and the image data necessary for executing the demo display are set. .. The transfer request for these image data has already been made to the memory module 74 in the initial setting process (FIG. 10), and the transfer is completed when the display CPU 72 is in a situation of receiving a command.

The configuration is not limited to this, and at least the processing after step S406 may not be executed until the transfer of the regular image data is completed. In this case, after the main process (FIG. 9) is started in the display CPU 72 and the initial image is displayed on the symbol display device 31, the display of the initial image is continued until the transfer of the regular image data is completed. It becomes. In addition, when transferring the initial image data, the simple symbol data with a data capacity smaller than the total data capacity of the image data required for variable display of the symbol is also transferred at the same time, and the transfer of the regular image data group is completed. If a fluctuation pattern command is received in a situation where the fluctuation pattern command is not received, the fluctuation display may be performed using a simple symbol.

The image data determined to need to be transferred in step S410 is the image data required at the update timing after the current state in the currently set data table, and is not included in the regular image data. Is. If it is not necessary to transfer the image data, the V interrupt process is terminated as it is. When the image data needs to be transferred, the V interrupt process ends after making the necessary image data transfer request to the memory module 74 in step S411. The memory module 74 receives an address designation command corresponding to the image data from the display CPU 72 to start transferring the image data to the change area 81b of the expansion buffer 81.

That is, the display CPU 72 refers to the currently set data table, determines whether or not new image data transfer is necessary, requests image data transfer if necessary, and creates drawing data in the VDP 76. Make sure that the image data is pre-transferred before the timing required for the operation. As a result, drawing data can be smoothly created in the VDP 76. Incidentally, at the time of this transfer request, not only the logical address in which the image data of the transfer request target is stored but also the address of the transfer destination is specified. In addition, since the regular image data is transferred at the time of initial startup, there is no waiting time from the reception of the command to the start of the display of the corresponding image.

Here, by executing the process of step S409, the transfer of the program data is prioritized over the transfer of the image data. Further, even if the transfer of the program data is prioritized in this way, since the configuration is such that the necessity of transferring the image data is determined by referring to the data table, even if the transfer is temporarily avoided in step S409. After that, the necessity of transfer is determined by the V interrupt process, and the transfer request is executed. As a result, the transfer timings of the program data and the image data can be prevented from overlapping, and the transfer of the program data can be prioritized.

<Basic processing in VDP76>
Next, the basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

In the VDP 76, a process of setting the value of the register 92 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 72, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72, A process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b.

Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 95 for the display CPU 72. Further, the process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly started by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. 12 (a) to 12 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information on the target buffer, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b is to be created for the image for one frame related to the drawing list, is set. There is. Further, in the header information, information on whether or not decoding is specified and information on the address to which the moving image data to be decoded is transferred are set. In addition, various designated information is set in the header information. The contents of various designated information will be described later.

In addition to the above header information, a plurality of types of image data used for displaying an image for one frame are set in the drawing list, and further, information on the drawing order of each image data and information on the drawing order of each image data are set. Parameter information and is set. In detail, the information of the drawing order is set so as to be the numerical information of the serial number, and the information of the image data to be used is set in which each numerical information has a one-to-one correspondence. In addition, parameter information is set so that there is a one-to-one correspondence with the information of each image data.

The drawing order is set so that the individual images to be displayed so as to be located on the back side of the display screen G in the image for one frame are drawn first. The individual image is a still image defined by still image data such as background data, or a sprite defined by sprite data such as symbol sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 12A, the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and then the sprite data B is written. In the image for one frame, each individual image is displayed so as to be on the front side in the order of background image → effect image → symbol.

Parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), ..., A plurality of types of parameters are set. Specifically, regarding the background data parameter P (1), as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the information of the address of the area to which the background data is transferred in the VRAM 75 and the information on the two-dimensional plane when the background data is written. Frame areas 82a, 82b with respect to the coordinate information indicating the position of, the rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the two-dimensional plane when writing the background data, and the size set as the initial state of the background data. Scale information indicating the magnification when writing to, uniform α value information indicating the entire transparency information (or transparency information) when writing background data, and α data designation indicating whether or not α data is applied and what is applied. Information and is set. As shown in FIG. 12C, the types of the above parameters are the same for the sprite data A.

Here, the coordinate information is not set individually for all the pixels constituting the image data, but the information of one coordinate is set for one image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is specified. In VDP76, it is possible to recognize that the information of the designated coordinates is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when arranging the image data, one pixel at the center is set to be on the designated coordinates. .. As a result, the information capacity of the coordinate information to be specified for one image data in the display CPU 72 can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to be able to recognize the coordinates for all the pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to one pixel at the center, and may be a pixel at a corner such as an upper left or an upper right. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as a rectangular shape, by using the pixels at the corners as the reference pixels, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixels.

Further, the uniform α value is transparent information applied to all dots of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparent information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102 as image data. In the α data, the transparency information can be different for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

Since the α value and α data are set uniformly as described above, in a situation where the transparency of background data and sprite data should be controlled uniformly for all pixels instead of being finely controlled for each pixel. It is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to handle with a uniform α value, and it is also possible to finely control the transmittance in pixel units by applying α data.

The drawing process in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the creation of the drawing data instructed in the drawing list that has already been received is completed. When the creation of the drawing data is completed, it is determined in step S502 whether or not a new drawing list is received from the display CPU 72. If a new drawing list has been received, the corresponding process at the time of reception is executed in step S503.

In the corresponding processing at the time of reception, from the information of the target buffer included in the drawing list, it is grasped in which frame area 82a or 82b the image for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is created, and the grasp is grasped. Set the created frame area as the drawing data creation target. In addition, it grasps whether or not decoding is specified, and if there is decoding specification, it grasps the address to which the moving image data to be decoded is transferred, and operates the moving image decoder so as to decode the moving image data. .. The details of this decoding will be described later.

In the following step S504, the content grasping process is executed. In the content grasping process, the type of image data initially set as the drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameters of the image data are grasped. In the case of sprite data, the color palette data is applied to each dot of the bitmap image. In the following step S505, the writing process is executed. In the writing process, the image data to be drawn this time is written in the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation target based on the grasping result of the content grasping process in step S504.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that the drawing data instructed by the already received drawing list is being created, the drawing list counter is updated in step S506. As a result, the drawing target is switched to the image data in the next drawing order. Then, the processes of steps S504 and S505 are executed for the switched image data. That is, by executing the drawing process a plurality of times, the drawing data of the image for one frame specified by one drawing list is created.

Note that the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, and a configuration in which a plurality of image data are processed in one drawing process may be used, and the drawing process may be performed. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each processing time of the above, and a configuration in which a different number of image data is processed in each processing time of the drawing processing may be used.

When a negative determination is made in step S502, or after the process of step S505 is executed, it is determined in step S507 whether or not the image signal output for one frame is completed in the display circuit 94. If it is not completed, the main drawing process is terminated as it is, and if it is completed, the V interrupt signal is output to the display CPU 72, and then the main drawing process is terminated.

The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within the range of the 20 msec cycle. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data. However, since the double buffer method is adopted as described above, the output of the image signal is output to the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data for the relevant frame one frame later. The display circuit 94 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame areas 82a and 82b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed, and the control unit 91 is switched by the selector circuit. The frame areas 82a and 82b, which are the drawing targets of the drawing data, are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting the image signal.

<Task processing in the display CPU 72>
Next, the task processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described.

As described above, the task process is executed in the V interrupt process (FIG. 11) of the display CPU 72 in order to grasp the information necessary for creating the drawing list. In this case, in the task processing, not only the individual images included in the range of the image for one frame but also the individual images not included in the range of the image for one frame are controlled.

With reference to FIG. 14, the range of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 to be calculated by the display CPU 72 will be described. In FIG. 14, the range partitioned by the alternate long and short dash line is the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, and the range partitioned by the alternate long and short dash line is the drawing range PL2 for one frame defined in each of the frame areas 82a and 82b. Further, the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 and the drawing range PL2 shown in FIG. 14 schematically show a data structure for performing an operation on the display CPU 72.

As shown in FIG. 14, both the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 and the drawing range PL2 for one frame are defined to have a rectangular shape, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is defined so that the defined virtual area is wider than the drawing range PL2 for one frame, and the range is defined to include the entire drawing range PL2 for one frame. Has been done. This size is set so that a plurality of drawing ranges PL2 for one frame can be arranged in both the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

The display CPU 72 calculates the individual image with the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 as the range of the calculation target, and the reference coordinates are set as the reference of the position at the time of the calculation. The reference coordinates are arbitrary as long as they are defined as one dot among the dots included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, but in this pachinko machine 10, the drawing range PL2 for one frame is arranged at the initial setting position. It is defined as a dot in the upper left corner of the drawing range PL2 in the state of being. The initial setting position is a position where the drawing range PL2 for one frame is arranged in the center of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1.

Since the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is set as described above, the display CPU 72 does not include the image for one frame, but the individual image is included in the image for one frame at the subsequent update timing. It is possible to start the calculation in advance. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, by using the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, it is possible to perform an effect in which the viewpoint is switched based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 by the player. That is, the position of the drawing range PL2 for one frame can be displaced from the initial setting position in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. The calculation for performing this effect is executed by the task processing of the display CPU 72.

Hereinafter, the task processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the viewpoint can be switched. The viewpoint switchable period is set as, for example, a period from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 31 to the stop of the symbol variation display in the first symbol sequence Z1 or the next symbol sequence Z2. It may be set as a period during which the notice display is being performed on the symbol display device 31, or may be set as a period during which the reach display is being performed on the symbol display device 31. 31 may be set as a period during which a specific reach effect is being performed, or may be set as a period during which a jackpot effect is being performed in the symbol display device 31. In addition, information on whether or not the viewpoint can be switched is set in the data table.

When the viewpoint can be switched, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the viewpoint can be switched. The viewpoint switching state means a state in which the drawing range PL2 for one frame is set at a position different from the initial setting position, and the viewpoint switching flag is set in the work RAM 73 when the viewpoint is switched. As a result, the viewpoint switching state is set, and when the drawing range PL2 returns to the initial setting position, the flag is cleared and the viewpoint switching state is released.

If it is not in the viewpoint switching state, it is determined in step S603 whether or not there is a viewpoint switching instruction. Whether or not the viewpoint switching instruction is given is determined by determining whether or not an operation generation command has been received from the voice emission control device 60.

Here, the operation generation command is transmitted based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 as described above, and further corresponds to the fact that a plurality of positions where the viewpoint can be switched are set. The operation occurrence command includes information on the position to be switched. Whether or not the operation generation command has been received is determined in step S402 of the V interrupt process (FIG. 11), and if the operation generation command has been received, it is determined in step S403 that the operation generation command has been received. The indicated flag is set in the work RAM 73, and information corresponding to the type of operation occurrence command is set in the work RAM 73.

If there is a viewpoint switching instruction, the coordinate change process of the drawing range PL2 is executed in step S604. In the coordinate change process, it is determined which coordinate the information included in the operation generation command corresponding to the current switching instruction is the information instructing the change to which coordinate, and the drawing range PL2 moves to the coordinate corresponding to the instruction. The coordinate information of the drawing range PL2 is updated so as to be performed. In addition, the viewpoint switching state is set in the coordinate change process.

On the other hand, when the viewpoint is already switched (step S602: NO), it is determined in step S605 whether or not the release condition is satisfied. Whether or not this release condition is satisfied is determined by determining whether or not an operation release command has been received from the voice emission control device 60. The specific processing configuration for determining whether or not the operation release command has been received is the same as for the operation occurrence command.

If the release condition is satisfied, the drawing range restoration process is executed in step S606. In the return process, the coordinate information of the drawing range PL2 is updated so that the drawing range PL2 returns to the initial setting position. In addition, the viewpoint switching state is released in the return process. Even when it is determined that the viewpoint switching period is not reached (step S601: NO), the process of step S606 is executed. However, if the drawing range PL2 has already returned to the initial setting position, the process of step S606 may be skipped.

If a negative determination is made in step S603, after executing the process of step S604, if a negative determination is made in step S605, or after executing the process of step S606, the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not an individual image whose control start target exists exists. The individual images to be controlled are shown in the currently set data table, and are set in association with the positions of a plurality of types of drawing ranges PL2 during the viewpoint switching period. Further, the individual images to be controlled are not all the individual images that can be arranged on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, but the currently set drawing range PL2 and the specified number of dots vertically and horizontally from the drawing range PL2. Individual images included in the outer range but not yet set as control targets are extracted.

If there are individual images of the control start target, it is determined in step S608 whether or not there are a plurality of individual images of the control start target. If a plurality of individual images do not exist, the single individual image is grasped as a control start target, and the process proceeds to step S612 without executing the processes of steps S609 to S611.

If there are a plurality of images (step S608: YES), whether or not there are individual images of the control start target whose at least a part is included in the currently set drawing range PL2 in step S609. Is determined. That is, in the configuration in which the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is set in the display CPU 72 as described above, and individual images outside the currently set drawing range PL2 can also be controlled, the control start target is individual. Since the image includes not only the image within the drawing range PL2 but also the image outside the drawing range PL2, in step S609, it is determined which one corresponds to. By the way, the coordinates of the control start position of the individual image included in the control start target are set in the currently set data table, and the coordinates of this control start position and the currently set coordinates of the drawing range PL2 are used. By referring to, the relative position of the individual image included in the control start target with respect to the drawing range PL2 can be grasped.

When there is an individual image of the control start target whose at least a part is included in the drawing range PL2, the individual image is grasped as the current control start target in step S610. In this case, when a plurality of individual images of the control start target are included in the drawing range PL2, all of them are grasped as the control start target. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the individual image is outside the drawing range PL2 so that a situation in which a plurality of individual images to be controlled to be started exist in the drawing range PL2 in one process of the task processing does not occur. It may be configured to be set as a control start target in the processing times where the processing load is low in the situation existing in.

On the other hand, when the individual image of the control start target is not included in the drawing range PL2, it means that a plurality of control start targets exist outside the drawing range PL2. In this case, in step S611, among the individual images outside the drawing range PL2, the individual image on the side closer to the currently set drawing range PL2 is grasped as the control start target.

Incidentally, as a result of the processing of step S610 and step S611, the individual image whose control start timing is postponed is grasped as a control start target in the next and subsequent processing times. In this case, if the individual image displayed as if it is moving in a predetermined direction at each image update timing is postponed, the control start time parameter of the individual image including the control start position is one update timing. It is updated on the data table so that it is in the advanced state. As a result, even if the control start timing is postponed, the individual image is displayed at a predetermined position and state at a predetermined timing.

When a negative determination is made in step S608, or after executing either the process of step S610 or step S611, the control start process of steps S612 to S614 is executed. In the control start process, first, in step S612, the work RAM 73 searches for a free buffer area for performing various operations in controlling the individual image, and pairs with the individual image grasped as the control start target. Allocate a free buffer area so as to correspond with 1.

In the following step S613, the initialization process is executed for all the free buffer areas secured in step S612. In the following step S614, a parameter for starting control according to the individual image is set for the free buffer area initialized in step S613. The parameters for starting the control include the position, rotation angle, and size of the target individual image on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1. When there are a plurality of individual images grasped as control start targets, parameters for control start are individually set for each free buffer area corresponding to each individual image.

When a negative determination is made in step S607 or after the process of step S614 is executed, the control update process of steps S615 to S618 is executed. In the control update process, first, in step S615, the background calculation process is executed. In the background arithmetic processing, the control update target of this time is grasped among the backmost still image and the background sprite that constitute the background image. Further, for the grasped control update target, various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value and α data designation on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 are calculated and derived. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived parameters in the area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73.

In the following step S616, the effect calculation process is executed. In the effect calculation process, among the effect sprites that compose the image of the effect to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect, the control update target of this time is grasped. In addition, the above-mentioned various parameters are derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived parameters in the area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73.

In the following step S617, the symbol arithmetic processing is executed. In the calculation processing for symbols, among the symbols that are the targets of the variable display in each game round, the control update target of this time is grasped. In addition, the above-mentioned various parameters are derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived parameters in the area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73.

Incidentally, in each process of steps S615 to S617, animation data set to change various parameters of individual images according to a specific pattern is used each time the image update timing is reached. This animation data is defined according to the type of individual image. Further, the animation data is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102, and is pre-transferred to the work RAM 73 by the time when the display CPU 72 needs to read the data.

After that, after executing the drawing instruction target grasping process in step S618, this task process ends. In the drawing instruction target grasping process, among the individual images subject to control update by each process of steps S615 to S617, the individual images included in the image for one frame related to the current drawing data creation instruction are selected. Execute the process to grasp.

The grasp is performed by executing a predetermined calculation with reference to the information of the drawing range PL2 currently set and the information of the coordinates, the rotation angle and the scale of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. By setting the individual images specified in the drawing list as only the individual images to be displayed instead of all the individual images for which control has been started, it is necessary to select the individual images to be displayed in the VDP 76. There is no need to uselessly draw an individual image that is not a display target even if it is not sorted. As a result, the processing load of VDP76 can be reduced.

As described above, for the individual image targeted for control start, "search for free buffer area" in step S612, "initialization of secured buffer area" in step S613, and "setting of parameters for control start" in step S614. And step S615 to step S617, the "update procedure of various parameters" is executed, whereas for the individual image of only the control update target, any of the "various parameters" of steps S615 to S617 is executed. Only the "renewal procedure" is executed. Therefore, the processing load of the individual image that is the control start target is larger than that of the individual image that is only the control update target. It should be noted that the process of step S614 may not be executed, and the process instead of the individual image targeted for control start may be executed in any one of steps S615 to S617.

Here, as described above, it is necessary to update the image at a cycle of 20 msec, and this image update is performed by transmitting the drawing list created based on the processing result of the task processing to the VDP76. Then, the task processing is the period required for creating the drawing list and receiving it by the VDP76 for 20 msec, and the period required for creating the drawing data corresponding to one frame of the image based on the drawing list. Must be completed in a shorter period than the period after deducting. Under such circumstances, as described above, the control start process has a larger processing load than the control update process. Therefore, if there are many individual images to be controlled in one process, the task process is completed. There is a possibility that processing will be missed in time. On the other hand, since the processes of steps S608 to S611 are executed and the control start timings are distributed so that there are not many individual images to be controlled in one process, the above-mentioned processing omissions occur. It is designed not to occur.

Although detailed description is omitted, the individual image once controlled is not displayed within a predetermined number of frames, such as a position deviated from the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1. When becomes, it is excluded from the control target. When it becomes necessary to perform control for the individual image again, the process for starting control is executed again.

Next, a state in which each individual image is controlled by the above task processing will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) and 16 (b) are explanatory views for explaining how each individual image is controlled, and FIG. 16 (a) shows a case where the viewpoint is not switched, and FIG. 16 (b) shows. ) Indicates the case where the viewpoint is switched.

When the viewpoint is not switched, the drawing range PL2 is fixed as shown in FIG. 16A. In this case, since the individual images PC1 to PC3 included in the drawing range PL2 are the control start targets at the timing before the timing shown in FIG. 16A, only the control update process is executed.

On the other hand, since the individual image PC4 and the individual image PC5 that are outside the drawing range PL2 but are included in the control target range PL3 have not yet been controlled, these individual image PC4 and individual image PC5 are included in the control start target. Will be. However, if the processing load becomes large when the control start processing is executed for both the individual image PCs 4 and PC5, the control start processing is preferentially executed for the individual image PC4 close to the drawing range PL2 and individually. The control start process for the image PC 5 is performed in the next task process. Further, the individual image PC6 and the individual image PC7, which are included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 but are outside the control target range PL3, are not included in the control start target, and the control start process is not executed.

When a plurality of individual objects outside the drawing range PL2 exist as control start targets, the control start process is preferentially executed from the side closer to the drawing range PL2. As a result, in a configuration in which the control start timing is distributed, the frequency with which the control start process is executed at the timing when at least a part of the drawing range PL2 is included is reduced.

When the viewpoint is switched, as shown in FIG. 16B, in the previous task processing, the drawing range PL2 was the first position partitioned by the alternate long and short dash line, whereas this task In the process, the drawing range PL2 is displaced to the second position defined by the solid line. In this case, a part of the drawing range PL2 at the second position is included in the drawing range PL2 at the first position, and accordingly, the individual image PC 8 is the first at the time of the previous task processing. Since at least a part of the drawing range PL2 at the position of is included, it is already a control target. Therefore, in the task processing this time, it is not necessary to execute the control start processing for the individual image PC 8.

On the other hand, since the individual image PC 9 and the individual image PC 10 are newly included in the drawing range PL2 displaced to the second position, the control start processing is prioritized over both the individual image PC 9 and the individual image PC 10. Is executed and controlled. In this case, the individual image PC 11 is newly included in the control target range for the drawing range PL2 at the second position, but the control start process is preferentially executed for each of the individual images PC 9 and PC 10. , This time it is excluded from the control start target.

Even if the control start timing is distributed, if it is necessary to execute the control start process for the individual images included in the drawing range PL2, that is, included in the image for one frame, the control start process is performed. It will be executed with priority and will not be postponed. As a result, the inconvenience that the individual image that should be originally included in the image for one frame is not included does not occur.

In particular, in a configuration in which an effect is executed such that the viewpoint is switched when the effect operation device 48 is operated by the player, an individual image that has not been controlled until then may suddenly become a control target. It can happen. On the other hand, as described above, the control start process is preferentially executed for the individual images included in the image for one frame, so that the viewpoint switching effect can be achieved without causing the above-mentioned inconvenience. Can be done well.

The configuration in which the control start timings are dispersed as described above may be applied to a configuration in which all the individual images included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 are the control start targets in the display CPU 72. In this case, the individual images included in the drawing range are given the highest priority as the control start target, and the side closer to the drawing range is given the next priority, while the individual images for the entire range are set as the control start target. Therefore, it is possible to start control in advance for a wider range of individual images than the above configuration while satisfactorily distributing the control start timing.

However, in this configuration, the number of individual images to be controlled and updated in the display CPU 72 is larger than that in the above configuration, so that the processing load of the control update processing at each processing time increases. In order to reduce the processing load of the process for updating the control, it is preferable to have a configuration in which a part of the range of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is set as the control start target as in the above configuration.

Further, the switching destination of the drawing range may be predetermined. In this configuration, it is preferable to perform the control start processing of the individual image to be included in the drawing range of the switching destination in advance when the switching becomes possible or at a timing before that. .. As a result, even if the drawing range is switched at an arbitrary timing, it can be dealt with.

Further, the configuration in which the control start timings are distributed as described above may be applied to the configuration in which the drawing range is not switched. In this case, since the presence or absence of the control start target may be determined based on the fixed drawing range, the processing configuration for performing the confirmation can be simplified. In this configuration, as the individual image to be controlled at the timing when the display target is displayed on the display screen G, for example, an individual image displayed so as to move in the depth direction of the display screen G can be considered.

Further, the configuration in which the control start timings are dispersed as described above may be applied to a configuration in which the display mode of the background image, the design, or the like is changed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 or the like. Even in this case, the control start timing can be well dispersed.

<Configuration for displaying scroll background image>
Next, a configuration for displaying a scroll background image will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10, a scroll background image is set as a kind of background image. The scroll background image is a background image that is displayed so as to scroll and change in a predetermined direction, specifically, in a horizontal direction with the passage of time. The scroll background image is set to have a background image for a plurality of frames in the scroll direction. Further, although the scroll background image has a start point portion and an end point portion, the image of the start point portion is set to have continuity with respect to the image of the end point portion. As a result of the scroll display, when the scroll background image reaches the end point portion, the start point portion is continuously displayed. That is, the scroll background image is repeatedly displayed so as to go around.

The scroll background data PD1 is set as the image data for displaying the scroll background image. The scroll background data PD1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the background data PD1 for scrolling.

The scroll background data PD1 is still image data, and as shown in FIG. 17A, the vertical size is set to one frame or larger, and the horizontal size in the scroll direction is set. , It is set to be for multiple frames. The scroll background data PD1 is not set as one image data, but is set as an aggregate of a plurality of divided part data PD2 to PD10. These divided part data PD2 to PD10 are set so as to divide the scroll background data PD1 in the scroll direction, and the scroll background data PD1 is configured by arranging them in the scroll direction.

The contents of the images set in the divided part data PD2 to PD10 are different from each other. However, the divided part data adjacent to the scroll direction is set so that the content of the image has continuity in the scroll direction.

The divided part data PD2 to PD10 are set so that they have the same size in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. In this case, the size in the horizontal direction is set to be smaller than one frame, and in order to form the background image for one frame, it is a part of the divided part data PD2 to PD10 and a plurality of divided part data are set side by side. There is a need to. Specifically, when the divided part data is set with the default size, the background image for one frame can be formed by arranging two or three divided part data in the horizontal direction. The size is set. It should be noted that the background image for one frame may be formed by always arranging three divided part data or by arranging four or more divided part data, and the background is formed by one divided part data. The configuration may be such that an image can be formed.

Further, the divided part data adjacent to each other in the scroll direction are set so as to overlap each other at the boundary portion. The divided part data PD5 and PD6 adjacent to each other in the scroll direction will be described as an example.

As shown in FIGS. 17 (b) and 17 (c), each pixel constituting one line in the direction orthogonal to the scroll direction (vertical direction) at the end point portion of the divided part data PD5 on the scroll destination side and the scroll rear side. The scroll direction coordinates are set to be the same as each pixel constituting one line in the direction orthogonal to the scroll direction (vertical direction) at the start point portion of the divided part data PD6 when drawing in the frame areas 82a and 82b. In addition, the same data is set for each line. When both divided part data PD5 and PD6 are drawn, the lines overlap each other. That is, the divided part data PD5 and PD6 adjacent to each other in the scroll direction are set with the overlapping area PA1 at the boundary portion.

The effect of setting the overlapping region PA1 will be described with reference to FIG. 18 (a-1) and (a-2) show the divided part data PD5 and PD6 in which the overlapping area PA1 is set, and FIGS. 18 (b-1) and 18 (b-2) show the overlapping area PA1 set. The divided part data PD5 and PD6 that have not been performed are shown.

In the divided part data in which the overlapping area PA1 is not set as shown in FIG. 18 (b-1), when both divided part data are enlarged from the default size and drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b, FIG. 18 (b-1) As shown in b-2), a gap may occur at the boundary between the two divided part data. For example, depending on how the divided part data is expanded and how the expanded frame areas 82a and 82b are set, if the overlapping area PA1 is not set, dots in which no data is set between adjacent divided part data may appear. It is possible that it will exist. In this case, the ground color is set for the dots, and the boundary portion becomes conspicuous in appearance, which is not preferable.

Further, for example, when the divided part data is enlarged, the above phenomenon occurs depending on the content of the linear interpolation executed when each pixel of the divided part data after the enlargement corresponds to each dot of the frame areas 82a and 82b. .. Then, the data of the edge portion of the divided part data is enlarged and set for the dots of the gap portion as described above. Then, the boundary portion becomes conspicuous in appearance, which is not preferable.

On the other hand, in the divided part data PD5 and PD6 in which the overlapping area PA1 is set as shown in FIG. 18 (a-1), both divided part data PD5 and PD6 are enlarged from the default size at the same magnification. Even if the drawing is performed in the frame areas 82a and 82b, as shown in FIG. 18 (a-2), there is no gap because the overlapping area PA1 exists at the boundary between the two divided part data PD5 and PD6. As a result, the image can be displayed using the divided part data PD5 and PD6 without causing the above-mentioned inconvenience.

By the way, as described above, the effect of preventing the gap from being generated due to the existence of the overlapping region PA1 is that the divided part data PD5 and PD6 are reduced from the default size by the same magnification and drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b. The case is played in the same way. Further, in order to more reliably prevent the inconvenience that a gap is generated due to the existence of the data of the edge portion after the enlargement, the divided part data PD5 and PD6 constituting the overlapping region PA1 are arranged on the front side. So that the data of the edge part of the divided part data (a part of the data after the overlapping area PA1 is expanded) is not reflected in the frame areas 82a and 82b, for example, α data is used to make the edge part completely transparent. In the divided part data on the back side, the data of the portion overlapping the edge portion may be set to the corresponding dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b.

Further, the portion constituting one overlapping region PA1 is a pixel for one line in each of the divided part data PD5 and PD6. As a result, the amount of data allocated to provide the overlapping area PA1 can be suppressed as much as possible.

Further, the same data is set in the portion constituting one overlapping region PA1 in each of the divided part data PD5 and PD6. As a result, when each of the divided part data PD5 and PD6 is individually enlarged and set in the frame areas 82a and 82b, even if the overlapping portion of the two is slightly displaced, the displaced portion is within the same data range. A deviation will occur, and even in this case, a good display mode can be obtained.

A specific processing configuration for displaying the scroll background image will be described below. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for the scroll background executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the scroll background is executed in the background calculation process in step S615 in the task process (FIG. 15). Further, the arithmetic processing for the scroll background is started when the information about the scroll background is set in the currently set data table.

First, in step S701, the scroll position information is updated. The scroll position information is information for specifying which area is displayed on the display screen G in the scroll background image. The scroll position information is determined by the numerical information of the scroll counter provided in the work RAM 73. Many frame portions included in the scroll background image have a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical value of the scroll position information. In step S701, the numerical information of the scroll counter is updated so as to be added by 1.

In the following step S702, the scale of the background image this time is grasped. In the following step S703, the divided part data included in the display range is grasped by referring to the scroll position information updated in step S701 and the scale grasped in step S702. In this case, at least two divided part data are grasped. By the way, the process for starting control of these divided part data has already been completed.

In the following step S704, among the divided part data grasped in step S703, the coordinates of the divided part data on the most scroll destination side are calculated and derived, and the derived coordinate information corresponds to the divided part data in the work RAM 73. The control information is updated by writing in the reserved area.

In the following step S705, as the coordinates of the next divided part data, the coordinates for generating an overlapping area with respect to the adjacent divided part data on the scroll destination side are calculated and derived, and the derived coordinate information is obtained from the work RAM 73. The control information is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the divided part data in.

In the following step S706, it is determined whether or not the coordinates of all the divided part data grasped in step S703 have been grasped. If there is unrecognized divided part data, the process of step S705 is executed for the divided part data. If there is no unrecognized divided part data, the process proceeds to step S707.

In step S707, information on parameters other than the size and coordinates is updated for the divided part data grasped in step S703. Then, in step S708, after storing the scroll background designation information, the present calculation process is terminated.

When the above process is executed, the divided part data grasped in step S703 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408). In addition, scroll background specification information is set in this drawing list.

Next, the setting process of the divided part data executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process of the divided part data is executed in the content grasping process of step S504 in the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, the setting process of the divided part data is started when the scroll background specification is set in the drawing list.

First, in step S801, the type of the divided part data to be drawn and the address to which the divided part data is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. After that, the scale of each divided part data is grasped in step S802, the coordinates of each divided part data are grasped in step S803, and other parameters are grasped in step S804, and then this setting process is terminated.

By executing the setting process of the divided part data, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), the divided part data is generated in a state where the above parameters are applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. It is drawn. Then, by outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, a background image using each of the divided part data is displayed on the display screen G.

Here, a part of the divided part data to be drawn protrudes from the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. For example, as shown in FIG. 17A, when three divided part data PD2 to PD4 are drawn for the area PL4 for one frame divided by the alternate long and short dash line, in each divided part data PD2 to PD4. There is a part that extends beyond the area PL4 for one frame. In the VDP76, when drawing image data in the frame areas 82a and 82b, it is not possible to extract and draw only a part of the pixels. Therefore, the above-mentioned protruding portion is not written in the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the same processing as that executed when drawing the non-extruding portion in the frame area 82a and 82b is executed for the pixel of the protruding portion. NS.

As described above, by storing the scroll background data including the data for a plurality of frames in advance as a plurality of divided part data, the size that can be stored as a single image data in the NAND flash memory 102 is set to be excessively large. You don't have to. Also, if you try to transfer the background data for scrolling as a single image data, the transfer time will be long, but since it can be transferred in units of divided parts data, the timing of data transfer can be adjusted. It will be easy.

Further, the VDP 76 executes the drawing process for the parts protruding from the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the same manner as the parts not protruding, but when the scroll background data is used as a single image data, it protrudes. Since there are many locations, the processing load increases. On the other hand, by using only the divided part data in which at least a part is included in the frame areas 82a and 82b, the protruding portion can be suppressed and the processing load can be reduced. Further, the display CPU 72 does not derive the parameter information for the divided part data that is not the display target. As a result, the processing load of the display CPU 72 can be reduced.

Further, by setting the divided part data to be small and increasing the divided part data used in each frame, it is possible to suppress the portion protruding from the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the more the divided part data is, the more the display CPU 72 is displayed. As a result, the amount of image data to be calculated for the parameters increases, and the processing load of the display CPU 72 increases. On the other hand, since the size of each divided part data is set so that the number of divided part data used in each frame is 2-3, the processing load of the display CPU 72 can be suppressed.

The scroll direction is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction.

Further, when paying attention to the effect that the data capacity of a single image data can be suppressed, it is sufficient to make a configuration in which a plurality of divided part data are set as image data for displaying a series of images. , The divided part data do not have to have the overlapping area PA1. In this case, if the individual size adjustment of each divided part data is not performed, the possibility of a gap is reduced. Further, even if the size is adjusted, the above gap may not exist by adjusting the coordinates when setting the frame areas 82a and 82b.

Further, the overlapping region PA1 is not composed of each pixel for one column, but may be composed of each pixel for a plurality of columns. In this case, although the amount of data allocated to the overlapping area PA1 increases, the occurrence of gaps can be more reliably prevented. Further, the same data may not be set in the portion constituting the one overlapping region PA1.

<Structure for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group>
Next, a configuration for displaying a displacement background image of a small unit group will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10, a displacement background image of a small unit group is set as a kind of background image. The displacement background image of the small unit group is a background image in which a large number of small unit images are displayed in front of the rearmost image so as to be displaced in a predetermined direction with the passage of time. An image of a flower villa is set as this small unit image, but the image is not limited to this, and an image of rain or an image of snow may be set.

The background data PD11 for the small unit group is set as the image data for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group. The background data PD11 for the small unit group will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the background data PD11 for the small unit group.

The background data PD11 for the small unit group is not set as one image data, but is set as an aggregate of a plurality of divided data groups PD12 to PD15 as shown in FIG. 21 (a). Each of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 has a plurality of (for example, four) divided part data.

The number of divided parts data possessed by each of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 is the same, and the order in which the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 are read out in order to display an image for one frame is predetermined. That is, by arranging the divided part data set as the first order in the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 at the corresponding positions, the displacement background image for one frame is displayed and the next order is displayed. By arranging each divided part data set as as at the corresponding position, the displacement background image for the next frame is displayed. Then, this is performed sequentially for each combination of orders.

Data for a plurality of small unit images is set in each divided part data. The data for these small unit images are set differently for each divided part data, and the combination of each divided part data is sequentially selected in the predetermined order described above, so that FIG. 21 (b) shows. As shown, each of the large number of small unit images is displayed to be displaced in a predetermined direction over time.

A specific processing configuration for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group will be described below. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for the displacement background executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the displacement background is executed in the background calculation process in step S615 in the task process (FIG. 15).

First, in step S901, the value of the parts counter for specifying the order of the divided parts data corresponding to the current frame is updated. This parts counter is provided in the work RAM 73. In the following step S902, the divided data group to be set is grasped. In this grasp, the target counter provided in the work RAM 73 is referred to.

In the following step S903, the divided part data to be controlled is grasped from the information of the order shown in the parts counter and the information of the target divided data group shown in the target counter. In the following step S904, the parameters of the divided part data grasped in step S903 are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the area secured corresponding to the divided part data in the work RAM 73 for control. Update the information for.

In the following step S905, it is determined whether or not the setting of all the divided part data corresponding to the current order is completed. If the setting is not completed, the target counter is updated in step S906 to update the setting target to the next divided data group, and then the processes after step S902 are executed. On the other hand, when the setting is completed, in step S907, after storing the displacement background designation information, the calculation process for the present displacement background is terminated.

When the above process is executed, each divided part data corresponding to the current order is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408). Further, in the drawing list, displacement background designation information is set. Upon receiving the drawing list, the VDP 76 draws each divided part data in the frame areas 82a and 82b according to the drawing list. Then, the output of the drawing list and the drawing corresponding thereto are repeatedly performed for each frame, so that the animation as shown in FIG. 21B is displayed on the display screen G.

As described above, when displaying an animation that displaces a small unit group, instead of controlling each small unit group as an individual sprite, a still image in which a plurality of small unit images are set collectively is switched in sequence. Since the configuration is controlled, the processing load of the parameter calculation processing on the display CPU 72 is reduced. Therefore, the displacement background image of the small unit group can be displayed while suppressing the processing load on the display CPU 72.

The number of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 and the number of the divided parts data assigned to the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 are arbitrary as long as they are plural.

Further, the divided data group PD12 to PD15 may not be assigned the divided part data, and a common divided data group in which a large number of divided part data are set may be provided. In this case, the divided part data may be distributed to each divided position from the common divided data group.

<Addition processing of effect images>
Next, the addition process of the effect image will be described with reference to FIG. 23. 23 (a) to 23 (e) are explanatory views for explaining the addition process of the effect image.

The effect image is an image showing a blast, an image showing water droplets, a light emitting image showing how light is shining from a light source to the surroundings, and an aura image showing the surroundings of a character as if they are emitting light. In addition, it is an image for enhancing the visual effect. Of these effect images, images representing blast waves and images representing water droplets are not limited to those to which they are applied, but aura images are applied to predetermined sprites.

Specifically, the effect data PD17 is set as shown in FIG. 23B in correspondence with the sprite data PD16 as shown in FIG. 23A. The sprite data PD16 includes an image area PA2 to be displayed on the display screen G as an individual image and a frame area PA3 surrounding the image area PA2, and is defined to have a rectangular shape as a whole. There is. On the other hand, the effect data PD17 is defined along the outer edge of the image area PA2, and the effect area PA4 to be displayed on the display screen G as an effect image and the effect area PA4 so as to have a rectangular shape as a whole. It includes a frame area PA5 that defines the inside and the outside.

Incidentally, the sprite data PD16 and the corresponding effect data PD17 are defined to have the same size and the same shape at the time of initial setting. Further, since the pixels constituting each frame area PA3 and PA5 are set with information of "0" which is completely transparent information as an α value, they are not displayed on the display screen G and are not displayed on the display screen G. The effect area PA4 is the display target on the display screen G. However, the frame areas PA3 and PA5 may be hidden by using dedicated α data. The details of the α data will be described later.

By applying the effect data PD17 to the sprite data PD16, as shown in FIG. 23C, the effect image CH2 as if the surroundings are emitting light is generated for the character CH1. .. In this case, the effect image CH2 overlaps a part of the background image in front of the background image. On the other hand, since the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are set individually, it is possible to display the character CH1 alone.

As described above, the frame areas 82a and 82b on which the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are drawn include a large number of unit areas, and each unit area is set with an area for storing color information. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23D, color information storage areas 121a to 121c consisting of 1 byte are set in each unit area 121 so as to correspond one-to-one with each color of RGB. 256 colors can be set for each of RGB and RGB.

The smaller the value of the numerical information stored in each of the color information storage areas 121a to 121c, the darker the color is finally displayed in RGB, and in the case of the minimum value, black is displayed. Further, the larger the value of the numerical information, the brighter the color is finally displayed in RGB, and in the case of the maximum value, white is displayed. In a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed instead of the full-color system, the color information storage areas 121a to 121c need only be 1 byte.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23 (e), color information consisting of numerical information is set in each pixel 122 of the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 by using a palette table or the like. In this case, the color information set in each of these pixels 122 is data that can display only 256 colors instead of full color, but each color of RGB can be drawn well in the frame areas 82a and 82b. Each is set as information within the range of 1 byte.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the color information storage areas 121a to 121c of each unit area 121 are set to 1 byte instead of 3 bytes, and in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed, each pixel 122 The color information may also be set in 1 byte.

Further, in addition to the above color information, α value information is set in each pixel 122. Although a storage capacity of 1 byte is secured as α value information, numerical information of any one of "0 to 100" is actually set as a decimal number. Further, the α value information is numerical information of "0 to 100", which corresponds to the α value of "0 to 1", and is treated as a value less than 1 in the calculation using the α value.

When the color information of each pixel 122 is drawn in the unit area 121 to be drawn, each numerical information obtained by integrating the α value with each RGB numerical information in each pixel 122 is used for storing the color information in the unit area 121. It is stored for each of the corresponding areas of RGB of the areas 121a to 121c. In this case, when the α value is set as the opaque information of “1”, the color information of the pixel 122 is overwritten as it is on the corresponding unit area 121. On the other hand, when the α value is less than 1, a predetermined calculation using the α value is executed with the image superimposed on the back side of the display screen G, and the calculation result is obtained with respect to the unit area 121. Is written.

In the case of the effect data PD17, an α value less than 1 is set for all pixels. Specifically, complete transparency information with an α value of "0" is set for all pixels included in the frame area PA5, and semitransparent information with an α value of 0 <α value <1 is set for each pixel included in the effect area PA4. Information is set. When the effect data PD17 is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b, an α value is set for each unit area 121 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn with respect to the numerical information of each pixel of the effect data PD17. The accumulated result is added.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying an image using the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for the first effect effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the first effect effect is executed in the effect calculation process of step S616 in the task process (FIG. 15). Further, the arithmetic processing for the first effect effect is started when the information about the first effect effect is set in the currently set data table.

First, in step S1001, the sprite data PD16 included in the display area is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1002, the parameters of the sprite data PD16 grasped in step S1001 are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the area secured corresponding to the sprite data PD16 in the work RAM 73 for control. Update the information for.

In the following step S1003, it is determined whether or not the effect data should be applied based on the currently set data table. If it is not necessary to apply the effect data, this calculation process is terminated as it is.

When the arithmetic processing for the first effect effect is executed as described above, the sprite data PD16 is the drawing target in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), and the drawing including the parameter information of the sprite data PD16 is further executed. A list is created and sent to VDP76.

On the other hand, when it is necessary to apply the effect data PD17, the effect data PD17 to be applied this time is grasped in step S1004. In the following step S1005, the same coordinates as the coordinates grasped for the sprite data PD16 to be applied are grasped as the coordinates of the effect data PD17 in the work RAM 73, and the area secured corresponding to the effect data PD17 is obtained in the work RAM 73. Update the control information by writing.

In the following step S1006, the effect data PD17 is derived by calculating the information of parameters other than the coordinates, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the reserved area to update the control information. In this case, if the size and rotation angle of the sprite data PD16 to be applied are changed from those at the time of initial setting, the size and rotation angle of the effect data PD17 are adjusted so as to be the same as those at the time of initial setting. After that, after storing the effect designation information in step S1007, this calculation process ends.

When the arithmetic processing for the first effect effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), a drawing list in which both the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are set as drawing targets is created. Will be done. In addition, the drawing list includes parameter information of each of the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17, and effect designation information indicating that the effect data PD17 should be applied. Then, the created drawing list is transmitted to VDP76.

Next, the setting process for the first effect effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the first effect effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, the setting process for the first effect effect is activated when the designation related to the first effect effect is set in the drawing list.

In step S1101, the sprite data PD16 to be drawn this time, which is shown in the drawing list, and the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 grasp the address to which the sprite data PD16 is transferred. In the following step S1102, the parameters of the sprite data PD16 are grasped.

In the following step S1103, it is determined whether or not the effect designation information is set in association with the sprite data PD16 in the drawing list. If the effect specification information is not set, this setting process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the effect designation information is set, in step S1104, the effect data PD17 to be drawn together with the sprite data PD16 is grasped, and the effect data PD17 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Know your address. Then, in step S1105, after grasping the parameters of the effect data PD17, the present setting process is terminated.

That is, the effect data PD17 is set in association with the sprite data PD16 to be applied in the drawing list, and is processed at the same time in the processing times for processing the sprite data PD16 to be applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect data PD17 may be set independently of the sprite data PD16 to be applied in the drawing list. Even in this case, as described above, since the parameters are set independently for the effect data PD17, it is possible to draw the effect data PD17 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn.

By the way, since the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are handled separately, as described above, the same sprite data PD16 can be used to display the character CH1 corresponding to the sprite data PD16 alone. At the same time, the character CH1 with the effect image CH2 applied can be displayed.

By executing the setting process for the first effect effect, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), the sprite data PD16 with the above parameters applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. And the above effect data PD17 are drawn.

Next, the first effect addition process executed by the VDP 76 when the effect data PD17 is drawn will be described. FIG. 26A is a flowchart showing the first effect addition process, and FIG. 26B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the first effect addition process. The first effect addition process is executed as a part of the write process executed in step S505 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, the first effect addition process is started when the effect data PD17 is set.

First, in step S1201, the update process of the target pixel is executed. In the target pixel update process, a process for updating the pixel to be drawn this time is executed in the effect data PD17. Specifically, the pixel update counter set in the register 92 is updated so that the drawing target advances by one pixel.

In the following step S1202, the numerical information stored in the dots (that is, the unit area) in which the target pixel of this time is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b is read out and grasped. In this case, as shown by "r1", "g1", and "b1" in FIG. 26 (b-1), each numerical information of RGB is grasped.

In the following step S1203, the numerical information set for the target pixel of this time in the effect data PD17 is grasped. This numerical information is each numerical information as a result of integrating the numerical information of the α value with each numerical information of RGB. That is, as shown by "α × r2", "α × g2", and "α × b2" in FIG. 26 (b-2), each numerical information of RGB is grasped.

In addition, at the time of the integration, the calculation is performed so that the α value defined as the value of "0 to 100" in the decimal point functions as "0.00 to 1.00" which is a value of 1 or less. Furthermore, the value is rounded down or rounded so that the value below the decimal point is not included in the integration result. The handling of the α value and the handling of the numerical value after the decimal point are the same in the following description. In addition, the α value is defined as a decimal value of "0 to 10", and the calculation is performed so that it functions as "0.0 to 1.0", which is a value of 1 or less. good.

In the following step S1204, each numerical information of RGB grasped in step S1202 and each numerical information of RGB grasped in step S1203 are added. As a result, as shown in FIG. 26 (b-3), each numerical information of RGB becomes “r1 + α × r2”, “g1 + α × g2”, and “b1 + α × b2”. In the following step S1205, each numerical information of RGB calculated in step S1204 is written in the target dot this time.

After that, in step S1206, it is determined whether or not drawing is completed for all the pixels of the effect data PD17. If it is not completed, the processes of steps S1201 to S1205 are repeated. If it is completed, this addition process is terminated.

By executing the above addition process, the effect image CH2 corresponding to the effect data PD17 is in a state where the color information and the degree of brightness of the image (for example, the background image) on which the effect image CH2 is superimposed are reflected. Is displayed. As described above, the effect image CH2 is an image that allows light, water droplets, and other objects on the back side to pass through, so that if it is displayed regardless of the background image, a sense of incongruity will occur. On the other hand, by executing the addition process as described above, the effect image CH2 is displayed in a state where the background image is reflected, which is preferable in appearance without causing the above-mentioned discomfort. Become.

The specific processing for reflecting the individual image on the back side when displaying the individual image on the front side is not limited to the addition processing, and other arithmetic processing if the reflection can be performed well. May be executed.

Further, after the image data corresponding to the individual image on the back side is set in the frame areas 82a and 82b, the addition processing of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side to the frame areas 82a and 82b may be executed. Instead, the image data as a result of the addition processing may be set in the frame areas 82a and 82b.

<Partial addition processing of effect image>
Next, the partial addition process of the effect image will be described.

When applying the effect image as described above, the addition process is executed, but when the same bright effect image is superimposed on the bright image, each numerical value of RGB is displayed in the unit area of the frame areas 82a and 82b. The information becomes the maximum value, and it may be displayed in white, which is not the intention of the designer (so-called overexposure). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, partial addition is performed when displaying a predetermined effect image in order to suppress the occurrence of overexposure.

Regarding the data structure for performing the partial addition, refer to FIG. 27 (a), for example, an effect that is treated independently of the character's sprite data, such as an image showing a blast wave and an image showing water droplets. I will explain while. FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data structure for performing partial addition.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a-1), the effect data PD18 to which the partial addition is applied includes the effect area PA6 to be displayed on the display screen G as an effect image including a plurality of pixels, and is rectangular as a whole. It includes a frame area PA7 that defines the periphery of the effect area PA6 so as to have a shape. As described above, each pixel constituting the effect area PA6 has color information having numerical information corresponding to each of RGB and α value information integrated for each numerical information of the color information. It is set. Each pixel constituting the frame area PA7 is set with "0", which is completely transparent information, as an α value.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a-2), there is a one-to-one correspondence with the effect data PD18, and as shown in FIG. 27 (a-2), the partial addition data PD19 defined so that the size and outer shape at the time of initial setting are the same as the effect data PD18. Is set. The partial addition data PD19 includes an effect-corresponding area PA8 defined to have the same shape and the same number of pixels as the effect area PA6 of the effect data PD18, and the periphery of the effect-corresponding area PA8 so as to have a rectangular shape as a whole. It is provided with a frame-corresponding area PA9 that defines.

Unlike the effect area PA6 of the effect data PD18, color information is not set for each pixel constituting the effect corresponding area PA8, and only α value information is set. By the way, the α value information set for each pixel is set individually according to the execution target of partial addition, and if there are pixels in which the same α value information is set for each other, they are mutually. There are also pixels in which different α value information is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the α value set for each pixel may be the same.

When partial addition is performed, first, the partial addition data PD19 is applied to each dot (that is, each unit area) in which the effect data PD18 is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. After that, the effect data PD18 is drawn for each dot. A specific processing configuration in which the drawing is performed will be described below.

FIG. 27B is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for the second effect effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the second effect effect is executed in the effect calculation process of step S616 in the task process (FIG. 15). Further, the arithmetic processing for the second effect effect is started when the information about the second effect effect is set in the currently set data table.

First, in step S1301, the effect data PD18 to be designated for drawing this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1302, the parameters of the effect data PD18 grasped in step S1301 are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the area secured corresponding to the effect data PD18 in the work RAM 73 for control. Update the information for.

In the following step S1303, the partial addition data PD19 to be specified for application this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1304, in step S1302, the same coordinates as the coordinates grasped for the effect data PD18 to be applied are grasped as the coordinates of the partial addition data PD19, and the information of the grasped coordinates is subjected to the partial addition in the work RAM 73. The control information is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the data PD19.

In the following step S1305, the partial addition data PD19 is derived by calculating the information of the parameters other than the coordinates, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the reserved area to update the control information. In this case, if the size and rotation angle of the effect data PD18 to be applied are changed from those at the time of initial setting, the size and rotation angle of the partial addition data PD19 are adjusted so as to be the same as those at the time of initial setting. .. After that, after storing the partial addition designation information in step S1306, this calculation process ends.

When the arithmetic processing for the second effect effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), both the effect data PD18 and the partial addition data PD19 are set as drawing targets. Is created. In addition, the drawing list includes parameter information of each of the effect data PD18 and the partial addition data PD19, and partial addition designation information indicating that the partial addition data PD19 should be applied. The created drawing list is transmitted to VDP76.

Next, the setting process for the second effect effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28. The setting process for the second effect effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, the setting process for the second effect effect is started when the partial addition designation is set in the drawing list.

In step S1401, the address to which the partial addition data PD19 to be applied this time is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 and the partial addition data PD19 shown in the drawing list is grasped. In the following step S1402, the parameters of the partial addition data PD19 are grasped.

In the following step S1403, the effect data PD18 to be drawn this time and the address to which the effect data PD18 is transferred are grasped in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 shown in the drawing list. Then, in step S1404, after grasping the parameters of the effect data PD18, the present setting process ends.

That is, the partial addition data PD19 is set in association with the effect data PD18 to be applied in the drawing list, and is processed at the same time in the processing times for processing the effect data PD18 to be applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the partial addition data PD19 may be set independently of the application target effect data PD18 in the drawing list. In this case, since the parameters are set independently for the partial addition data PD19, as long as the drawing order is set so that the partial addition data PD19 is processed before the effect data PD18, the partial addition is partially added. It is possible to appropriately draw the data PD19 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn.

By executing the setting process for the second effect effect, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), the partial addition is performed with the above parameters applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. The data PD19 and the effect data PD18 are drawn.

Next, a second effect addition process executed by the VDP 76 when the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18 are drawn will be described. FIG. 29 (a) is a flowchart showing the second effect addition process, and FIG. 29 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the second effect addition process. The second effect addition process is executed as a part of the write process executed in step S505 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, the second effect addition process is started when the partial addition data PD19 is set.

First, in step S1501, the target pixel update process is executed. In the target pixel update process, the process for updating the pixel to be drawn this time is executed in the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18. Specifically, the pixel update counter set in the register 92 is updated so that the drawing target advances by one pixel.

In the following step S1502, the numerical information stored in the dots (that is, the unit area) in which the target pixel of this time is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b is read out and grasped. In this case, as shown by "r3", "g3", and "b3" in FIG. 29 (b-1), each numerical information of RGB is grasped.

In the following step S1503, the α value set for the target pixel this time in the partial addition data PD19 is grasped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29 (b-2), "α1" is set as the α value.

In the following step S1504, the α value grasped in step S1503 is integrated with each numerical information of RGB grasped in step S1502. As a result, as shown in FIG. 29 (b-3), the RGB numerical information corresponding to the integration result becomes “α1 × r3”, “α1 × g3”, and “α1 × b3”.

In the following step S1505, the numerical information set for the target pixel of this time in the effect data PD18 is grasped. This numerical information is each numerical information as a result of integrating the numerical information of the α value predetermined for the pixel with respect to each numerical information of RGB. That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (b-4), each numerical information of RGB is “α2 × r4”, “α2 × g4”, and “α2 × b4”.

In the following step S1506, the RGB numerical information grasped in step S1505 and the information of each RGB integration result grasped in step S1504 are added. As a result, as shown in FIG. 29 (b-6), each numerical information of RGB becomes “α1 × r3 + α2 × r4”, “α1 × g3 + α2 × g4”, and “α1 × b3 + α2 × b4”. In the following step S1507, each numerical information of RGB calculated in step S1506 is written in the target dot this time.

After that, in step S1508, it is determined whether or not drawing is completed for all the pixels of the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18. If it is not completed, the processes of steps S1501 to S1507 are repeated. If it is completed, this addition process is terminated.

By executing the above addition process, the numerical information already stored in the unit area where the effect data PD18 is drawn is reduced by the ratio of the α value of the partial addition data PD19. Numerical information as a result of adding the numerical information of the effect data PD18 to the numerical information of is set. As a result, after drawing the effect data PD18, it is possible to prevent each numerical information of RGB in the unit area of the frame areas 82a and 82b from becoming the maximum value, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overexposure.

Further, for example, when the numerical information and the α value of the effect data PD18 are suppressed, the effect image is adapted to the image to be superimposed, and the visual effect cannot be enhanced by the effect image. On the other hand, since the numerical information of the images on the superposed side is suppressed by the partial addition data PD19, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overexposure while emphasizing the effect image.

In addition, it is conceivable to set the numerical information of the superimposed image in a state where it is originally suppressed, but if this is done, when the image is used without applying the effect image, the numerical information is supported. It is limited to color information. On the other hand, by separately setting the partial addition data PD19 as described above, restrictions on the images on the superposed side are less likely to occur.

Further, since the partial addition data PD19 has a configuration in which the numerical information corresponding to the color information is not set and the numerical information corresponding to the α value is set, the data capacity of the partial addition data PD19 is an effect. It is smaller than the data PD18. Therefore, the above-mentioned excellent effect can be obtained while suppressing the storage capacity required for the NAND flash memory 102.

As a method for reducing the ratio of reflecting the individual image on the back side, a method other than the method of applying the partial addition data PD19 may be adopted. For example, in a configuration in which the α value of image data can be manipulated in pixel units in the processing of VDP76, the numerical information in the corresponding portion of the individual image on the back side in the processing of VDP76 is reduced by a predetermined ratio. May be good.

In addition, the individual image on the back side affects the parts other than the overlapped part with the individual image on the front side, but there is also a configuration in which a uniform α value for partial addition is set for the individual image on the back side. Conceivable.

Further, in the configuration in which the limit values of the frame areas 82a and 82b are the darkest and the minimum values are the brightest, in order to reflect the individual image on the back side in the individual image on the front side, instead of the above addition process. , The subtraction process needs to be executed. Further, in order to suppress overexposure, it is necessary to apply partial subtraction data instead of partial addition data PD19.

Further, instead of the above configuration, the partial addition data PD19 may be configured in which not only the α value but also the numerical information corresponding to the color information is set. In this case, in step S1503 in the second effect addition process, the α value and numerical information of the target pixel in the partial addition data are grasped, and in step S1504, the fusion calculation process is executed instead of the integration process. .. Specifically, when the α value of the partial addition data PD19 is α1 and the color information of the partial addition data PD19 is “r5, g5, b5”, in step S1504,
R: r3 × (1-α1) + r5 × α1
G: g3 × (1-α1) + g5 × α1
B: b3 × (1-α1) + b5 × α1
The calculation for fusion is performed.

Then, by executing the processing of steps S1505 to S1507 with respect to the calculation result,
R: r3 × (1-α1) + r5 × α1 + α2 × r4
G: g3 × (1-α1) + g5 × α1 + α2 × g4
B: b3 × (1-α1) + b5 × α1 + α2 × b4
Will be.

Even when the partial addition data PD19 in which the numerical information corresponding to the color information is set as described above is used, the timing before drawing the effect data is performed by executing the fusion calculation process. Since the numerical information already stored in is reduced to a lower value, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overexposure.

<Composite data that combines multiple effect images>
Next, a configuration for creating composite data in which a plurality of effect images are combined will be described.

As described above, a plurality of effect images may be displayed in one frame of images in order to enhance the visual effect. For example, an image showing a blast wave and a light emitting image may be displayed at the same time. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 has a function of separately storing each effect data originally set individually in a combined state. Specific processing for creating the synthetic data and specific processing for using the synthetic data will be described below.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for a plurality of effect effects executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the plurality of effect effects is executed in the effect calculation process in step S616 in the task process (FIG. 15). Further, the arithmetic processing for the plurality of effect effects is started when the information about the plurality of effect effects is set in the currently set data table.

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the composite data has been created in VDP76. The determination is performed by determining whether or not the created determination flag is set in the work RAM 73, but the determination is not limited to this, and synthetic data is created in the currently set data table. It may be configured in which information on whether or not it has been completed is set.

If the composite data has not been created, in step S1602, a plurality of effect data to be applied this time are grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1603, the parameters of each effect data grasped in step S1602 are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the area secured corresponding to each of these effect data in the work RAM 73 for control. Update the information for. In the following step S1604, a plurality of effect effect designation information is stored.

In the following step S1605, it is determined whether or not it is the timing for creating the composite data. Specifically, a plurality of types of timings at which multiple effect effects are performed are set, and at each of these timings, the number of individual images other than the effect image is relatively large and the processing load on the VDP 76 is large, and the effect. There are timings when the number of individual images other than images is relatively small and the processing load on the VDP 76 is small. The synthetic data creation timing is the timing when the processing load is small.

If it is determined that it is not the timing for creating the composite data (step S1605: NO), the present calculation process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that it is time to create the composite data (step S1605: YES), the calculation process ends after the composite data creation designation information is stored in step S1606.

When the arithmetic processing for producing a plurality of effects is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), a plurality of sprite data are to be drawn, and a drawing list including parameter information of these sprite data is included. Is created. In addition, the drawing list includes a plurality of effect effect designation information which is information indicating that the plurality of effect effects should be executed. When the composite data creation designation information is stored, the drawing list includes the composite data creation designation information which is information indicating that the composite data should be created.

On the other hand, when the composite data has already been created (step S1601: YES), the composite data to be applied this time is grasped in step S1607. In the following step S1608, the parameters of the composite data grasped in step S1607 are calculated and grasped.

In the following step S1609, the additional effect data is grasped based on the information set as the case where the composite data has been created in the currently set data table. In the following step S1610, the parameters of the additional effect data grasped in step S1609 are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the area secured corresponding to the additional effect data in the work RAM 73 for control. Update the information of. That is, when the composite data is applied, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 have a margin in the processing time for drawing, so that the processing time is used to set the additional effect data.

After that, the plurality of effect effect designation information is stored in step S1611, and the composite data usage designation information is stored in step S1612, and then this calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for producing a plurality of effects is executed as described above, the composite data and the additional effect data are the drawing targets in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), and the composite data and the additional effect data are further drawn. A drawing list containing parameter information is created. In addition, the drawing list includes a plurality of effect effect designation information, and also includes composite data usage designation information which is information indicating that the composite data should be used.

Next, the setting process for the multiple effect effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31 (a). The setting process for producing the plurality of effects is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, when a plurality of effect effect designations are set in the drawing list, the setting process for the plurality of effect effects is activated.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the composite data use designation is set in the drawing list. If the composite data use designation is not set, in step S1702, the plurality of effect data designated as the drawing target this time and the address to which these effect data are transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are set. grasp. That is, when a plurality of effect data are drawn at the same time, these effect data are not set individually in the drawing list, but are set so as to be processed at the same time in one processing time.

In the following step S1703, the parameters of each effect data are grasped. After that, in step S1704, it is determined whether or not the composite data creation designation is set. If the composite data creation specification is not set, this setting process ends as it is. If the composite data creation designation is set, the process proceeds to step S1705.

In step S1705, composite data is created in a state where each parameter grasped in step S1704 is applied to the plurality of effect data grasped in step S1702. After that, this setting process ends.

Here, as shown in FIG. 31B, a composite data area 81c is set in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. The composite data created in step S2305 is written in the composite data area 81c. The composite data area 81c stores and holds the written composite data while the power supply to the VRAM 75 is continued, and when other image data is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 to the VRAM 75. This is an area that is not overwritten by. Therefore, the synthesized data once created is stored and retained until the power supply to the VRAM 75 is cut off.

By executing the setting process for multiple effect effects as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), the above parameters are applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. Each of the above effect data is drawn. Then, by outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, an effect image using each of the above effect data is displayed on the display screen G.

On the other hand, when the composite data use designation is set in the drawing list (step S1701: YES), the composite data in the composite data designated as the drawing target this time and the composite data area 81c in step S1706. Know the address where is stored. In the following step S1707, the parameters of the composite data are grasped.

In the following step S1708, the additional effect data designated as the drawing target this time and the address to which the additional effect data is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. That is, when the composite data and the additional effect data are drawn at the same time, the composite data and the additional effect data are not set individually in the drawing list, but are set to be processed at the same time in one processing time. Has been done. After that, in step S1709, after grasping the parameters of the additional effect data, the present setting process ends.

By executing the setting process for multiple effect effects as described above, in the subsequent write process (step S505), the composite data is obtained with the parameters applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. Is drawn, and additional effect data is drawn with the parameters applied. Then, by outputting the image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, the effect image using the composite data and the additional effect data is displayed on the display screen G.

As described above, composite data for displaying multiple effect images at the same time is created, and the composite data is used for subsequent use, so that multiple effect data can be displayed each time the execution timing of multiple effect effects is reached. Compared with the drawing configuration, the processing load of the display CPU 72 and VDP76 can be reduced.

In particular, since the display CPU 72 gives an instruction to create synthetic data at a timing when the processing load on the VDP 76 is small, it is possible to create the composite data while preventing processing omissions from occurring on the VDP 76.

Further, when a plurality of effect effects are executed using the composite data, an additional effect image using the additional effect data is displayed by utilizing the margin of processing time. This makes it possible to apply more effect images and enhance the visual effect of the effect images.

Further, as compared with the configuration in which the composite data is stored in the NAND flash memory 102 in advance, the storage capacity required for the effect data in the NAND flash memory 102 can be suppressed. Further, since the composite data is created using the effect data set individually, it is also possible to use the effect data individually.

Further, since the composite data is saved in the composite data area 81c after creation, the composite data can be used for a plurality of non-consecutive frames after the composite data is created.

In addition, the composite data is created according to the effect data constituting the composite data when it is used for display. As a result, it is not necessary to set the processing timing for creating the composite data independently of the image display.

In addition, the composite data is created after the parameter information is applied to each effect data constituting the composite data. As a result, when the composite data is used, the parameter information may be derived and applied to the composite data, and it is not necessary to derive and apply the parameter information to each effect data constituting the composite data. Therefore, the processing load when using the composite data can be reduced.

When a plurality of effect effects are executed using the composite data, the additional effect data may not be drawn. Even in this case, by creating the composite data, it becomes easy to adjust the processing time in the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76.

Further, the composite data may be created at a timing different from the timing at which each effect data is used for display, such as when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

<Partial display of individual images using α data>
Next, a configuration for partially displaying an individual image using α data will be described.

As described above, the α data is transparent information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102 as image data. The α data is individually set for the image data that defines the individual image such as the background data and the sprite data, but the whole α data and the partial α data are set for the symbol sprite data, respectively. Has been done.

These whole α data and partial α data will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining α data, FIG. 32 (a) shows the symbol sprite data PD20 corresponding to a predetermined symbol, and FIG. 32 (b) is set in association with the symbol sprite data PD20. 32 (c) shows the case where the whole α data PD21 is applied to the symbol sprite data PD20, and FIGS. 32 (d) to 32 (g) show the case where the whole α data PD21 is applied to the symbol sprite data PD20. The α data PD22 to PD25 for the set part are shown.

As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the symbol sprite data PD20 includes an image area PA10 to be displayed on the display screen G as an individual image, and a frame area PA11 surrounding the image area PA10. The frame area PA 11 enables the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to handle the symbol sprite data PD20 as image data defined in a rectangular shape regardless of the outer edge shape of the image area PA10, facilitating the designation of coordinates.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the size of the overall α data PD21 is set so that its outer shape matches the symbol sprite data PD20 to be applied. The overall α data PD21 includes an image-corresponding area PA12 that occupies the inside of the outer edge portion and a frame-corresponding area PA13 that occupies the outside of the outer edge portion with the outer edge portion of the image area PA10 in the target symbol sprite data PD20 as a boundary. It has.

Each pixel included in the frame-corresponding area PA13 is set with "0", which is completely transparent information, as an α value. On the other hand, in the image corresponding area PA12, "1", which is opaque information, is set as an α value for each pixel included in the portion excluding the outer edge portion, and each pixel included in the outer edge portion is set as an α value. 0 <α value <1 which is partial transparency information is set.

By applying the overall α data PD21 to the symbol sprite data PD20, the α value of each pixel included in the image corresponding area PA12 is applied to each pixel included in the image area PA10, and further, the α value of each pixel included in the image corresponding area PA12 is applied to the frame area PA11. The α value of each pixel included in the frame corresponding area PA13 is applied to each pixel included in.

In this case, as described above, the size of the overall α data PD 21 is set so that its outer shape matches the symbol sprite data PD 20 to be applied. Therefore, by setting both data PD20 and 21 so that the size and rotation angle of both data PD20 and 21 are the same and the reference pixels such as the central pixel overlap, the α data PD21 for the whole with respect to the symbol sprite data PD20 It can be applied and the processing load related to the setting can be reduced. This also applies to the partial α data PD22 to PD25.

Further, when the symbol sprite data PD20 to which the overall α data PD21 is applied is superimposed on the overlapping image data on the back side of the display screen G, each dot related to the overlap is determined by the overall α data PD21. Numerical information is fused (that is, blended) based on the α value. In particular,
R: "R value of the back image" x ("1"-"α value") + "R value of the front image" x "α value"
G: "G value of the back image" x ("1"-"α value") + "G value of the front image" x "α value"
B: "B value of the back image" x ("1"-"α value") + "B value of the front image" x "α value"
Will be. This also applies to the partial α data PD22 to PD25.

By applying the overall α data PD21, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), the frame region PA11 of the applied symbol CH3 becomes completely transparent, and only the image region PA10 becomes visible. Further, the jaggies generated in the contour of the symbol CH3 are reduced, and the color can be smoothly changed so that the contour of the symbol CH3 is fused with the background. That is, it is possible to perform antialiasing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 32 (d) to 32 (g), the sizes of the partial α data PD22 to PD25 are set so that the outer shape of the partial α data PD22 to PD25 matches the symbol sprite data PD20 to be applied. The partial α data PD22 to PD25 have a partial image corresponding area PA14 occupying the inside of the outer edge portion and the outer edge portion with the outer edge portion corresponding to a part of the image area PA10 in the target symbol sprite data PD20 as a boundary. It is provided with a corresponding area PA15 other than a part that occupies the outside of the above.

"0", which is completely transparent information, is set as an α value for each pixel included in the corresponding region PA15 except for a part. On the other hand, in the partial image corresponding area PA14, "1", which is opaque information, is set as an α value for each pixel included in the portion excluding the outer edge portion, and α is set for each pixel included in the outer edge portion. As a value, 0 <α value <1 which is partial transparency information is set.

The α data PD22 to PD25 for each part are different from each other in the image area PA10 of the symbol sprite data PD20, which corresponds to a part of the image corresponding area PA14. Specifically, the partial α data PD22 in FIG. 32 (d) corresponds to 1/4 of the progress destination side when the image area PA10 is displayed in a variable manner, and the partial α in FIG. 32 (e). The data PD23 corresponds to the half of the progress destination side, the α data PD24 for the part of FIG. 32 (f) corresponds to the half of the progress source side, and the α data PD25 for the part of FIG. 32 (g) progresses. It corresponds to 1/4 minute of the original side.

The number of partial α data PD22 to PD25 set for one symbol sprite data PD20 is not limited to 4, and may be 2, 3, or 5 or more. Moreover, it may be one. Further, the combination of the α data for the whole and the α data for a plurality of parts is set so as to correspond to each type of the symbol sprite data on a one-to-one basis.

By using the α data PD22 to PD25 for each part, it is possible to display a part of the symbol. In addition, even when a part of the pattern is displayed in this way, the jaggies that occur in the outline of the pattern are reduced within the range where the part is displayed, and the color is smoothly changed so that the outline of the pattern is fused with the background. It becomes possible to make it. That is, it is possible to perform antialiasing even when partially displaying.

Hereinafter, the processing in the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 when the α data is applied will be described.

First, the symbol arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33. As described above, the symbol calculation process is the process executed in step S617 of the task process (FIG. 15), and various parameters are calculated for the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner in each game. It is a process to be derived.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute partial display. Judgment as to whether or not it is the timing is performed by referring to the information specified by the current pointer in the currently set data table.

When it is not the timing to execute the partial display (partial display), the symbol sprite data to be controlled this time is grasped in step S1802. In the following step S1803, various parameters such as coordinates, size, and rotation angle are calculated and derived for all of the grasped symbol sprite data, and the information of the derived various parameters is secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the symbol sprite data. The control information is updated by writing to the specified area.

In the following step S1804, the overall α data corresponding to each of the symbol sprite data grasped in step S1802 is grasped. In this case, the information of the address to which the α data for each whole is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 is also grasped. After that, in step S1805, after storing the synthesis designation information in the register, the operation process for this symbol is terminated.

When the symbol arithmetic processing is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the symbol sprite data grasped in step S1802 is the drawing target, and the parameter information of each of these symbol sprite data. A drawing list including the type and address of the overall α data and the composition designation information indicating that the overall α data should be applied to the corresponding symbol sprite data is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

On the other hand, when it is time to execute partial display (step S1801: YES), the coordinates and size of the partial display area are grasped in step S1806. The partial display area is an area displayed so as to partition a part of the display screen G (see the area partitioned by the frame indicated by the reference numeral PL5 in FIG. 34 (b)).

In the following step S1807, the symbol sprite data displayed this time on the display screen G including the partial display area is grasped. In the pachinko machine 10, when the partial display area is displayed, the symbol is displayed only in the partial display area, and the background and the effect character are displayed outside the partial display area on the display screen G. Is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the design may be displayed outside the partial display area.

In the following step S1808, various parameters such as coordinates, size, and rotation angle are calculated and derived for all of the symbol sprite data grasped in step S1807, and the information of the derived parameters corresponds to the symbol sprite data in the work RAM 73. The control information is updated by writing in the reserved area. In this case, the size information is calculated so that the symbol displayed in the partial display area is displayed in a size smaller than the normal display state in the situation where the partial display area is not displayed.

In the following step S1809, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to set the partial α data. When it is necessary to set the α data for the part, in step S1810, the α data for the part corresponding to the symbol sprite data for which the setting is required, and for the part corresponding to the target for creating the drawing list this time. Grasp α data. In this case, the information of the address to which the α data for each part is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 is also grasped.

When a negative determination is made in step S1809 or after the process of step S1810 is executed, it is determined in step S1811 whether or not it is necessary to set the overall α data. Even if it is a symbol sprite displayed in the partial display area, it is necessary to set the whole α data for those that are not applicable to the partial α data. In this case, affirmative determination is made in step S1811. do. When it is necessary to set the overall α data, the process of step S1804 is executed to grasp the overall α data.

Regardless of whether the overall α data is grasped or not grasped in step S1804, the calculation process for this symbol is terminated after the synthesis designation information is finally stored in step S1805.

When the symbol arithmetic processing is executed as described above, the partial display area should be set in addition to the information explained as the case where only the whole α data is applied in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408). A drawing list is created that includes information, parameter information for the partial display area, the type and address of the partial α data, and synthetic designation information indicating that the partial α data should be applied to the corresponding symbol sprite data. Is transmitted to VDP76.

Incidentally, in the drawing list, not only the content of the data corresponding to the image displayed in the partial display area but also the data corresponding to the background and the character for effect displayed outside the partial display area are set. In this case, since the image displayed in the partial display area is displayed as if it exists in front of the display screen G as compared with the image displayed outside the partial display area, it is set in the drawing list. The image data corresponding to the outside of the partial display area comes first, and the image data corresponding to the partial display area comes later.

Next, the symbol sprite data setting process executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34 (a). The design sprite data setting process is executed in the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). In addition, the symbol sprite data setting process is started when the composition designation is set in the drawing list.

In step S1901, the symbol sprite data to be drawn this time, which is shown in the drawing list, is grasped. In the following step S1902, it is determined whether or not to apply the overall α data to the symbol sprite data grasped in step S1901.

When applying the whole α data, in step S1903, the whole α data is read from the designated address and combined with the symbol sprite data read from the same designated address. As a result, the α value set for each pixel of the overall α data is applied to each corresponding pixel in the symbol sprite data. By the way, when synthesizing the whole α data, the whole α data is overlapped with the whole of the symbol sprite data. This also applies to the partial α data.

On the other hand, when applying the partial α data, in step S1904, the partial α data is read from the designated address and combined with the symbol sprite data read from the same designated address. As a result, the α value set for each pixel of the partial α data is applied to each corresponding pixel in the symbol sprite data.

After executing step S1903 or step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1905. In step S1905, various parameters (coordinates, size, rotation angle, etc.) to be referred to when writing the synthetic sprite data created in step S1903 or step S1904 to the frame areas 82a and 82b are grasped. After that, this setting process ends.

The various parameters grasped in step S1905 are information set for the symbol sprite data grasped in step S1901. That is, the information of various parameters required for writing to the frame areas 82a and 82b is set for the symbol sprite data, but is not set for the whole α data or the partial α data, and is not set for the symbol sprite. Information on various parameters set for the data is applied to the synthetic sprite data. As a result, the amount of information specified in the drawing list can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which various parameter information is set for the whole α data and the partial α data, and the processing load on the display CPU 72 can be reduced. Be done.

Incidentally, when the symbol sprite data for which the above setting processing has been completed is written in the frame areas 82a and 82b, the background data and the effect data already written in the frame areas 82a and 82b have already been described. An operation for fusion (blending operation) is performed.

Next, a state in which a part of the symbol is displayed using the partial display area PL5 will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (b). FIG. 34B is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a part of the symbol is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the partial display area PL5 is displayed as a range smaller than the display screen G at a position closer to the corner portion of the display screen G. Further, the outer edge of the partial display area PL5 is not in contact with the outer edge of the display screen G, and all the outer edges of the partial display area PL5 have a gap between them and the outer edge of the display screen G.

In the partial display area PL5, the symbols CH3 and CH4 are variablely displayed in a predetermined direction. The predetermined direction is the same as the case where the variable display of the symbols is performed on each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 without displaying the partial display area PL5, but the predetermined direction may be different.

The symbols CH3 and CH4 that are variablely displayed in the partial display area PL5 are displayed so as to appear from a predetermined side side of the partial display area PL5 and disappear from the side opposite to the predetermined side side. In this case, these symbols CH3 and CH4 are partially displayed so as not to protrude from the partial display area PL5.

Incidentally, although omitted for convenience of explanation in FIG. 34B, a predetermined background or an image of a character for effect is displayed in the area outside the partial display area PL5 on the display screen G. In this case, the images of these predetermined backgrounds and characters for effect are displayed between the peripheral edge of the display screen G and the peripheral edge of the partial display area PL5 in the corner portion where the partial display area PL5 is set close to each other. You may do so. Further, a predetermined background or an image of a character for effect may be displayed on both sides of the partial display area PL5.

By synthesizing the partial α data with the symbol as described above, it is possible to partially display the symbol using the α data capable of performing antialiasing.

Further, as described above, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 cannot recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, and can recognize only the coordinates of the reference pixel. Then, in the processing on the program, it is not possible to perform the processing of dividing only a part of the symbol sprite data. On the other hand, it is also conceivable to set a plurality of symbol sprite data required for partial display in advance for one symbol. However, the symbol sprite data is data including color information, and the data capacity is larger than that of α data in which only the α value is set for each pixel. Therefore, by partially displaying the α data, it is possible to partially display the image data while suppressing the data capacity of the image data and the data capacity required for the NAND flash memory 102.

Further, when the VDP 76 is to perform partial display, it is only necessary to read the partial α data and apply it to the image data to be applied. Therefore, partial display can be performed while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the VDP 76.

It should be noted that antialiasing may not be performed when partial α data is applied. Further, the application target of the partial α data is not limited to the design, and may be a background character or a production character. Further, the parameter information may be set independently for the whole α data and the partial α data.

<First alternative form for partial display>
The first alternative form for performing a partial display will be described.

35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first alternative form, FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (c) show symbol sprite data, and FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (d) show overall α data. , FIGS. 35 (e) to 35 (h) show partial α data.

In this alternative mode, as shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (h), the overall α data PD28 and PD29 are individually set for each of the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27, and the partial α data PD30. ~ PD33 are set in common with each symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27. Incidentally, the initial size of the data stored in the NAND flash memory 102 is the same for all the data PD26 to PD33. Further, the above data structure is the same for the symbol sprite data other than the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27 exemplified in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (c).

In the case of this configuration, when partial display is not performed, antialiasing can be performed by synthesizing the corresponding overall α data PD28 and PD29 for each symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27. Further, in the case of partial display, antialiasing is performed by first synthesizing the corresponding whole α data PD28 and PD29, and then synthesizing the partial α data PD30 to PD33 corresponding to the part to be partially displayed. While doing so, it is possible to partially display using the common α data PD30 to PD33 for the part.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the types of partial α data PD30 to PD33 as compared with the configuration in which partial α data is individually set for the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27, and the partial α data can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for storing the data PD30 to PD33.

<Second alternative form for partial display>
A second alternative form for performing partial display will be described.

FIG. 36A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second alternative form, and FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing a symbol sprite data setting process in the second alternative form.

In this alternative form, antialiasing is performed and a part of the symbol is displayed by using α palette data instead of using α data. As shown in FIG. 36 (a-1), the α palette data PD34 is obtained by adding α value information to each color information of the palette data for 256 colors.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a-2), the symbol sprite data PD35 has an image area PA16 and a frame area PA17, but the frame area PA17 is set with color information that is not set in the image area PA16. Has been done. On the other hand, in the overall α palette data, complete transparency information is set as an α value with respect to the color information set in the frame area PA17. Further, in the image area PA16, "1", which is opaque information, is set as an α value in the color information of the portion excluding the outer edge portion, and the color information of the outer edge portion is partially transparent information as an α value. 0 <α value <1 is set. By synthesizing the whole α palette data with the symbol sprite data PD35, antialiasing can be performed as shown in FIG. 36 (a-3).

Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (a-2), the symbol sprite data PD35 is set with a plurality of partial regions PA18 to PA21 in which the same color information is not used for each other. On the other hand, the completely transparent information is set as an α value for the color information set in some partial areas PA18 to PA21 and the frame area PA17, and the color information set in other areas is set. For the part, α palette data for which opaque information is set as the α value is prepared. A plurality of types of α palette data for the portion are prepared so that the partial regions PA18 to PA21 to which the α value of the completely transparent information is applied are different from each other. By synthesizing the partial α palette data with the symbol sprite data PD35, a part of the symbol can be displayed as shown in FIG. 36 (a-4).

Hereinafter, the setting process of the symbol sprite data in the VDP 76, which is executed when the α palette data is used, will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (b).

First, in step S2001, the symbol sprite data to be drawn this time, which is shown in the drawing list, is grasped. In the following step S2002, it is determined whether or not to apply the overall α palette data to the symbol sprite data grasped in step S2001.

When applying the whole α-pallet data, in step S2003, the whole α-pallet data is read from the designated address and combined with the symbol sprite data read from the same designated address. As a result, the α value added to each color information in the overall α palette data is applied to the symbol sprite data.

On the other hand, when applying the partial α-pallet data, in step S2004, the partial α-pallet data is read from the designated address and combined with the symbol sprite data read from the same designated address. As a result, the α value added to each color information in the partial α palette data is applied to the symbol sprite data.

After executing step S2003 or step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, various parameters (coordinates, size, rotation angle, etc.) to be referred to when writing the synthetic sprite data created in step S2003 or step S2004 to the frame areas 82a and 82b are grasped. After that, this setting process ends.

By executing the above processing, the whole α-pallet data or the partial α-pallet data is combined with the symbol sprite data. Even with this configuration, although the data configuration of the symbol sprite data is restricted as compared with the case of using the α data, antialiasing and a part of the symbol sprite can be displayed. Further, the setting for partial display can be made according to the setting of the color information.

<Another form for displaying character transitions using α data>
Another form for performing character transition display using α data will be described.

FIG. 37 (a) is a flowchart showing the character transition process executed by the VDP 76, and FIGS. 37 (b) to 37 (f) are explanatory views for explaining how the character transition display is performed. The character transition process is executed in the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, the character transition process is started when the character transition specification is set in the drawing list.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), in the character transition process, first, in step S2101, the superposition process of the character sprite data PD36 is executed. As shown in FIG. 37B, the character sprite data PD36 has a plurality of character areas PA22 to PA26 arranged side by side in a predetermined direction, specifically in the horizontal direction, and has a rectangular outer shape. The data is defined so that the periphery of the plurality of character areas PA22 to PA26 is surrounded by the frame area PA27. In step S2101, two identical character sprite data PD36s are read out, and the data are set so that the entire data overlaps the front and back.

In the following step S2102, palette data is set in the character sprite data PA36 on the back side. As a result, the same color information is set for each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 in the character sprite data PA36 on the back side. In the following step S2103, the whole α data is synthesized with the character sprite data PD36 on the back side. As a result, antialiasing is performed for each character area PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite on the back side.

In the following step S2104, palette data is set in the character sprite data PA36 on the front side. The palette data is different from the palette data set in step S2102 in the color information set for each numerical information of the bitmap data. As a result, color information different from the character areas PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite data PD36 on the back side is set for each character area PA22 to PA26 in the character sprite data PD36 on the front side.

In the following step S2105, it is determined whether or not to synthesize the overall α data with the character sprite data PD36 on the front side. When synthesizing the whole α data, in step S2106, after synthesizing the whole α data with the front character sprite data PD36, the character transition process is terminated. The whole α data is the same as the whole α data used in step S2103. As a result, antialiasing is performed for each character area PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite data PD36 on the front side.

When the process of step S2106 is executed, the character areas PA22 to PA26 set in the character sprite data PD36 on the back side are not displayed on the display screen G, and the character sprite data on the front side is not displayed. Each character area PA22 to PA26 set in PD36 is displayed. In this case, the characters are displayed with the color information set in each character area PA22 to PA26 in the character sprite data PD36 on the front side.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2105 that the overall α data is not synthesized, the character transition process is performed after synthesizing the partial α data with the front character sprite data PD36 in step S2107. finish. As shown in FIGS. 37 (c) and 37 (d), the partial α data PD37 and PD38 are completely transparent information as α values for each pixel in the area corresponding to a part of the character areas PA22 to PA26 and the frame area PA27. Is set. Further, in the other character areas PA22 to PA26, opaque information is set as an α value for each pixel included in the portion excluding the outer edge portion, and each pixel included in the outer edge portion is partially transparent as an α value. Information 0 <α value <1 is set. Further, a plurality of types of partial α data PD37 and PD38 are set so that the character areas PA22 to PA26 are erased character by character in a predetermined direction, specifically, in order from the left.

When the process of step S2107 is executed, the character area of the character sprite on the back side is finally displayed on the display screen G for the character area hidden in the character sprite on the front side. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 37 (e) and 37 (f), some characters continuous from the left side are displayed with the color information set in each character area in the character sprite on the back side. , The remaining characters are displayed in the color information set for each character information in the character sprite on the front side. Alternatively, all the characters are displayed in the character sprite on the back side with the color information set for each character information.

As described above, karaoke-like character transition display can be performed using α data. By the way, the character transition display is executed when a karaoke-like effect is performed, and an effect is performed such that the corresponding lyrics portion is discolored according to the melody output from the speaker unit 45.

Note that the character sprite data PD36 may not be set in an overlapping manner, but a single character sprite data PD36 may be set so that the display range thereof is sequentially narrowed. In this case, each character area is not displayed so as to be sequentially colored differently, but is displayed so that each character area is sequentially erased.

Further, when each character area is displayed so as to be sequentially colored differently, the character sprite data PD36 on the back side is first applied by applying α data in which the character sprite data PD36 on the front side is hidden, so that the character sprite data PD36 on the back side is displayed. The α data to be displayed may be changed so that each character area of the character sprite data PD36 on the front side is sequentially displayed. In this case, when the character area of the front character sprite data PD36 is to be displayed, the character area to be displayed in the front character sprite data PD36 is the corresponding character of the back character sprite data PD36. The area may be overwritten, or the color information of both character areas may be blended.

Further, the character sprite data on the front side may not be antialiased so that the outline portion of each character area is not affected by the image on the back side.

<Structure for performing wipe switching effect>
Next, a configuration for performing the wipe switching effect will be described.

In the wipe switching effect, when the background image or a large number of characters are changed, the image at the first display timing is gradually erased, and instead, the erased area is used to gradually erase the image at the later display timing. It is a production to be displayed in.

The link display function is used for the wipe switching effect. This link display function is a function that integrates the subordinate image data (relative sprite) with one type of reference side image data (absolute sprite) and enables the VDP76 side to handle it as one image data. be. When a plurality of image data are integrated by the link display function, the subordinate image data is visually displayed only within the image range of the reference side image data. Further, when the image data is integrated by the link display function, the processing performed on the reference side image data is also applied to the subordinate side image data.

Further, in the wipe switching effect, α data for the wipe switching effect is used in order to gradually erase the image of the earlier display timing and gradually appear the image of the later display timing. The α data for the wipe switching effect is synthesized with respect to the reference side image data of the prior display timing, but as described above, the subordinate side image data is regarded as one image data integrated with the reference side image data. Since it is handled, the α data is also applied to the dependent image data.

Here, with reference to FIG. 38, each image data constituting the image of the pre-display timing, each image data constituting the image of the post-display timing, and α data for the wipe switching effect will be described.

FIG. 38A shows the image data PD39 to PD42 constituting the image of the advance display timing. Of these, the image data PD39 is image data for displaying the rearmost image of the first display timing, and is used as the reference side image data in the link display function (hereinafter, the image data PD39 is used as the reference side image data). PD39). Further, the plurality of image data PD40 to PD42 are image data for displaying a decorative image displayed on the rearmost image, and are used as subordinate image data in the link display function (hereinafter,). Image data PD40 to PD42 are referred to as subordinate image data PD40 to PD42).

By applying the link display function to these image data PD39 to PD42, as described above, the dependent image data PD40 to PD42 are visually displayed only within the image range of the reference side image data PD39. It becomes. Even if the entire subordinate image data is included in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b, the portion protruding from the reference side image data PD39 is not drawn.

FIG. 38B shows the image data PD43 to PD45 constituting the image at the rear display timing. The image data PD43 is image data for displaying the rearmost image of the rear display timing, and the plurality of image data PD44 and PD45 are image data for displaying the decorative image displayed on the rearmost image. Is. The link display function is not applied to the image data PD43 to PD45 that constitute the image of the subsequent display timing.

FIGS. 38 (c) and 38 (d) show α data PD46 and PD47 for the wipe switching effect. Since these α data PD46 and PD47 are combined with the reference side image data PD39, they have the same size and outer shape as the reference side image data PD39 at the time of initial setting. Further, in each α data PD46 and PD47, the completely transparent regions PA28 and PA30 in which the α value of each pixel is set to “0” which is the completely transparent information and “1” where the α value of each pixel is the opaque information. The opaque regions PA29 and PA31 set in are provided. In each α data PD46 and PD47, the regions inside the boundary line are the opaque regions PA29 and PA31, and the regions outside are the completely transparent regions PA28 and PA30. Each of these α data PD46 and PD47 is switched and used every time the image for one frame is updated when executing the wipe switching effect, but the α data PD46 used at the earlier timing is later. The sizes of the completely transparent regions PA28 and PA30 are set larger than the α data PD47 used at the timing.

A specific processing configuration for executing the wipe switching effect using each of the above image data will be described.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for the wipe switching effect executed by the display CPU 72. The arithmetic processing for the wipe switching effect is executed in the background arithmetic processing in step S615 in the task processing (FIG. 15). Further, the arithmetic processing for the wipe switching effect is activated when the information about the wipe switching effect is set in the currently set data table.

First, in step S2201, each image data PD43 to PD45 corresponding to the image at the post-display timing is grasped based on the currently set data table, and each of the image data PD43 to PD45 is grasped as a priority side in drawing. do. In the following step S2202, the parameters of the image data PD43 to PD45 grasped as the post-display timing are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is obtained in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to the image data PD43 to PD45. Update the control information by writing to.

After that, in steps S2203 to S2209, a process for instructing the drawing of the image at the prior display timing is executed. First, in step S2203, the reference side image data PD39 among the images of the prior display timing is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S2204, the parameters of the reference side image data PD39 are calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to the reference image data PD39 in the work RAM 73 for control information. To update.

In the following step S2205, the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 among the images of the prior display timing are grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S2206, the parameters of the dependent image data PD40 to PD42 are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to the respective dependent image data PD40 to PD42. Update the control information with.

After that, in step S2207, the link designation information is stored. The link designation information is information for designating that the drawing of the image data is executed by using the link display function. In the following step S2208, the α data PD46 and PD47 for the wipe switching effect corresponding to the current drawing instruction are grasped based on the currently set data table. The α data PD46 and PD47 for the wipe switching effect are set in association with the reference side image data PD39, and the application target is the reference side image data PD39.

After that, after storing the wipe designation information in step S2209, this calculation process ends. The wipe designation information is information for instructing that the α data PD46 and PD47 for the wipe switching effect are combined with the reference side image data PD39.

When the arithmetic process for the wipe switching effect is executed as described above, a drawing list for drawing an image corresponding to the wipe switching effect is created in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408). The drawing list will be described below. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a drawing list created when the wipe switching effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 40, a plurality of image data are set in association with each drawing order. In this case, since each image data constituting the image of the post-display timing is grasped as the priority side in step S2201 of the above calculation process, each image data constituting the image of the post-display timing is better in the drawing list. , The drawing order is set before each image data constituting the image of the first display timing.

A link is specified for each image data constituting the image of the first display timing. When the link designation is made, the image data related to the link designation is processed within the range of one processing time of the drawing process (FIG. 13) in the VDP 76, but the image data is not limited to this, and each process is not limited to this. It may be configured to be processed in batches. Further, although the description by illustration is omitted, among the image data constituting the image of the prior display timing, the parameter P (4) of the background data corresponding to the reference side image data is the α data for the wipe switching effect. Information is set.

By the way, the symbol sprite data is set in the drawing order after each image data constituting the image of the first display timing. Therefore, an image in which the variable display of the symbol is executed is displayed in front of the background image in which the wipe switching effect is performed.

Next, the setting process for the wipe switching effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. The setting process for the wipe switching effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, at the timing when the setting process for the wipe switching effect is executed, each image data constituting the image of the post-display timing specified in the drawing list this time is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. It has already been done.

In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the link designation is set in the drawing list. If the link specification is not set, this setting process ends as it is. When the link designation is set, the reference side image data PD39 designated as the drawing target this time and the reference side image data PD39 are transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 in step S2302. Know the address. In the following step S2303, the parameters of the reference side image data PD39 are grasped.

In the following step S2304, the addresses to which the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 designated as the drawing target this time and the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 are transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. In the following step S2305, each parameter of the dependent image data PD40 to PD42 is grasped.

In the following step S2306, the link is set. As a result, the reference side image data PD39 grasped in step S2302 is linked to the dependent side image data PD40 to PD42 grasped in step S2304. By the way, in this link, the dependent image data PD40 to PD42 to which the parameter grasped in step S2305 is applied are linked to the reference side image data PD39 to which the parameter grasped in step S2303 is applied. ..

In the following step S2307, it is determined whether or not the wipe designation is set. If the wipe specification is not set, this setting process ends as it is. When the wipe designation is set, in step S2308, the α data PD46, PD47 for the wipe switching effect designated this time and the α data PD46, PD47 for the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are transferred. Know your address. Then, the α data read out based on the grasped address is combined with the reference side image data PD39 to which the dependent image data PD40 to PD42 are linked. After that, this setting process ends.

Next, a state of the wipe switching effect using the link display function will be described with reference to FIG. 42.

At the timing before the wipe switching effect is started, the image PC 12 of the prior display timing is displayed as shown in FIG. 42 (a). In front of the image PC 12 at the prior display timing, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After that, when the wipe switching effect is started, the reference side image data is drawn after the image data PD43 to PD45 constituting the image PC 13 at the rear display timing are drawn with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. The image data in a state in which the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 are linked to the PD39 and the α data PD46 for the wipe switching effect shown in FIG. 38C is combined is drawn.

In this case, the image data PD39 to PD42 of the pre-display timing are drawn so as to overlap the image data PD43 to PD45 of the post-display timing, but at the time of drawing, the calculation for fusion as described above is executed. Will be done. Therefore, at each dot corresponding to the pixel in which the completely transparent region PA28 is combined, the numerical information of the image data of the post-display timing remains as it is. On the other hand, since the numerical information of the pixel in which the opaque region PA29 is combined at the first display timing is overwritten for the dot to be drawn, the numerical information of the image data at the later display timing is erased and the first display is performed. The timing image data is written. As a result, as shown in FIG. 42B, a wipe image is displayed in which the outside of the boundary line is the image PC 13 with the rear display timing and the inside of the boundary line is the image PC 12 with the front display timing. In front of the wipe image, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After that, instead of the α data PD46 for the wipe switching effect shown in FIG. 38 (c), the drawing process is executed using the α data PD47 for the wipe switching effect shown in FIG. 38 (d). As shown in 42 (c), the area where the image PC 12 of the first display timing is displayed becomes narrower, but the area where the image PC 13 of the second display timing is displayed becomes wider.

As described above, by gradually switching the background image over a plurality of frames while performing the wipe switching effect, the switching mode of the background image can be made novel, and the switching mode of the background image can be changed. It is also possible to diversify.

Further, since each of the image data PD39 to PD42 constituting the image of the front display timing is linked and the α data PD46 and PD47 for the wipe switching effect are combined with the linked image data, each of them. The processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the α data for the wipe switching effect is individually synthesized for the image data PD39 to PD42.

Further, after the image data PD43 to PD45 of the rear display timing are simply drawn with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, the image data PD39 to PD42 of the front display timing are drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b. It is a composition. That is, for the image data PD43 to PD45 of the rear display timing, the image data may be drawn as usual according to the drawing list. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the processing configuration.

For the purpose of antialiasing or partial display, α data may be individually applied to the dependent image data PD40 to PD42. Further, the link designation may be made for the image data PD43 to PD45 of the rear display timing.

Further, the direction of wipe switching is not limited to a configuration in which the image of the advance display timing is narrowed from the outside to the inside over a plurality of frames, and may be a configuration in which the image is narrowed from the inside to the outside. It may be configured to be narrowed from a predetermined side of the above to one side facing the side.

<Configuration for smooth movement and display of sprites>
Next, a configuration for smoothly moving and displaying the sprite will be described.

When displaying an animation in which a sprite is moving in a predetermined moving direction, the sprite is drawn at a position shifted by a predetermined dot in the moving direction for each frame or for each of a plurality of frames. A sprite for smooth movement is set as the sprite.

A sprite for smooth movement will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, and FIGS. 43 (b) and 43 (c) show sprite data PD48 and PD49 for displaying the sprite CH5 for smooth movement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating.

As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is an individual image showing clouds displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction with the passage of time. Further, the display size is smaller than that of the other individual image PC 14 that is simultaneously displayed as an image for one frame. Further, when the sprite CH5 for smooth movement or another individual image PC 14 is displayed, the symbol is displayed in a variable manner in front of them, but the individual image corresponding to the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is displayed. , The display size is smaller than the design. Further, in the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, the number of image updates required for moving one dot is set to be larger than that of the symbol. That is, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is moved and displayed in a state where the moving speed is slower than the symbol.

The sprite CH5 for smooth movement is not limited to an individual image representing clouds, and if it is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction, it may be an individual image representing another object such as an airplane. There may be.

A plurality of sprite data are set as image data for displaying the sprite CH5 for smooth movement. Specifically, two sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set. Both of these sprite data PD48 and PD49 are for representing the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, but the second sprite data PD49 is based on the frame areas 82a and 82b in the movement direction with respect to the first sprite data PD48. It corresponds to the state where it is moved by half a dot.

Both of these sprite data PD48 and PD49 are offset by half a dot due to the difference in the α value of the boundary portion. Comparing the two sprite data PD48 and PD49 by taking each pixel constituting the same boundary portion as an example, as shown in FIGS. 43 (b) and 43 (c), the α values of the pixels on the destination side in the moving direction are different. ing.

As already explained, when the α value is "0", it corresponds to the completely transparent information, and when the α value is "0", all the overlapping images are transparent on the back side of the display screen G. On the other hand, when the α value is “1”, it corresponds to the opaque information, and when the α value is “1”, the overlapping image is filled in the back side of the display screen G. Further, when 0 <α value <1, the overlapping images are transmitted on the back side of the display screen G in a state where the α value is semi-transparent.

By the way, when the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is superimposed on the image on the back side, the calculation for fusion is executed. The calculation for the fusion has already been described.

In the first sprite data PD48, the α value of the boundary portion is set as shown in FIG. 43 (b), whereas in the second sprite data PD49, the boundary portion is set as shown in FIG. 43 (c). The α value of the portion is set to a value corresponding to the state of being shifted by half a dot with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b in the moving direction. As a result, when the second sprite data PD49 is set at the same position as the coordinates where the first sprite data PD48 is set, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIGS. 43 (b) and 43 (c), as shown by the alternate long and short dash line. The sprite CH5 for smooth movement is visually recognized as if it has moved by half a dot with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b or by a corresponding amount with respect to the display screen G.

By the way, the second sprite data PD49 is created by enlarging the first sprite data PD48 twice, shifting it by one dot with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b, and then multiplying it by 1/2. ..

Next, a processing configuration for performing smooth movement display will be described using the sprite data PD48 and PD49. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for smooth movement executed by the display CPU 72. The arithmetic processing for smooth movement is executed in the background arithmetic processing in step S615 in the task processing (FIG. 15). Further, the arithmetic processing for smooth movement is started when the information about smooth movement is set in the currently set data table.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the smooth movement display. This determination is made based on the currently set data table. If it is the start timing, the area for the progress target flag set in the work RAM 73 is cleared in step S2402. In the following step S2403, the numerical information of the progress counter set in the work RAM 73 is initialized.

In the following step S2404, the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as the drawing target this time. In the following step S2405, by referring to the numerical information of the progress counter, the coordinate information of the first sprite data PD48 is calculated and derived, and the derived coordinate information is used in the work RAM 73 for the first sprite data PD48. The control information is updated by writing in the area secured in correspondence with. Incidentally, the coordinate information is set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the numerical information of the progress counter.

After that, in step S2406, parameters other than the coordinate information are calculated and derived for the first sprite data PD48, and the derived parameter information is written in the secured area to update the control information. .. Further, in step S2407, after storing the smooth movement designation information, this calculation process is terminated. When the above processing is executed, the first sprite data PD48 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list, and the initial value coordinates are set as the coordinates thereof. Further, in the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

On the other hand, if it is not the start timing, it is determined in step S2408 whether or not the progress target flag is set. If the progress target flag is not set, it means that the first sprite data PD48 was set in the previous frame, so the process proceeds to step S2409.

In step S2409, the progress target flag is set. In the following step S2410, the second sprite data PD49 is grasped as the drawing target this time. In the following step S2411, the coordinate information of the second sprite data PD49 is grasped, and the grasped coordinate information is written in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to the second sprite data PD49 to control the control. Update the information for. In this case, since the progress counter update process is not executed, the information of the same coordinates as the information of the coordinates drawn by the first sprite data PD48 in the previous frame is grasped.

After that, in step S2412, parameters other than the coordinate information are calculated and derived for the second sprite data PD49, and the derived parameter information is written in the secured area to update the control information. .. Further, in step S2407, after storing the smooth movement designation information, this calculation process is terminated. When the above processing is executed, the second sprite data PD49 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list, and the same coordinates as the previous frame are set as the coordinates thereof. Further, in the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

If it is determined in step S2408 that the progress target flag is set, it means that the second sprite data PD49 was set in the previous frame, so the process proceeds to step S2413.

In step S2413, the progress target flag is cleared. In the following step S2414, the progress counter is updated so as to be incremented by 1. In the following step S2415, the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as the drawing target this time. In the following step S2416, by referring to the numerical information of the progress counter updated in step S2414, the coordinate information of the second sprite data PD49 is calculated and derived, and the derived coordinate information is secured as described above. Update the control information by writing to the area. In this case, the information of the coordinates advanced by one dot with respect to the coordinates set in the previous frame with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b in the moving direction is grasped.

After that, in step S2417, parameters other than the coordinate information are calculated and derived for the first sprite data PD48, and the derived parameter information is written in the secured area to update the control information. .. Further, in step S2407, after storing the smooth movement designation information, this calculation process is terminated. When the above processing is executed, in the drawing list, the first sprite data PD48 is set as the drawing target, and the coordinates are shifted by one dot from the coordinates set in the previous frame as the coordinates in the moving direction. Is set. Further, in the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

Next, the setting process for smooth movement executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45 (a). The setting process for smooth movement is executed in the content grasping process of step S504 in the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, the setting process for smooth movement is started when the smooth movement designation is set in the drawing list.

First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the drawing target this time is the first sprite data PD48. In the case of the first sprite data PD48, the process proceeds to step S2502, the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as a drawing target, and the first sprite data PD48 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Know the address. On the other hand, if it is not the first sprite data PD48, the process proceeds to step S2503, the second sprite data PD49 is grasped as a drawing target, and the second sprite data PD49 in the change area 81b in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Know the address to which is being forwarded.

After executing the process of step S2502 or step S2503, the coordinates of the drawing target this time are grasped in step S2504, and other parameters are grasped in step S2505, and then this setting process is terminated.

By executing the setting process for smooth movement, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), the sprites to be drawn this time among the sprite data PD48 and PD49 of the drawing target are obtained for the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. The data is drawn at the specified coordinates. In this case, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the first sprite data PD48 is set so that the coordinates in the moving direction are "n" in the first frame, and the coordinates in the moving direction are set in the second frame. The second sprite data PD49 is set so that it becomes the same at "n". Further, in the third frame, the first sprite data PD48 is set so that the coordinates in the moving direction are "n + 1", and in the fourth frame, the second sprite data PD48 is set so that the coordinates in the moving direction are the same at "n + 1". Sprite data PD49 is set. Then, after the first sprite data PD48 and the second sprite data PD49 are alternately set for the same coordinates, the state in which the moving direction is updated by one dot is repeated. As a result, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is visually recognized for each frame as if it is advancing by half a dot with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b or by a corresponding amount with reference to the display screen G, and the sprite CH5 is displayed. It can be smoothly moved and displayed.

In particular, since the sprite CH5 for smooth movement has a smaller display size than the other individual image PC14s displayed at the same time, one dot or the display screen G is displayed for each frame with reference to the frame areas 82a and 82b. In the configuration in which the movement corresponds to the one dot as a reference, the movement amount becomes a large ratio to the own area, and there is a concern that the movement becomes conspicuous as rattling. On the other hand, according to this configuration, the sprite CH5 can be smoothly moved and displayed without causing such an inconvenience.

Further, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is an individual image showing a cloud, but when the frame rate is lowered as if the cloud is moving slowly, the frame areas 82a and 82b are used as reference at the timing of movement. In a configuration in which the image is moved by one dot or by the amount corresponding to the one dot with the display screen G as a reference, there is a concern that it will be noticeable as rattling. On the other hand, according to this configuration, even if the movement is performed by one dot or the corresponding amount for each of a plurality of frames, the movement of less than one dot is performed in the meantime with reference to the frame areas 82a and 82b. , Sprite CH5 can be smoothly moved and displayed.

By the way, specifically, as a configuration for lowering the frame rate, the information of the same coordinates is applied to the first sprite data PD48 for the first plurality of frames, and the information of the same coordinates is applied to the second sprite data PD48. When a second plurality of frames are applied to the sprite data PD49, a configuration is conceivable in which the coordinate information is advanced by one dot. In this case, the number of the first plurality of frames and the number of the second plurality of frames may be the same number or different numbers. However, if it is desired to display the sprite CH5 for smooth movement as if it is traveling at a constant speed, it is preferable that the number of the first plurality of frames and the number of the second plurality of frames are the same.

Further, the smooth movement display as described above can be realized only by alternately drawing the sprite data PD48 and PD49 shifted by half a dot. That is, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while suppressing the complexity of the processing configuration. In addition, each sprite data PD48 and PD49 can be created by a simple method of making the α value of the outer edge portion different.

In addition, since the difference between the two sprite data PD48 and PD49 is half a dot, the apparent movement amount should be the same when switching from one to the other and when switching from the other to one. Can be done.

The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the sprite data PD48 and PD49 shifted by half a dot are provided, and sprite data shifted by less than one dot such as 1/4 dot or 1/4 dot may be provided. .. Further, in addition to the reference sprite data, a plurality of sprite data for less than 1 dot such as 1/4 dot, half dot, and 3/4 dot may be provided so that the movement amount is different. ..

Further, in the configuration in which the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b and the number of dots in the display screen G correspond to each other on a one-to-one basis, the second sprite data PD49 is based on the display screen G with respect to the first sprite data PD48. The data is shifted by half a dot.

Further, in a configuration in which the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b is smaller than the number of dots in the display screen G, the second sprite data PD49 is deviated from the first sprite data PD48 by half a dot with respect to the display screen G. It may be a configuration set as data. In this case, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set as data shifted by less than half a dot with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b. Further, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 may be set as data shifted by less than one dot instead of half a dot with respect to the display screen G.

Further, in a configuration in which the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b is larger than the number of dots in the display screen G, the second sprite data PD49 is deviated from the first sprite data PD48 by half a dot with respect to the display screen G. It may be a configuration set as data. In this case, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set as data deviated by half a dot or more with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b. Further, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 may be set as data shifted by less than one dot instead of half a dot with respect to the display screen G.

Further, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 are not stored in the memory module 74 in advance, but only one of them is stored in advance, and the other is from one sprite data after the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It may be a configuration that is created and saved separately. In this case, since it is necessary to create one of the sprite data and save it separately, the processing load increases, but the storage capacity required for storing the sprite data in the memory module 74 can be reduced.

Further, the above configuration for smooth movement may be applied to a sprite that is displayed so that a part of it moves, instead of a sprite that is displayed so that the whole moves.

Further, it is displayed at the same time as the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, and the individual image PC 14 having a size larger than that of the sprite CH5 is displayed as if it is moving over a predetermined period, that is, the viewpoint is slowly changed. It may be configured as such. In this case, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement may be configured such that the number of image updates required for moving one dot is set to be larger than that of the individual image PC 14. That is, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement may be configured to be moved and displayed in a state where the moving speed is slower than that of the individual image PC 14. In this configuration, since the small individual image is moved and displayed at a slower speed than the large individual image, there is a concern that rattling due to the movement of one dot is conspicuous, but as described above, less than one dot. By preparing the shifted sprite data PD48 and PD49 and using them alternately, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned rattling.

<Structure for zooming in using Scaler 97>
Next, a configuration for performing a zoom-in effect using the scaler 97 will be described.

As described above, the VDP 76 outputs an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be output, and the above is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. A display circuit 94 for displaying an image corresponding to the drawing data is provided (see FIG. 4). Incidentally, the image signal is a signal including gradation data for determining the display color at each dot (each pixel) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, and is output to the symbol display device 31 based on a predetermined clock signal. ..

The display circuit 94 converts the number of pixels of the drawing data read from the frame areas 82a and 82b to be output into the number of pixels specified by the display CPU 72, and each dot constituting the liquid crystal display unit 31a of the symbol display device 31. A scaler 97 for generating gradation data (each pixel) is provided.

The scaler 97 is provided in the display circuit 94 as a dedicated circuit for adjusting the resolution. As shown in FIG. 4, the scaler 97 is provided with a resolution adjusting buffer 97a. When the scaler 97 generates gradation data, the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be output is transferred to the resolution adjustment buffer 97a, and the gradation data for the specified number of pixels is transferred. The drawing data is converted so as to be. At the time of this conversion, linear interpolation processing is executed. Specifically, bilinear filtering can be used to convert the number of pixels.

Based on the gradation data created in the resolution adjustment buffer 97a, an image signal is generated by the image signal output unit 98 provided in the display circuit 94 and output to the symbol display device 31 and is output to the symbol display device 31. The image for one frame is displayed. Incidentally, the image signal output unit 98 is provided with a line buffer 98a, and detailed control is performed using the line buffer 98a when generating and outputting an image signal.

Here, when drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, the data is written to all the unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a and 82b is 800. The number of dots is × 600. On the other hand, the resolution of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is 1024 x 768 dots. That is, the liquid crystal display unit 31a has a higher resolution than the frame areas 82a and 82b.

When the resolution adjustment value (adjustment information) in the scaler 97 is set to the initial adjustment value (initial adjustment information), the drawing data created at a resolution of 800 × 600 is 1024 corresponding to the liquid crystal display unit 31a. It is converted into gradation data having a resolution of × 768. The state of this conversion will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (a).

In FIG. 46A, the range partitioned by the solid line is the range of the resolution adjustment buffer 97a, and the range partitioned by the alternate long and short dash line is the range in which the transferred drawing data PD50 is written. When the resolution of the drawing data PD50 is adjusted at a resolution corresponding to the initial adjustment value, the drawing data PD50 is converted into gradation data PD51 having a size indicated within the range partitioned by the alternate long and short dash line. In this case, the number of pixels of the gradation data PD51 matches the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, and all the data constituting the gradation data PD51 is output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal. That is, when converting to a resolution corresponding to the initial adjustment value, gradation data for all dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is created using all the pixels of the drawing data, so that the number of pixels of the drawing data is increased. The number of pixels of gradation data increases.

As described above, the initial adjustment value is set based on the execution of the initial setting process (FIG. 10) by the display CPU 72. Further, the area in the resolution adjustment buffer 97a to which the drawing data PD50 is transferred is always constant.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the zoom-in effect of the image is performed by using the scaler 97. In this zoom-in effect, the resolution adjustment value in the scaler 97 is set as the enlargement adjustment value. A plurality of types of enlargement adjustment values are set so that the corresponding resolutions are different, and each resolution is higher than the resolution of the initial adjustment value. A state in which the drawing data is converted into gradation data having a resolution corresponding to a predetermined enlargement adjustment value will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (b).

When the resolution of the drawing data PD52 indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 46B is adjusted at a resolution corresponding to the adjustment value for enlargement, the gradation data of the size indicated by the range divided by the alternate long and short dash line. It is converted to PD53. In this case, since the number of pixels of the gradation data PD53 is larger than the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, it is not possible to output all the data constituting the gradation data PD53 to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal.

On the other hand, the range of the gradation data PD53 to be output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal is specified by the display CPU 72. At the time of this designation, the address of the dot serving as the drawing reference point is designated in the resolution adjustment buffer 97a, but the designation method is arbitrary as long as the designation can be performed satisfactorily.

By designating the drawing reference point, the display circuit 94 outputs the data in the range shown by the broken line in FIG. 46 (b) of the gradation data PD53 to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal. In this case, since the image signal is output using a part of the pixels of the drawing data, the image display on the symbol display device 31 is in a state where a part of the image corresponding to the drawing data is substantially enlarged. Is done.

The drawing reference point corresponds to any dot in the four corners in the range to be output of the image signal, but which dot is targeted is arbitrary. Further, the information capacity of the resolution adjustment buffer 97a is set to an information capacity that can store all pixels of the gradation data regardless of which enlargement adjustment value is used to convert the drawing data to the gradation data. Has been done.

A specific processing configuration for executing the zoom-in effect of the image using the scaler 97 will be described.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for zoom-in effect executed by the display CPU 72. The arithmetic processing for the zoom-in effect is shared and executed in each arithmetic processing of steps S615 to S617 in the task processing (FIG. 15), but for convenience of explanation, it is shown here as a single flowchart.

First, in step S2601, the image data for the background is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S2602, the parameters of the grasped image data for the background are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the area secured corresponding to the image data for the background in the work RAM 73. Update control information.

In the following step S2603, the image data for the effect is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S2604, the parameters of the grasped image data for the effect are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the area secured corresponding to the image data for the effect in the work RAM 73. Update control information.

In the following step S2605, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to expand the scaler 97 with respect to the initial adjustment value based on the currently set data table. When it is not the timing to enlarge, in step S2606, the image data for the symbol (that is, the symbol sprite data) is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S2607, the parameters of the image data for the grasped symbol are calculated and derived according to the fact that the scaler 97 is set to the initial adjustment value, and the derived parameter information is obtained in the work RAM 73. The control information is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the image data for the design. After that, this arithmetic processing is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for zooming-in effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), drawing for drawing an image corresponding to the scaler 97 being set to the initial adjustment value. A list is created and sent to VDP76.

On the other hand, when it is the timing to expand the scaler 97 with respect to the initial adjustment value, the information of the expansion adjustment value this time is grasped in step S2608. Information on each expansion adjustment value is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102, and is transferred to the work RAM 73 by the timing required by the display CPU 72. In the data table, information on any of the expansion adjustment values is set, and in step S2608, the information on the expansion adjustment value shown in the currently set data table is grasped.

In the following step S2609, the information of the drawing reference point this time is grasped. The information of the drawing reference point is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information of the adjustment value for enlargement. Further, the information of each drawing reference point is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102, and is transferred to the work RAM 73 by the timing required by the display CPU 72. Information on one of the drawing reference points is set in the data table, and in step S2609, the information on the drawing reference point shown in the currently set data table is grasped. In the following step S2610, the zoom-in designation information is stored.

After that, in step S2611, the image data for the design is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S2612, the parameters of the image data for the grasped pattern are calculated and derived in accordance with the fact that the scaler 97 is set to the adjustment value for enlargement this time, and the information of the derived parameters is calculated and derived from the work RAM 73. In, the control information is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the image data for the symbol. In this case, the coordinates and size of the image data for the symbol are calculated so that the display position of the symbol and the size of the symbol on the display screen G are not changed between the timing before the execution of the zoom-in effect and the timing during the execution.

Specifically, when the resolution of image data of the same size is adjusted by the scaler 97, the size of the resolution adjustment with the enlargement adjustment value is larger than that of the resolution adjustment with the initial adjustment value. Therefore, the size information of the image data for the symbol specified in the drawing list is the initial adjustment value so that the size after the resolution adjustment at the enlargement adjustment value is the same as the size after the resolution adjustment at the initial adjustment value. Is specified smaller than in the case of.

Further, when the resolution of the image data is adjusted by the scaler 97, the position of the image is displaced in the direction of enlargement in the resolution adjustment with the enlargement adjustment value as compared with the resolution adjustment with the initial adjustment value. Therefore, the coordinate information of the image data for the symbol specified in the drawing list is the initial adjustment value so that the position after the resolution adjustment in the enlargement adjustment value is the same as the position after the resolution adjustment in the initial adjustment value. It is specified by being displaced in the opposite direction of the expansion direction than in the case of.

After executing the process of step S2612, the present calculation process is terminated. When the arithmetic processing for zooming-in effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the image corresponding to the scaler 97 being set to one of the enlargement adjustment values is drawn. A drawing list is created and sent to the VDP76. In this case, the drawing list includes information on the adjustment value for enlargement, information on the drawing reference point, and zoom-in designation information indicating that the zoom-in effect should be executed. Further, for the image data for the design, the parameter information corresponding to the enlargement adjustment value specified at the same time is set.

Incidentally, the number of image data for which the adjustment for enlargement is performed with respect to the parameter information as described above is less than or equal to the number of image data for which the adjustment for enlargement is not performed.

Next, the setting process for the zoom-in effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.

The setting process for the zoom-in effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, when the zoom-in designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the zoom-in effect is executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the zoom-in designation information is set in association with the image data for the symbol, the setting process for the zoom-in effect is the drawing order of the image data for the symbol in the drawing list this time. Will be started if

In the drawing order in the drawing list, since the image data for the background and the image data for the effect are set in the order prior to the image data for the symbol, the setting process for the zoom-in effect is executed. At the timing, the drawing of the image data for the background and the image data for the effect is completed.

First, in step S2701, the information of the enlargement adjustment value specified in the drawing list is set by writing it in the dedicated area of the register 92 (see FIG. 4). Here, the dedicated area is set as an area different from the area in which the information of the initial adjustment value is written. Therefore, even if the information of the adjustment value for enlargement is set, the information of the initial adjustment value is not deleted.

In the following step S2702, the information of the drawing reference point specified in the drawing list is set by writing it in the dedicated area of the register 92. Here, when the resolution is adjusted with the initial adjustment value, it is sufficient to always set a constant drawing reference point. Therefore, the drawing reference point corresponding to the initial adjustment value is predetermined in the display circuit 94.

In the following step S2703, the expansion flag is set in a predetermined area set in the register 92. By setting the enlargement flag, when the image signal is output in the display circuit 94, the resolution is adjusted with the enlargement adjustment value set in step S2701 and set in step S2702. The range to be output of the image signal is determined with reference to the drawing reference point. The enlargement flag is deleted based on the instruction from the display CPU 72 when the zoom-in effect is terminated.

In the following step S2704, the image data for the symbol designated as the drawing target this time and the address to which the image data for the symbol is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. Further, in step S2705, the parameters of the image data for the design are grasped. After that, this setting process ends.

By executing the setting process for zooming in as described above, the drawing data created based on the drawing list specified this time is subjected to resolution adjustment with the corresponding enlargement adjustment value and converted into gradation data. The data is converted, and data in a predetermined range is output as an image signal with reference to the drawing reference point.

The output process executed by the display circuit 94 to output the image signal will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. The output process is activated when an image signal output instruction is given from the display CPU 72, and is activated every time the image update start timing (for example, 20 msec) is substantially reached.

First, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the expansion flag is set in the register 92. If the expansion flag is not set, the linear interpolation process corresponding to the initial adjustment value is executed in step S2802. In this case, the information of the initial adjustment value is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and the linear interpolation process is executed according to the initial adjustment value. In the linear interpolation process, in order to interpolate the increase in the number of pixels due to the increase in resolution, the numerical information (or pixel value) of each pixel after enlargement is linearly arranged from the numerical information set to the four pixels before enlargement. Performs bilinear interpolation obtained by interpolation. Note that the bilinear interpolation is not executed collectively for all pixels, but is sequentially executed for each predetermined number of pixels.

In the following step S2803, it is determined whether or not the conversion to the gradation data is completed, and if not, the process returns to step S2802. If it is completed, the dots to be output are grasped in step S2804 based on a predetermined initial reference point.

Then, in step S2805, after executing the image signal output processing, the main output processing is terminated. In the image signal output process, the image signals for the dots grasped in step S2804 are sequentially output.

On the other hand, when the enlargement flag is set (step S2801: YES), the linear interpolation process corresponding to the enlargement adjustment value specified this time is executed in step S2806. In this case, the information of the expansion adjustment value is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and the linear interpolation processing is executed according to the expansion adjustment value. The contents of the linear interpolation processing are as described above.

In the following step S2807, it is determined whether or not the conversion to the gradation data is completed, and if not, the process returns to step S2806. If it is completed, in step S2808, the drawing reference point designated this time is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and the dots to be output are grasped based on the grasped drawing reference point.

Then, in step S2805, after executing the image signal output processing, the main output processing is terminated. In the image signal output process, the image signals for the dots grasped in step S2808 are sequentially output.

Next, the state of the zoom-in effect will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the zoom-in effect. Further, FIG. 50 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image at the image update timing immediately before the zoom-in effect is performed, and FIG. 50 (b) is the image update timing next to the image update timing and zooms in. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image of the timing when the production was started.

As shown in FIG. 50A, immediately before the zoom-in effect is performed, the character CH6 is displayed in front of the background image PC15 and near the center thereof, and the symbols CH7 and CH8 are displayed in the upper left and upper right. ing. The image is in a state in which the symbols CH7 and CH8 are displayed in reach, and the character CH6 is further displayed as an effect of the reach display. When the image is displayed, each image data is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be output with the same relative size and relative position as in FIG. 50 (a).

At the next image update timing in the above state, the zoom-in effect is started. In this case, each image data is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be output in the relative size and relative position as shown in FIG. 50 (b-1). As shown in FIG. 50 (b-2), the resolution of the drawing data is adjusted by the adjustment value for enlargement, and the image signal is output based on the area grasped with reference to the drawing reference point. Image is displayed.

In the image, the background image PC15 and the character CH6 are enlarged so as to zoom in on the character CH6 as compared with the image of FIG. 50A. On the other hand, the positions and sizes of the symbols CH7 and CH8 are the same, substantially the same, or the same as the positions and sizes in the case of FIG. 50 (a).

By the way, when the same line of the character CH6 is compared, the line is displayed with the gradation (and color) as shown in FIG. 50 (c-1) in the state of FIG. 50 (a), whereas the line is displayed in FIG. 50 (a). In the state of b-2), the line is displayed with the gradation (and color) as shown in FIG. 50 (c-2).

Further, by displaying the image shown in FIG. 50 (b-2) and then displaying the image shown in FIG. 50 (a), the VDP76 has only returned to the resolution adjustment based on the initial adjustment value, but the image The display of is as if it were zoomed out. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, not only the zoom-in effect using the scaler 97 but also the zoom-out effect using the scaler 97 can be performed. Further, as already described, since a plurality of types of combinations of the enlargement adjustment value and the drawing reference point are set, the zoom-in effect and the zoom-out effect can be performed stepwise.

As described above, the zoom-in effect can be performed by using the scaler 97, and the zoom-out effect can be performed by returning the zoomed-in state to the initial state. For example, when drawing in the frame areas 82a and 82b, each image data can be drawn in an enlarged state to similarly perform a zoom-in effect. In this case, all the image data to be drawn in the VDP 76 are enlarged. It becomes necessary to execute the processing, and the processing load of the VDP 76 becomes large. Further, for example, a configuration in which the image data for the normal size and the image data for the enlarged size are set in advance for the same image can be considered, but in this case, it is necessary to store the image data. It causes an increase in storage capacity. On the other hand, by performing the zoom-in effect using the scaler 97, the process for enlarging and displaying the image is performed not by the control unit 91 of the VDP 76 but by the display circuit 94. Therefore, the zoom-in effect and the zoom-out effect can be performed while suppressing the influence on the processing load of the control unit 91 and the influence on the storage capacity required for storing the image data.

Further, the size of the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b is the same regardless of whether or not the zoom-in effect is performed. As a result, the drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b can be created with the same processing configuration regardless of whether the zoom-in effect is performed or not.

Further, in the display circuit 94, when the zoom-in effect is not performed, the resolution is adjusted with the designated initial adjustment value, and the range to be output of the image signal is grasped based on the predetermined initial reference point. In, when the zoom-in effect is performed, the reference adjustment value and the reference point are only changed. Therefore, the zoom-in effect can be performed while using the hardware configuration of the display circuit 94 when the zoom-in effect is not performed.

Further, even when the zoom-in effect is performed, the design is not enlarged and displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the design from being lowered during the zoom-in effect. In particular, the display CPU 72 specifies the parameter of the image data for the symbol as a parameter that is not enlarged and displayed, and the VDP76 only needs to draw the image data for the symbol according to the parameter. Therefore, while suppressing the influence on the processing load of the VDP76, The visibility of the design can be improved.

Further, when the zoom-in effect is completed, the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is returned to the initial adjustment value. As a result, when the zoom-in effect is completed, the display of the image according to the resolution of the display screen G can be resumed.

The display circuit 94 may be configured to execute a process corresponding to the output process (FIG. 49) only by the operation of the hard circuit without using a program. Further, the display circuit 94 may not be built in the VDP 76, but may be provided separately from the VDP 76. In this case, the display circuit 94 may be provided on the signal path between the VDP 76 and the symbol display device 31, and a signal path is provided between the VRAM 75 and the symbol display device 31 separately from the signal path, and the signal path is provided. A display circuit 94 may be provided on the display circuit 94.

Further, the initial adjustment value and the expansion adjustment value may be written in the same area in the register 92. In this case, it is advisable to execute a process of returning the information of the area to the initial adjustment value after the zoom-in effect. The processing may be performed based on the designation from the display CPU 72, or may be independently performed by the VDP 76.

Further, the initial reference point may be configured to be set in the register 92 when the initial adjustment value is set in the register 92. In this case, the area where the initial reference point is set and the area where the drawing reference point is set may be set separately, and each of these pieces of information may be set in the same area. If the configuration is set to the same area, it is advisable to execute a process of returning the information in that area to the initial reference point after the zoom-in effect. The processing may be performed based on the designation from the display CPU 72, or may be independently performed by the VDP 76.

Further, the image data for which the adjustment for enlargement is performed with respect to the parameter information is not limited to the image data for the design, and may be the image data for a predetermined effect or the image data for the background. .. In this case, for example, the character for production that is not the target of enlargement may be adjusted for enlargement so that at least the entire character is displayed, or at least the adjustment for enlargement is performed so that the position does not change. It may be configured.

Further, in addition to the scaler 97, a circuit for adjusting the size of drawing data for performing a zoom-in effect or a zoom-out effect may be provided.

Further, when the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is the initial adjustment value, only a part of the drawing data may be output as an image signal. In this case, when the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is set to the adjustment value for reduction, the range output as an image signal in the drawing data is expanded so that the zoom from the state displayed by the initial adjustment value can be expanded. It is possible to perform out production.

Further, when the zoom-in effect is performed, the background image PC15 and the character CH6 to be zoomed in may be gradually enlarged over a plurality of update times of the image. In this case, it is advisable to prepare a plurality of stages of adjustment values for enlargement of the scaler 97 and change the adjustment values in stages so that the enlargement ratio gradually increases. In addition, by setting the coordinates and scale parameters of the image data for the design according to each adjustment value for enlargement, when the zoom-in effect is performed so as to gradually enlarge the design, the design is displayed at each stage. It can be prevented from being enlarged.

<Direction using moving image data>
Next, the effect using the moving image data will be described.

The moving image data is image data that is compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data with reference to the still image data for one frame, and is encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 method. When the moving image data is decoded, it is expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames.

The moving image data set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 51.

As shown in FIGS. 51 (a) to 51 (c), the moving image data includes the moving image data PD54 for pre-branching, the moving image data PD55 for post-branching A, and the moving image data PD56 for post-branching B. , Is set. These moving image data PD54 to PD56 are set to perform a super reach display that develops after the normal reach display or without going through the normal reach display among the reach displays.

In each of these moving image data PD54 to PD56, file data is set at the first address, and then compressed data of each frame is set. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame.

The compressed data includes I picture data for one frame corresponding to the reference data, P picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the first difference data, and B picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the second difference data. And have.

The I-picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by itself at the time of decoding. The P-picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to the I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before decoding. .. The B picture data is bidirectionally predicted by referring to the I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before and the I picture data or P picture data after one frame or a plurality of frames at the time of decoding. It is data that can create still image data for one frame.

In the compressed data of each moving image data PD54 to PD56, I picture data is set as the data of the first frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the second frame, ..., The m-1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the m-th frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the m + 1 frame, ..., The n-1 frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the nth frame. The arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

The contents of the images set in the moving image data PD54 to PD56 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 (a) shows a part of the content of the image set in the moving image data PD 54 for before branching, and FIG. 52 (b) is set in the moving image data PD 55 for post-branching A. A part of the content of the image is shown, and FIG. 52 (c) shows a part of the content of the image set in the moving image data PD56 for B after branching.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a-1), the moving image data PD 54 for pre-branching is superimposed on the background image PC 16 for pre-branching showing a wavy state, and is a moving target character that is a boy character. Reference data (I picture data) PD57 corresponding to the image to which CH9 is added is set. Further, as shown in FIGS. 52 (a-2) and 52 (a-3), difference data (P picture) corresponding to an image in which the moving target character CH9 moves in a predetermined direction, although the background image PC16 is not provided. Data, B picture data) PD58 and PD59 are set. By creating still image data for one frame by the reference data PD57 and applying the difference data PD58 and PD59 to the reference data PD57, each difference data PD58, with respect to the background image PC16 set in the reference data PD57, Still image data for one frame to which the movement target character CH9 set in PD59 is added is created.

As shown in FIG. 52 (b-1), the moving image data PD55 for post-branch A has the same boy character so as to be superimposed on the background image PC17 for post-branch A in which a large number of jellyfish are shown. Reference data (I picture data) PD60 corresponding to an image to which a certain moving target character CH9 is added is set. Further, as shown in FIGS. 52 (b-2) and 52 (b-3), difference data (P picture) corresponding to an image in which the movement target character CH9 moves in a predetermined direction, although the background image PC17 is not provided. Data, B picture data) PD61 and PD62 are set. The reference data PD60 creates still image data for one frame, and by applying the difference data PD61 and PD62 to the reference data PD60, each difference data PD61 is applied to the background image PC17 set in the reference data PD60. , Still image data for one frame to which the movement target character CH9 set in PD62 is added is created.

As shown in FIG. 52 (c-1), the moving image data PD56 for B after branching has the same boy character so as to be superimposed on the background image PC18 for B after branching in which a large number of fish are shown. Reference data (I picture data) PD63 corresponding to an image to which a certain movement target character CH9 is added is set. Further, as shown in FIGS. 52 (c-2) and 52 (c-3), difference data (P picture) corresponding to an image in which the moving target character CH9 moves in a predetermined direction, although the background image PC18 is not provided. Data, B picture data) PD64 and PD65 are set. The reference data PD63 creates still image data for one frame, and by applying the difference data PD64 and PD65 to the reference data PD63, each difference data PD64 is applied to the background image PC18 set in the reference data PD63. , Still image data for one frame to which the movement target character CH9 set in PD65 is added is created.

Using each of the moving image data PD54 to PD56, the super reach display corresponding to the effect branching is executed. Specifically, when the super reach display is started, the pre-branch effect is executed by each still image data created from the pre-branch moving image data PD54.

After that, when the branch timing is reached, either the post-branch A effect or the post-branch B effect is selected. In this selection, when the effect operation device 48 is operated at the determination timing before the branch timing, the effect for A after branching is selected, and the effect operation device 48 is not operated at the determination timing. After branching to, the effect for B is selected. When the post-branch A effect is selected, the post-branch A effect is executed by each still image data created from the post-branch A moving image data PD55. On the other hand, when the post-branch B effect is selected, the post-branch B effect is executed by each still image data created from the post-branch B moving image data PD56.

The specific trigger for selecting either the post-branch A effect or the post-branch B effect is not limited to the above, and the effect operation device 48 may perform the effect operation mode in a specific operation mode at the above determination timing. When it is operated, when the effect operation device 48 is operated a specific number of times or for a specific period at the above determination timing, or from the start of the current super reach display to the branch timing. When one or more game balls are inserted in the ball entry portion, one of the effects may be selected.

A specific processing configuration for performing super reach display using the moving image data PD54 to PD56 will be described.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for moving images executed by the display CPU 72. The arithmetic processing for moving images is executed in the background arithmetic processing in step S615 in the task processing (FIG. 15). The arithmetic processing for the moving image is started when the data table corresponding to the game times in which the super reach display is performed is set.

First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not it is after the branch timing based on the currently set data table. If the timing is before the branch, in step S2902, it is determined whether or not the pre-branch effect is being executed based on the currently set data table.

If the pre-branch effect is not being executed, it means that the timing is earlier than the start timing of the super reach display, so the process proceeds to step S2903. In step S2903, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to decode the moving image data PD54 for pre-branching based on the currently set data table.

When it is time to decode the moving image data PD54 before branching, various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table in step S2904. Specifically, the address to which the pre-branch video data PD54 is pre-transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 and the pre-branch video data PD54 are decoded to obtain still image data for a plurality of frames. When created, the address of the area in which the still image data is stored in the change area 81b is grasped.

After that, in step S2905, the decoding designation information for before branching is stored. Incidentally, the timing of determination in step S2903 is set so that the decoding of the pre-branch moving image data PD54 is completed by the time the pre-branch effect is started.

When a negative determination is made in step S2903, or after the execution of step S2905, the arithmetic processing corresponding to the timing before the pre-branch effect occurs is executed in step S2906. Specifically, based on the currently set data table, the image data for the background is grasped, and various parameters of the image data are calculated to update the control information. After that, this arithmetic processing is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for the moving image is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the image data for the background in the image corresponding to the timing before the pre-branch effect occurs is drawn. A drawing list containing as is created and sent to the VDP76. Further, when the arithmetic processing this time is the timing to specify the decoding of the moving image data PD54 for pre-branching, the decoding designation information indicating that the decoding should be performed and the above-mentioned related to the moving image data PD54 for pre-branching. Information of various addresses is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S2902 that the pre-branch effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S2907. In step S2907, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to decode the moving image data PD55 and PD56 for post-branching based on the currently set data table.

When it is time to decode the moving image data PD55 and PD56 for post-branching, it is determined in step S2908 whether or not the decoding target is the moving image data PD55 for post-branching A. Specifically, a key for determining whether or not the effect operation device 48 has been operated at the determination timing prior to the branch timing is set in the data table, and when the key is confirmed, the key is set. Determines whether or not a flag indicating that the effect operating device 48 has been operated is set in the work RAM 73. Incidentally, when the reception of the operation occurrence command is confirmed in step S402 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 11) of the display CPU 72, the flag is set in the command correspondence process in step S403. In step S2908, an affirmative determination is made when a flag indicating that the effect operating device 48 has been operated is set, and a negative determination is made when the flag is not set.

When the decoding target is the moving image data PD55 for A after branching (step S2908: YES), various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table in step S2909. Specifically, the address to which the moving image data PD55 for A after branching is pre-transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 and the moving image data PD55 for A after branching are decoded to obtain still images for a plurality of frames. When the data is created, the address of the area in which the still image data is stored in the expansion buffer 81 is grasped. After that, in step S2910, the decoding designation information for A after branching is stored.

On the other hand, when the decoding target is the moving image data PD56 for B after branching (step S2908: NO), various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table in step S2911. Specifically, the address to which the moving image data PD56 for B after branching is pre-transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 and the moving image data PD56 for B after branching are decoded to obtain still images for a plurality of frames. When the data is created, the address of the area in which the still image data is stored in the expansion buffer 81 is grasped. After that, in step S2912, the decoding designation information for A after branching is stored.

Incidentally, the timing of determination in step S2907 is set so that the decoding of the target post-branch moving image data PD55 and PD56 is completed by the time any of the post-branch effects is started.

If a negative determination is made in step S2907, or after the execution of step S2910 or step S2912, the process proceeds to step S2913. In step S2913, among the still image data created from the moving image data before branching, the address where the still image data corresponding to the current frame number is stored is grasped. This address is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S2914, the parameters of the still image data are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the area secured corresponding to the still image data in the work RAM 73 to update the control information. do. After that, in step S2915, after storing the moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the moving image data is used, this calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for the moving image is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the still image data created from the moving image data before branching is included as a drawing target, and the drawing list output process (step S408) includes the still image data. A drawing list in which the parameters of the still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76. Further, when the arithmetic processing this time is the timing to specify the decoding of the moving image data PD55 for the post-branch A, the decoding designation information indicating that the decoding should be performed and the moving image data PD55 for the post-branching A are displayed. The information of the above-mentioned various addresses is set in the drawing list. On the other hand, when the arithmetic processing this time is the timing to specify the decoding of the moving image data PD56 for B after branching, the decoding specification information indicating that the decoding should be performed and the moving image data PD56 for B after branching are displayed. The information of the above-mentioned various addresses is set in the drawing list.

Since the background image and the effect image are mixed in the still image data, it is not necessary to set the effect image separately from the still image data. Therefore, when the still image data is set as the drawing target, the effect calculation process in step S616 is skipped. However, since the symbol is displayed separately from the still image data, the symbol arithmetic processing is not skipped. Therefore, when the still image data is set in the drawing list, the image data for the design is also set in the drawing list. This is the same in other cases where the still image data is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S2901 that it is after the branch timing, the process proceeds to step S2916. In step S2916, it is determined whether or not the effect to be executed is the post-branch A effect based on the currently set data table. By the way, when the affirmative judgment is made in step S2908, the data corresponding to the post-branch A effect is set as the data to be referred to after the branch in the data table, and when the negative judgment is made, in the data table. As the data to be referred to after branching, the data corresponding to the post-branch B effect is set.

If the effect to be executed is the effect for A after branching, the process proceeds to step S2917. In step S2917, among the still image data created from the moving image data for A after branching, the address where the still image data corresponding to the current frame number is stored is grasped. This address is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S2918, the parameters of the still image data are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the area secured corresponding to the still image data in the work RAM 73 to update the control information. do. After that, in step S2919, this calculation process ends after storing the moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the moving image data is used.

When the arithmetic processing for the moving image is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the still image data created from the moving image data for A after branching is included as a drawing target, and the drawing list is included. A drawing list in which the parameters of the still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

If the effect to be executed is the effect for B after branching, the process proceeds to step S2920. In step S2920, among the still image data created from the moving image data for B after branching, the address where the still image data corresponding to the current frame number is stored is grasped. This address is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S2921, the parameters of the still image data are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the area secured corresponding to the still image data in the work RAM 73 to update the control information. do. After that, in step S2922, after storing the moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the moving image data is used, this calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for the moving image is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the still image data created from the moving image data for B after branching is included as a drawing target, and the drawing list is included. A drawing list in which the parameters of the still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

Next, the decoding process executed by the moving image decoder 93 of the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54 (a). The decoding process is started when any of the decoding designation information is set in the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72. Further, the decoding process is started asynchronously with the drawing process (FIG. 13) executed by the control unit 91 of the VDP 76 and the output process (FIG. 49) executed by the display circuit 94.

First, in step S3001, the address of the moving image data designated this time is grasped from the information of the transfer destination address designated in the drawing list. In the following step S3002, the area of the expansion destination of the moving image data is grasped from the information of the expansion destination address specified in the drawing list.

In the following step S3003, the moving image data is read from the address grasped in step S3001 and the moving image data is decoded. Then, each still image data of the decoding result is written in each area of the address grasped in step S3002. After that, the present decoding process is terminated.

Next, the setting process for moving images executed by VDP76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54 (b).

The setting process for moving images is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, when the moving image designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the moving image is executed. Here, in the drawing list, the moving image designation information is set in association with the still image data to be drawn, so that the setting process for the moving image is the drawing order of the still image data in the drawing list this time. It is started when it becomes.

In the drawing order in the drawing list, the still image data is set in the order prior to the image data for the symbol. Therefore, after the setting process for the moving image is executed and the still image data is drawn. , The pattern is drawn.

First, in step S3101, the information of the address where the still image data to be set this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list. In the following step S3102, the still image data to be drawn this time is grasped from the address information grasped in step S3101. In the following step S3103, the parameters of the still image data are grasped from the information set in the drawing list. After that, this setting process ends.

By executing the setting process for moving images as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), still image data with parameters applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. Is drawn. In addition, since the image data for the symbol is also set in the drawing list this time, the image data for the symbol is drawn so that the symbol is displayed in front of the still image corresponding to the still image data. .. Then, by outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, an image for one frame constituting the super reach display is displayed on the display screen G.

As described above, since a series of images corresponding to the super reach display are displayed using the moving image data PD54 to PD56, the images for each frame of the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are individually used as still image data. Compared to the configuration for storing images, the above-mentioned super reach display is produced by using live images and high-definition images while suppressing the storage capacity required for storing image data in the NAND flash memory 102. be able to.

Further, in the super reach display, the pre-branch effect is performed until the branch timing, and after the branch timing, the content of the effect of the progress destination is switched according to the operation mode to the effect operation device 48. As a result, it is possible to prevent the super reach display from becoming uniform, and it is possible to provide various effects.

In this case, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are the moving image data PD54 for pre-branching corresponding to the pre-branching effect, the moving image data PD55 for post-branching A corresponding to the post-branching A effect, and the post-branching B. It is set separately from the moving image data PD56 for B after branching corresponding to the effect. Therefore, until the branch timing, each still image data created by decoding the moving image data PD54 before branching is sequentially drawn in the frame order set in the moving image data PD54 to branch. Pre-production can be performed. Further, after the branch timing, each still image data created by decoding the side corresponding to the execution target among the moving image data PD55 and PD56 for both branching is set in the moving image data PD55 and PD56. By simply drawing in the order of the frames, the target post-branch effect can be performed.

When decoding from moving image data to create still image data for multiple frames, it is necessary to draw each still image data in the frame order set in the moving image data, so a single still image data is required. It is difficult to deal with the above branching in moving image data. Further, both the single moving image data in which the pre-branch effect and the post-branch A effect are set and the single moving image data in which the pre-branch effect and the post-branch B effect are set are prepared in advance. A configuration is also conceivable. However, since it is necessary to output the moving image data from the still image data corresponding to the frames in the first order, it is difficult to output the still image data from the frames in the middle order. Then, when the super reach display is started, it becomes necessary to decode both of the moving image data. In this case, there is a concern that the processing load of the VDP 76 will increase, and it will be necessary to increase the storage capacity of the VRAM 75. By separately preparing the moving image data PD54 to PD56 as described above in comparison with each of these assumed configurations, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 to be used can be switched according to the situation up to the branch timing. Therefore, the above-mentioned super reach display can be preferably executed.

Further, when the super reach display is started, decoding is performed on the moving image data PD54 for pre-branching, and the moving image data PD55 for post-branching A and the moving image data PD56 for post-branching B are subjected to decoding. Do not decode. As a result, the processing load when starting the super reach display can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the full motion image data PD54 to PD56 are collectively decoded.

Further, the determination as to which of the post-branch A effect and the post-branch B effect is to be distributed is performed during the execution of the pre-branch effect and before the branch timing, and before the branch timing is reached, after the branch. Of the moving image data PD55 for A and the moving image data PD56 for B after branching, only the moving image data corresponding to the effect of the distribution destination is decoded. As a result, it is possible to smoothly start a new moving image display after the completion of the pre-branch effect. Further, as compared with the configuration in which the bipolar image data for after branching is decoded, the processing load related to decoding can be suppressed, and the storage capacity required for decoding in the VRAM 75 can be reduced.

Even if the configuration of distinguishing and storing the moving image data PD54 to PD56 as described above is applied to an effect different from the effect in which the effect of the progress destination is arbitrarily selected according to the situation up to the branch timing. good. For example, in a configuration in which a first effect (first reach display) and a second effect (second reach display) are set, which are common from the start timing to the middle and different modes from the middle. The configuration may include a first moving image data for displaying an image from the start to the middle, and a second moving image data and a third moving image data corresponding to the mode from the middle. In this case, since the first moving image data can be used in common, the total data capacity can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the moving image data for the entire amount is individually provided for each effect.

Further, for example, as a display effect, when only the normal reach display is performed, when the first super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed, and when the normal reach display is performed, the second super reach display is performed. In the configuration in which the case is set, the moving image data for the normal reach display, the moving image data for the first super reach display, and the moving image data for the second super reach display are set. It may be configured. In this case, in the game times in which the normal reach display is performed, the still image data created from the moving image data for the normal reach display may be sequentially displayed. Further, in the game round in which the first super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed, the still image data created from the moving image data for the normal reach display is sequentially displayed, and then the moving image for the first super reach display is displayed in sequence. Still image data created from the data may be displayed in sequence. Further, in the game round in which the second super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed, the still image data created from the moving image data for the normal reach display is sequentially displayed, and then the moving image for the second super reach display is displayed in sequence. Still image data created from the data may be displayed in sequence.

According to this configuration, the moving image data for the normal reach display may be used in common in each of the game times in which the first super reach display is performed and the game times in which the second super reach display is performed. Compared with the configuration in which the contents of the normal reach display are included in each of the moving image data of the super reach display and the moving image data of the second super reach display, the total data capacity can be suppressed.

Further, as the display effect, the effect for A after branching may be set without going through the effect for before branching, and the effect for B after branching may be performed without going through the effect for before branching. May be set. Even in the configuration in which these display effects are set, the moving image data PD55 for post-branching A is set separately from the moving image data PD54 for pre-branching, and similarly, the moving image for pre-branching is set. Since the moving image data PD56 for B after branching is set separately from the image data PD54, the production can be started in the unit of the production for A after branching, and the production can be performed in the unit of the production for B after branching. You can start.

Further, as described above, a configuration in which I-picture data, which is reference data, exists for each predetermined effect period may be applied to a series of effects in which branching does not occur. For example, when a series of productions for the whole is started, in a configuration in which a series of moving images are displayed over the production period for the whole, the first production corresponding to the front side of the production period for the whole. The first moving image data and the second moving image data may be individually set for the period and the second effect period corresponding to the posterior side of the period. In this case, by using the first moving image data and the second moving image data, a series of effects for the whole can be performed, and the second effect period can be performed without going through the first effect period. It becomes possible to perform the production. By the way, in the above-mentioned series of effects for the whole, a predetermined character may operate in front of a predetermined background. In this case, the I picture is used in both the first moving image data and the second moving image data. A predetermined background image is set in the data.

Further, the mode after the pre-branch effect or the common effect is not limited to two patterns, and may be three patterns, four patterns, or five or more patterns. In this case, the effect of having the moving image data PD54 to PD56 individually as described above is further enhanced.

Further, the moving image decoder 93 may be configured to execute a process corresponding to the decoding process (FIG. 54 (a)) only by the operation of the hard circuit without using a program. Further, the moving image decoder 93 may not be built in the VDP 76, but may be provided separately from the VDP 76. In this case, the moving image decoder 93 may be provided on the signal path between the VDP 76 and the symbol display device 31, and a signal path is provided between the VRAM 75 and the symbol display device 31 separately from the signal path and the signal path thereof. A moving image decoder 93 may be provided on the top.

Further, in a configuration in which the timing for determining the effect after branching is the same as or close to the branch timing, the moving image data PD55 for post-branch A and the video data PD55 for post-branch B are used during the period when the pre-branch effect is being executed. It may be configured to decode both of the moving image data PD56.

Further, the configuration using a plurality of types of moving image data as described above may be applied not to the reach effect but to the jackpot effect and the advance notice effect before the reach.

<Structure related to drawing the ground color and configuration related to switching the ground color>
Next, a configuration related to drawing the ground color and a configuration related to switching the ground color will be described.

The ground color is a color that is initially set as a color displayed on the entire display screen G. Specifically, initial numerical information that is set as an initial value in the unit area of each frame area 82a, 82b of the VRAM 75. It is a color corresponding to.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of display modes in which the display modes of the display screen G are different from each other are set. The display mode is a state in which the type of the standby image displayed until the game round is started and the type of the game round image displayed in the situation where the game round is being executed are set to a predetermined type. A first display mode and a second display mode are set as a plurality of types of display modes.

The display mode of the background image displayed on the display screen G, the character displayed at the time of production, and the like are different between the first display mode and the second display mode. The background image is displayed on the entire display screen G. Specifically, the background image is set to be the same as or larger than the drawing range PL2 (see FIG. 14), and is a still image on which detailed illustrations and the like are drawn. It is composed of a rearmost image, and an individual background image displayed on the front side of the rearmost image. The rearmost image is set so that the underlying color is different between the first display mode and the second display mode. Specifically, the base color of the rearmost image in the first display mode is set to "blue", and the base color of the rearmost image in the second display mode is set to "white". ..

Here, in the initial state at the time of turning on the power or resetting, the display mode is set to the first display mode, and the ground color is set to "blue" corresponding to the rearmost image of the first display mode. As a result, by displaying the ground color when the power is turned on, it is possible to perform an inspection for confirming whether or not there are missing dots on the display screen G.

In addition, the display mode is switched in a predetermined case. Examples of the predetermined case include a case where the operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is operated in a situation where the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed, a case where a specific effect is performed, and the like. When the display mode is switched, the ground color is also set to be switched as the display mode is switched.

The specific processing configuration of the background color switching accompanying the drawing and display mode switching using the ground color as the background will be described below.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart for executing the operation occurrence command corresponding process executed by the display CPU 72. The operation occurrence command correspondence process is executed in the command correspondence process of step S403 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not an operation generation command for mode switching is received from the voice emission control device 60. If it has not been received, the process corresponding to this operation command is terminated as it is, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S3202.

In step S3202, the counter for the display mode is updated. The counter for the display mode is a counter for specifying the current display mode by the display CPU 72, and is provided in the work RAM 73. The counter value for the display mode is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. In the present embodiment, two types of display modes, a first display mode and a second display mode, are set. Therefore, as the counter value, a value of "0" corresponding to the first display mode and a second display mode are supported. The value of "1" is set.

Here, in the initial setting process of the display mode in step S308 of the initial setting process (FIG. 10), since the initial value of the counter for the display mode is set to "0", the supply of operating power to the display CPU 72 is started. In this case, or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the display mode is set to the first display mode.

After that, in step S3203, a ground color switching process for switching the ground color to a color corresponding to the display mode is executed. Specifically, the initial numerical information stored in the ground color adjustment area in the register 92 of the VDP 76 is updated to the color information corresponding to the display mode switched this time. That is, the display mode is specified by referring to the counter for the display mode updated in the previous step S3202, and if the specific result is the first display mode, the initial numerical information is set to the "blue" color information. do. On the other hand, if the specific result is the second display mode, the initial numerical information is set to the "white" color information. Then, the processing corresponding to this operation occurrence command is terminated.

Here, in the initial adjustment process of the ground color in step S309 of the initial setting process (FIG. 10), the color information of "blue" is set as the initial numerical information, so that when the supply of the operating power to the VDP 76 is started. Or, when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the ground color is set to "blue".

Next, the arithmetic processing for the display mode background executed by the display CPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56. The calculation process for the display mode background is executed in the background calculation process in step S615 in the task process (FIG. 15).

First, in step S3301, the counter for the display mode provided in the work RAM 73 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the work RAM 73 is in the first display mode. In the first display mode, it is determined in step S3301 whether or not to draw the rearmost image. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the drawing process of the rearmost image is set in the currently set data table.

Here, among the data tables, the data table having a large processing load does not include the drawing process of the rearmost image. A data table with a large processing load is a drawing list including background data corresponding to the rearmost image because a large number of image data to be drawn are set in an image for one frame. Is a data table that can affect the operation of the display CPU 72 even if the display CPU 72 fails or does not drop the process. Whether or not the processing load is large, that is, whether or not the drawing process of the rearmost image is included in the data table is determined and set in advance at the development stage of creating the data table. Further, depending on the data table, the rearmost image may not be set over the entire frame, or the rearmost image may not be partially set over a plurality of frames having a relatively large processing load. be. That is, when focusing on the frame unit (image update timing unit), the first frame (the first frame) in which a plurality of types of individual images including the rearmost image are set as drawing targets for one frame in the data table. The drawing process of the rearmost image is not set in the second frame (second update timing) in which the processing load related to the display of the individual images excluding the rearmost image is larger than that of the first update timing). It can be said that.

When it is determined that the drawing process of the rearmost image is set, the process proceeds to step S3303, and the first rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data tail. In the following step S3304, various parameters of the grasped first rearmost image are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the area secured corresponding to the rearmost image in the work RAM 73 for control. Update the information for. Then, the process proceeds to step S3305.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the rearmost image is not drawn, that is, the drawing process of the rearmost image is not set, the process proceeds to step S3305 without executing the processes of steps S3303 and S3304.

In step S3305, the sprite data to be updated for the background corresponding to the first display mode is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S3306, various parameters of the grasped sprite data are calculated to update the control information.

In the second display mode, the negative determination in step S3301 is made, and the process proceeds to step S3307. In step S3307, it is determined whether or not to draw the rearmost image. If it is determined that the rearmost image is not drawn, the process proceeds to step S3310, while if it is determined that the rearmost image is to be drawn, the process proceeds to step S3308, and the update target is this time based on the currently set data table. Grasp the second rearmost image of. In the following step S3309, various parameters of the grasped second rearmost image are calculated to update the control information. Then, the process proceeds to step S3310.

In step S3310, the sprite data to be updated for the background corresponding to the second display mode is grasped. Then, in step S3311, various parameters of the grasped background sprite data are calculated to update the control information.

After executing the process of step S3306 or step S3311, the process proceeds to step S3312, the process of storing the background designation information is executed, and the present calculation process is completed.

After executing the above-mentioned background calculation process, the effect calculation process (step S616 in FIG. 15) and the symbol calculation process (step S617 in FIG. 15) are executed. Then, a drawing list is created in the drawing list output process (step S408).

Here, the drawing list of FIG. 57 will be described in the drawing list when it is determined that the rearmost image is not drawn, that is, the drawing list created based on the data table in which the drawing process of the rearmost image is not set. As shown in the explanatory diagram, the background data corresponding to the rearmost image is not set, and only the sprite data is set. Based on the drawing list, the content grasping process shown in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13) is executed, and the writing process is executed in step S505 based on the grasping result of the process.

The writing process in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start creating drawing data. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start writing the image data first set in the drawing list. If it is not the creation start timing, it means that the drawing data is being created. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3404, while when the creation start timing is reached, the process proceeds to step S3402.

In step S3402 and step S3403, a process of initializing the frame areas 82a and 82b set as creation targets is executed. Specifically, the ground color is grasped in step S3402. Specifically, the area in which the initial numerical information of the register 92 is stored is accessed to grasp the initial numerical information at the present time. Since the initial numerical information is stored in the register 92, it is not necessary to execute the read process from the memory or the like. As a result, the access speed is higher than that of the configuration in which the reading process from the memory or the like is performed.

After that, in step S3403, the unit area of the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation target is initially set. Specifically, the numerical information of all the unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation target is updated to the initial numerical information grasped in step S3402. As a result, all the numerical information of the unit area is once set as the initial numerical information, so that the stored numerical information related to the previous drawing data is deleted. Then, the process proceeds to step S3404.

In step S3404, the image data writing process is executed. Specifically, the image data is written based on the grasping result of the content grasping process (FIG. 13) in step S504. Specifically, the numerical information of the unit area of the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation target is sequentially updated from the initial numerical information to the numerical information corresponding to the grasping result. The writing process of the image data is repeatedly executed until the writing of all the sprite data set in the drawing list is completed. Here, when the background data is not set in the drawing list, the numerical information of the unit area of the place where the sprite data is set in the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation target is updated, while the sprite data is updated. The numerical information of the unit area where is not set is not updated, and the initial numerical information is maintained.

The image displayed on the display screen G when the rearmost image is not drawn will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image displayed on the display screen G when the rearmost image is drawn, and FIG. 59 (b) is an explanatory diagram on the display screen G when the rearmost image is not drawn. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the displayed image. For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the first display mode is used. In this case, the ground color is set to "blue".

When the background data is set in the drawing list, the numerical information of each unit area is updated from the initial numerical information to the numerical information corresponding to the background data in the background data writing process. After that, the numerical information of the unit area of the place where the sprite data is set is sequentially updated from the numerical information corresponding to the background data to the numerical information corresponding to the sprite data. As a result, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the rearmost image PPC0 corresponding to the background data in the first display mode is displayed in the entire display screen G, and the first display is displayed on the front side of the rearmost image PPC0. The individual images PPC1 to PPC4 corresponding to the sprite data of the mode are displayed.

On the other hand, when the background data is not set in the drawing list, the numerical information of the unit area in the place where the sprite data is not set remains the initial numerical information, so the ground color is displayed in the place corresponding to the unit area. Will be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the individual images PPC5 to PPC13 corresponding to the sprite data in the first display mode are displayed with the ground color as the background. In this case, as compared with FIG. 59 (a), the illustration or the like drawn on the rearmost image PPC0 is not displayed, but the displayed ground color and the keynote of the rearmost image PPC0 in the first display mode. Since the colors are the same, the difference between the two is less noticeable. In the second display mode, the ground color is set to "white", which is the base color of the rearmost image in the second display mode, so that the rearmost image is the same as in the first display mode. The difference between the images on the display screen is less noticeable depending on whether the image is displayed or not.

Here, in order to diversify the display mode such as the effect effect, it is preferable that a large number of sprite data are drawn. In this case, the processing load required to create the entire drawing list becomes large, and there is a concern that the processing of the display CPU 72 may be dropped. In particular, it is necessary to update the image at a cycle of 20 msec, and the image is updated by sending a drawing list created based on the processing result of the task processing to the VDP76, and further, one frame based on the drawing list received by the VDP76. This is done by creating drawing data corresponding to the minute image and outputting the drawing data to the display screen G as an image. Then, the task process for creating the drawing list creates drawing data corresponding to one frame of the image based on the drawing list for a period required for the drawing list to be created and received by the VDP76 for 20 msec. And it needs to be completed in a shorter period than the period after deducting the period required for transmission.

In addition, when a plurality of display modes are set and the image data used for each display mode is different, it is necessary to perform the display mode grasping process currently set in the calculation process, which increases the processing load of the task process. Is a concern.

Further, as the number of sprite data to be drawn increases, the processing load required to create the drawing data in the VDP 76 increases, so that the period required to create the drawing data increases. Then, the processing period of the display CPU 72 is shortened, and the processing is likely to be dropped.

On the other hand, according to this configuration, when the processing load is large, the processing load can be reduced by not drawing the rearmost image PPC0. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned processing omission. In this case, since the ground color functions as the background, the individual images are not reflected twice.

That is, since the initial numerical information is set for each unit area of the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, and then the writing is performed for each unit area based on the drawing list, the initial numerical information is supported. Individual images are displayed with the image as the background. In such a configuration, by not setting the background data corresponding to the rearmost image PPC0 in the drawing list, it is possible to display the ground color in the display area of the rearmost image PPC0. As a result, the processing load required to set the background data in the drawing list can be reduced. Further, it is not necessary to perform any special processing in the drawing process, and it is not necessary to perform a process of grasping the display area of the rearmost image PPC0. Therefore, the processing load can be suitably reduced.

Further, the base color of the rearmost image PPC0 and the ground color set in the first display mode are set to be the same. As a result, it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort when switching from the state in which the rearmost image PPC0 is displayed to the state in which the ground color is displayed. That is, based on the change in the display mode, the initial numerical information set in the register 92 is switched to a value corresponding to the same color as the rearmost image PPC0, and the image corresponding to the changed initial numerical information is the background. It will be displayed as an image.

Further, when the processing load is large, it means that the number of individual images to be displayed is large. In this case, since a large number of individual images are displayed on the display screen G, the ratio of the rearmost image PPC0 to the area of the display screen G tends to be small. As a result, the switching from the state in which the rearmost image PPC0 is displayed to the state in which the ground color is displayed is inconspicuous.

Further, in an image having a large processing load when drawing, data for performing a special effect such as an effect effect and a partially enlarged display is often set. For this reason, the player is attracted to the above-mentioned special production, and it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the background. Therefore, even when the ground color is set, it is unlikely that the player feels uncomfortable.

In particular, when performing a special effect, in order to obtain a visual effect attracted to the special effect portion, it may be set so as not to stand out except for the special effect portion. Specifically, the contrast of the rearmost image PPC0 may be suppressed more than that of the effect portion. In this case, the difference between light and dark in the rearmost image PPC0 becomes small, and the rearmost image PPC0 can easily be seen as a single color. Therefore, even when the rearmost image PPC0 is expressed in the ground color in a situation where a special effect is performed, it is unlikely that the player feels uncomfortable.

Incidentally, as a configuration for initializing the frame areas 82a and 82b, a process of reading the image data corresponding to the initialization image displayed on the entire display screen G from the memory module 74 and writing the image data can be considered. However, in this case, since it is necessary to perform extra processing such as adding image data corresponding to the initialization image to the drawing list, there is a concern that the processing load will increase. However, it is difficult to store the image data corresponding to the initialization image in the register 92 in advance from the viewpoint of the storage capacity of the register 92.

On the other hand, in this configuration, the initial numerical information is temporarily stored in the register 92, and the initial numerical information is set in each unit area of the frame areas 82a and 82b to initialize the frame areas 82a and 82b. Therefore, both the effects of reducing the processing load and reducing the storage capacity of the register 92 can be obtained. Further, the ground color can be easily changed by changing the initial numerical information stored in the register 92.

When the power supply to the register 92 is cut off, the information stored in the register 92 is not retained, so that the initial numerical information is undefined. In such a situation, when the game is started, not only the background color is not preferably displayed, but also the individual images may not be preferably displayed. On the other hand, in this configuration, since the initial setting of the initial numerical information is performed in the initial setting process, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that may occur by holding the initial numerical information in the register 92.

Next, a specific processing configuration for inspection of the display screen G using the ground color will be described below.

In this pachinko machine, the ground color is displayed before the initial image is displayed in the initial setting process. Specifically, the ground color display process is executed in step S310 in the initial setting process (FIG. 10).

In the ground color display process, a drawing list for ground color display is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76. The drawing list for displaying the ground color is an empty drawing list in which the image data to be drawn is not set.

When the drawing list for displaying the ground color is received by the VDP76, the VDP76 executes a process of creating drawing data based on the drawing list, specifically, the processes of steps S502 to S505. Here, since the image data to be drawn is not set in the drawing list for displaying the ground color, the content grasping process in step S504 proceeds to step S505 without any particular processing.

In the writing process of step S505, the process related to the display of the ground color, specifically, the processes of steps S3402 to S3403 is executed. Here, since the grasping process is not performed in the content grasping process, the process of writing the image data (step S3404) is not executed.

When the above processing is performed, drawing data of initial numerical information is created for all the numerical information of each unit area of the frame areas 82a and 82b. When the image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, the ground color is displayed on the entire display screen G. The display of the ground color is continued until the drawing list for the initial image is transmitted from the display CPU 72 and the image is updated by the VDP 76. That is, the ground color is displayed until the initial image is displayed. By displaying the ground color on the entire display screen G before the display of the initial image is started in this way, it is possible to inspect the missing dots at the stage before the game is started.

Here, when inspecting for missing dots by displaying the ground color on the entire display screen G, it is better that the ground color displayed on the display screen G at the time of inspection is the same from the viewpoint of reliability of the inspection result. preferable. However, since the ground color (initial numerical information) can be changed, the ground color at the time of inspection can change. Therefore, there is a concern that the reliability of the test results may decrease. On the other hand, by setting the ground color to be displayed on the entire display screen G after the initial setting of the initial numerical information is performed, the inspection can be performed with the ground color of the same color, which causes the above inconvenience. It can be avoided.

The initial numerical information that is initially set in the initial setting process is the color of the image corresponding to the image data excluded from the drawing list, specifically, the rearmost image of the first display mode that is also initialized in the initial setting process. It is set to be the same as the base color of PPC0. That is, since the ground color is set in the initial setting process performed before the game is started, the initial numerical information and the image to be displayed in the ground color are associated with each other in the stage before the game is started. Completed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the game is started in the situation where the above association is not performed.

The rearmost image PPC0 is an image set to be the same as or larger than the drawing range PL2, but is not limited to this, and for example, the maximum corresponding to the drawing range PL2 by synthesizing a plurality of divided images. The configuration may be such that a back image is formed. In this case, since it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load due to the compositing process, it is possible to further enhance the effect of reducing the processing load by not drawing the rearmost image.

Also, in the writing process, the unit area value is first set to the initial numerical information, and then the numerical information is updated to correspond to the current drawing list, but this is not limited to this, and the current drawing list is supported first. The configuration may be such that the process of updating to the numerical value information and then setting the initial numerical value information is executed. In this case, it is necessary to execute mask processing in order to grasp the background part.

Further, the configuration is such that the ground color is changed according to the display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when performing a specific effect, the background color may be changed at the execution timing of the effect. In this case, it may be changed according to the color of the rearmost image during a specific effect. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect with a large processing load while ensuring a state in which the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable.

The timing of changing the ground color is not limited to the execution timing of a specific effect, and may be, for example, the case of shifting to the open / close execution mode. That is, the background color may be changed according to the game state.

The base color of the rearmost image may be different between the first display mode and the second display mode, and the specific color is arbitrary. However, paying attention to the fact that the missing dot inspection can be preferably performed, the rearmost image in the default display mode (first display mode) is an image based on a color other than "black". It is preferable to set it.

Further, the background color is initially set in correspondence with the color of the rearmost image in the display mode that is initially set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ground color may be set to another color. In this case, it is advisable to separately perform a process of changing the ground color to a color corresponding to the display mode in the V interrupt process or the like.

Although the background color is used as the background, the application target of the background color is not limited to the background. For example, when a shadow is formed on an individual image, the shadow part may be expressed by the background color. good.

A single color image called the ground color is used as the rearmost image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any image that is smaller than the processing load required for displaying the rearmost image may be used. However, the configuration using the ground color is superior from the viewpoint of processing load and storage capacity.

The background color is set to be the same as the base color of the rearmost image PPC0, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the background color may be set to substantially the same or similar color. In short, it is preferable to use a color similar to the base color of the rearmost image PPC0 so as not to give a sense of discomfort when switching from the display of the rearmost image PPC0 to the display of the ground color.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Due to its specifications, the NAND flash memory 102 provided in the display control device 70 has a slower data transfer rate than the NOR flash memory. On the other hand, since the boot data for initial startup is stored in advance in the boot memory 119, which requires a faster read speed than the NAND flash memory 102, the supply of operating power to the display CPU 72 is started. In this case, or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the display CPU 72 can promptly start the initial startup process. Therefore, the control in the display CPU 72 can be started smoothly as compared with the configuration in which the program data for initial startup is stored in the NAND flash memory 102.

Further, by using a memory capable of random access such as a NOR type flash memory for the ROM 53 of the main control device 50 and using a NAND flash memory 102 for the memory module 74 of the display control device 70, the control means on the upstream side can be used. For a certain main control device 50, the configuration for reading control program data should be simplified, and for the display control device 70, which is a control means on the downstream side, the configuration should emphasize the increase in the capacity of data that can be stored in advance. Can be done.

As described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16, in the display CPU 72, the display CPU 72 is not included in the display target on the display screen G in a predetermined frame, but may be included in the display target on the display screen G in the subsequent frames. Control start processing for parameter derivation is performed in advance for the image data corresponding to the individual image having the property. As a result, it is possible to disperse the control start timing so that a large number of individual images to be controlled start do not exist in one processing time, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing omissions.

As described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, scrolling background data including data for a plurality of frames is stored in advance as a plurality of divided part data, so that the NAND flash memory 102 can be used as a single image data. There is no need to set the memorable size too large. Also, if you try to transfer the background data for scrolling as a single image data, the transfer time will be long, but since it can be transferred in units of divided parts data, the timing of data transfer can be adjusted. It will be easy.

As described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, when displaying an animation that displaces a small unit group, a plurality of small unit images are collectively set instead of controlling each small unit group as an individual sprite. It is a configuration that controls so as to sequentially switch the still images. As a result, the displacement background image of the small unit group can be displayed while suppressing the processing load on the display CPU 72.

As described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26, when the effect data PD17 is set in the frame areas 82a and 82b, the addition process is executed. As a result, the effect image CH2 corresponding to the effect data PD17 is displayed in a state in which the color information and the degree of brightness of the image (for example, the background image) on which the effect image CH2 is superimposed are reflected. Since the effect image CH2 is an image that transmits objects on the back side such as light and water droplets, a sense of incongruity occurs when the effect image CH2 is displayed regardless of the background image. On the other hand, when the addition process is executed, the effect image CH2 is displayed in a state where the background image is reflected, which is preferable in appearance without causing the above-mentioned discomfort.

As described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29, in the unit area where the effect data PD18 is drawn, the numerical information already stored there is reduced by the ratio of the α value of the partial addition data PD19. The numerical information as a result of adding the numerical information of the effect data PD18 to the numerical information after being performed is set. As a result, after drawing the effect data PD18, it is possible to prevent each numerical information of RGB in the unit area of the frame areas 82a and 82b from becoming the maximum value, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overexposure.

As described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, composite data for displaying a plurality of effect images at the same time is created, and the composite data is used for subsequent use. As a result, the processing load of the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which a plurality of effect data are drawn each time the execution timing of the plurality of effect effects is reached.

As described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 37, partial display of individual images such as symbols and characters is performed using α data and α palette data. As a result, it is possible to partially display individual images in a configuration in which VDP76 cannot partially handle image data. Further, the data capacity of these α data and α palette data is smaller than that of the image data. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which the image data for the entire display and the image data for the partial display are individually prepared for the individual image to be partially displayed, the increase in the storage capacity required for storing the image data is suppressed. , Partial display of individual images can be performed.

As described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42, the background image switching mode is made novel by gradually switching the background image over a plurality of frames while performing the wipe switching effect. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the switching mode of the background image. In this case, since the image data PD39 to PD42 constituting the image of the front display timing are linked, and the α data PD46 and PD47 for the wipe switching effect are combined with the linked image data. The processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the α data for the wipe switching effect is individually synthesized for each of the image data PD39 to PD42.

As described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45, as image data for displaying the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, the first sprite data having a relationship of being deviated from each other by half a dot in the moving direction of the sprite CH5. PD48 and the second sprite data PD49 are stored. Then, the sprite data PD48 and PD49 are used alternately. As a result, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement can be displayed for each frame as if it is progressing by half a dot with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b or by a corresponding amount with respect to the display screen G. The sprite CH5 can be smoothly moved and displayed.

As described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50, the zoom-in effect can be performed by using the scaler 97, and the zoom-out effect can be performed by returning the zoomed-in state to the initial state. .. For example, when drawing in the frame areas 82a and 82b, each image data can be drawn in an enlarged state to similarly perform a zoom-in effect. In this case, all the image data to be drawn in the VDP 76 are enlarged. It becomes necessary to execute the processing, and the processing load of the VDP 76 becomes large. Further, for example, a configuration in which the image data for the normal size and the image data for the enlarged size are set in advance for the same image can be considered, but in this case, it is necessary to store the image data. It causes an increase in storage capacity. On the other hand, by performing the zoom-in effect using the scaler 97, the process for enlarging and displaying the image is performed not by the control unit 91 of the VDP 76 but by the display circuit 94. Therefore, the zoom-in effect and the zoom-out effect can be performed while suppressing the influence on the processing load of the control unit 91 and the influence on the storage capacity required for storing the image data.

As described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are the moving image data PD54 for pre-branching corresponding to the pre-branching effect and the moving image data PD54 for post-branching A corresponding to the post-branching A effect. The moving image data PD55 and the moving image data PD56 for the post-branch B corresponding to the post-branch B effect are set separately. Therefore, until the branch timing, each still image data created by decoding the moving image data PD54 before branching is sequentially drawn in the frame order set in the moving image data PD54 to branch. Pre-production can be performed. Further, after the branch timing, each still image data created by decoding the side corresponding to the execution target among the moving image data PD55 and PD56 for both branching is set in the moving image data PD55 and PD56. By simply drawing in the order of the frames, the target post-branch effect can be performed.

When decoding from moving image data to create still image data for multiple frames, it is necessary to draw each still image data in the frame order set in the moving image data, so a single still image data is required. It is difficult to deal with the above branching in moving image data. Further, both the single moving image data in which the pre-branch effect and the post-branch A effect are set and the single moving image data in which the pre-branch effect and the post-branch B effect are set are prepared in advance. A configuration is also conceivable. However, since it is necessary to output the moving image data from the still image data corresponding to the frames in the first order, it is difficult to output the still image data from the frames in the middle order. Then, when the super reach display is started, it becomes necessary to decode both of the moving image data. In this case, there is a concern that the processing load of the VDP 76 will increase, and it will be necessary to increase the storage capacity of the VRAM 75. By separately preparing the moving image data PD54 to PD56 as described above in comparison with each of these assumed configurations, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 to be used can be switched according to the situation up to the branch timing. Therefore, the above-mentioned super reach display can be preferably executed.

As described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59, in a configuration in which initial numerical information is set in each unit area of the frame areas 82a and 82b before the process of writing drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b. A drawing list excluding the rearmost image PPC0 is created according to the content of the image. Thereby, the processing load related to the rearmost image PPC0 can be reduced. In this case, the individual image is displayed with the color corresponding to the initial numerical information input during the initialization process as the background. Therefore, by setting the initial numerical information in advance to the information corresponding to the color that is the base color of the rearmost image PPC0, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the electrical configuration is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration in this embodiment.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 60, the main control device 50 is provided as in the first embodiment. Further, the main control device 50 has a payout control device 55 that controls the payout device 56, a power supply that functions to supply electric power to each device including the main control device 50, and a power source that drives and controls the game ball launch mechanism 58. The launch control device 57, the main display unit 33 that displays the result of the game round, and the accessory display unit 34 that displays the result of the electric power opening lottery are electrically connected. Further, a voice emission control device 60 is provided to drive and control various light emitting units 35, 36, 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50 and to receive an operation signal from the effect operation device 48. Further, a display control device 130 that controls the symbol display device 31 based on a command transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 is provided.

The hardware configuration of the display control device 130 is different from that of the display control device 70 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the hardware configuration of the display control device 130 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 60, the display control device 130 includes a display control board 136 on which a display CPU 131, a work RAM 132, a memory module 133, a VRAM 134, and a video display processor (VDP) 135 are mounted. ..

The display CPU 131 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 130, and reads (fetches), interprets (decodes), and executes a control program or the like. Specifically, the display CPU 131 is connected to the input port 137 mounted on the display control board 136 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 131 through the input port 137. Will be done. Note that receiving a command from the voice emission control device 60 in the display CPU 131 is not limited to a configuration in which the command is directly received from the voice emission control device 60, and includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received. Is done.

The display CPU 131 is connected to the work RAM 132, the memory module 133, and the VRAM 134 via a bus, and various data stored in the memory module 133 are transmitted to the work RAM 132 and the VRAM 134 based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60. Give a transfer instruction to transfer. Further, the display CPU 131 is connected to the VDP 135 via a bus, and gives a drawing instruction for displaying a 3D image on the symbol display device 31 based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60. Hereinafter, the memory module 133, the work RAM 132, the VRAM 134, and the VDP 135 will be described.

The memory module 133 stores in advance control data (control information) including a control program and fixed value data, and also stores various image data (image information) for displaying a 3D image in advance. It is a means of storage. The memory module 133 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage, and in detail, a NAND flash memory is used as the semiconductor memory. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the memory module 133 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The various image data stored in the memory module 133 include image data for objects such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 31, image data for textures to be attached to the object, and one frame. In the image of, the image data for the back surface constituting the rearmost image is included.

Here, the object is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in the world coordinate system (world space), which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to the virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. Is. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of vertices having three-dimensional coordinates. For example, in order to apply a surface model to the image data for an object, the vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with the reference coordinates set in advance for each object as the origin. That is, in the image data for each object, the relative position (that is, the direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in the self-contained local coordinate system.

The texture is an image to be pasted on each polygon of the object, and when the texture is pasted on the object, an image corresponding to the object, for example, a display image including a pattern, a character, or the like is generated. The way of holding the image data for the texture is arbitrary, but includes at least a combination of, for example, bitmap format data and a color palette table referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. There is.

The rearmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image. The way of holding the image data for the back surface is arbitrary, but for example, the two-dimensional still image data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a compressed state. Incidentally, when the image data for the back surface is arranged in the world coordinate system, a plate polygon is used.

The work RAM 132 is a storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 133, and for temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 132 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storage, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the work RAM 132 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. In this case, the control data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the display CPU 131 corresponding to the control data. Then, the display CPU 131 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 132 into the internal memory area (register group) as needed, and executes various processes.

Incidentally, as the work RAM 132, a work RAM 132 having a read speed (transfer speed) faster than that of the NAND flash memory 162, which will be described later, is used when compared by reading data of the same capacity. In other words, as the work RAM 132, a work RAM 132 having a shorter reading period than the NAND flash memory 162 when compared by reading data of the same capacity is used.

The VRAM 134 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 31. The VRAM 134 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage, and in detail, SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the VRAM 134 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 134 includes a decompression buffer 141, and image data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the decompression buffer 141 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. In this case, the image data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the VDP 135 using the image data. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 135. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a Z buffer 143, a screen buffer 144, and a mode buffer 145, and details of these will be described later.

Incidentally, as the VRAM 134, a VRAM 134 having a read speed (transfer speed) faster than that of the NAND flash memory 162, which will be described later, is used when compared by reading data of the same capacity. In other words, as the VRAM 134, a VRAM 134 having a shorter reading period than the NAND flash memory 162 when compared by reading data of the same capacity is used.

The VDP 135 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 31 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the expansion buffer 141 based on the drawing instruction from the display CPU 131. This is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 31b incorporated so as to drive and control a liquid crystal display unit 31a in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP135 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 135 includes a geometry calculation unit 151, a rendering unit 152, a register 153, a display mode control unit 154, and a display circuit 155. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to the I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 and the I / F 157 for the VRAM 134.

The I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 stores the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 131 in the register 153. The geometry calculation unit 151 arranges the object designated as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after arranging the object in the world coordinate system. Finally, the object is clipped so as to correspond to the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display screen G.

The rendering unit 152 determines the appearance of each clipped object by adjusting the light source and pasting the texture based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. Further, the rendering unit 152 creates two-dimensional data by projecting each object on a predetermined two-dimensional plane, makes various adjustments based on the depth information, and stores drawing data for one frame, which is the two-dimensional data, in a frame buffer. Create in 142. The drawing data for one frame is the data required to display the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. say.

In addition, all the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be provided by the drawing list, and the memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the VDP 135, and the control program and the drawing list are provided. The geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may execute the processing depending on the contents of the above. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 133. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be configured to execute the process only by the operation of the hard circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using the program.

Here, the frame buffer 142 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 142a and 142b. Specifically, a first frame area 142a and a second frame area 142b are provided. Each of these frame areas 142a and 142b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas 142a and 142b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a (that is, the display screen G) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, a full-color method is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) at each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

The method is not limited to the full-color method. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed at each dot, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 142 is provided with the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b, in a situation where drawing to the symbol display device 31 is executed using the drawing data created in one frame area. , Creation of drawing data to be used in the future is executed for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 142.

In the display circuit 155, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 142a or the second frame area 142b, and the image signal is transmitted to the display circuit 155. It is output to the symbol display device 31 via the connected output port 138. Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 142a and 142b to the display circuit 155. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution with a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 31. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 31 is generated and output based on the gradation data. A synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal is also output from the display circuit 155.

Further, when displaying an image corresponding to the display mode, the display mode control unit 154 executes a predetermined process based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. The predetermined processing will be described later.

<Specific configuration of memory module 133>
Next, a specific configuration of the memory module 133 will be described.

FIG. 61 is a block diagram for explaining the hardware configuration of the memory module 133. As shown in FIG. 61, the memory module 133 is configured by packaging the controller 161 and the NAND flash memory 162 in one package.

The NAND flash memory 162 is provided with a memory cell array, and the memory cell array has an area 163 for a control program that stores control program data of the display CPU 131, and a symbol display device 31 for displaying an image. An area 164 for image data that stores the image data to be used is provided.

Further, the area 164 for image data includes an object storage area 165 for storing image data for objects, a texture storage area 166 for storing image data for textures, and a back image storage area for storing image data for the back surface. It is equipped with 167. Further, the object storage area 165 is provided with a concatenated object storage area 165a that stores image data for the concatenated object. The concatenated object will be described in detail later.

The controller 161 is a storage side I / F 171 that transmits / receives data between the display CPU 131 of the transfer instruction source and the work RAM 132 and VRAM 134 of the data transfer destination, and a storage side I / F 171 that transmits / receives data between the NAND flash memory 162. / F172, controller CPU 173, control ROM 174 and control RAM 175, which are control units that perform data control processing in controller 161 and physical block management processing of NAND flash memory 162, and NAND flash based on transfer instructions from controller CPU 173. A transfer execution circuit 176 that executes reading of data from the memory 162, a cache memory 177 that temporarily stores the data read by the transfer execution circuit 176, and a data read from the NAND flash memory 162. It includes an error correction circuit 178 that detects an error and corrects the detected error.

Generally, the NAND flash memory 162 is used by avoiding a block containing a defect in the memory cell array even if the block is present. The presence / absence and site of this defective block are different for each solid. Therefore, it is necessary to associate the logical address transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133 with each page of the physical block in the NAND flash memory 162, and the association is executed by the controller CPU 173.

Specifically, the control ROM 174 stores in advance an address management table (address management information group) that associates the logical address with the address of each page of the physical block. The address specification command received from the display CPU 131 is temporarily stored in the address specification buffer of the control RAM 175. When the address designation command is stored in the control RAM 175, the controller CPU 173 reads the address management table from the control ROM 174 and grasps the page address of the physical block corresponding to the designated logical address. Then, a transfer instruction is given from the controller CPU 173 to the transfer execution circuit 176, and data transfer is performed in the transfer execution circuit 176 so that the data of the physical address related to the transfer instruction is transferred from the NAND flash memory 162 to the cache memory 177. The process is executed. The data transferred to the cache memory 177 is transferred to the work RAM 132 or the VRAM 134.

Incidentally, as the control ROM 174, a memory such as a mask ROM or a NOR type flash memory capable of randomly accessing data can be read. Further, as the cache memory 177, a memory whose read speed (transfer speed) is faster than that of the NAND flash memory 162 when compared by reading data of the same capacity is used. In other words, as the cache memory 177, a memory whose read period is shorter than that of the NAND flash memory 162 is used when compared by reading data of the same capacity. Specifically, it has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storage, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used.

Further, the memory module 133 is provided with a boot memory 179 in which boot data for initial booting in the display CPU 131 is stored in advance. A mask ROM is used as the boot memory 179 so that random access is possible, and when compared by reading data of the same capacity, the read speed (transfer speed) is faster than that of the NAND flash memory 162. It is used. In other words, as the boot memory 179, a memory having a shorter reading period than the NAND flash memory 162 when compared by reading data of the same capacity is used.

The boot memory 179 is not limited to the mask ROM, and may be a NOR flash memory as long as the data read speed is faster than the NAND flash memory 162, and an internal power source such as a battery may be used. It may be a DRAM unit or a SRAM unit provided with.

The storage capacity of the boot memory 179 is set to be smaller than the storage capacity of the NAND flash memory 162. Specifically, the storage capacity is the same as, substantially the same as, or the same as the storage capacity for one page in the NAND flash memory 162. Boot data for initial boot is stored in advance in the boot memory 179, and when the display CPU 131 executes the process at the time of initial boot, the data is not from the NAND flash memory 162 but from the boot memory 179. Is read out. As the boot data for the initial startup, an instruction code for initializing the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135, and an instruction code for transferring the data stored in the NAND flash memory 162 to the work RAM 132 and the VRAM 134 are set.

Data transfer processing is executed in the controller 161. The content of the data transfer process is the same as the data transfer process (FIG. 7) of the controller 101 in the first embodiment. Further, the action and effect of executing the data transfer process are the same as those in the first embodiment.

<Expansion buffer 141 for work RAM 132 and VRAM 134>
Next, the expansion buffer 141 of the work RAM 132 and the VRAM 134 to which data is transferred from the memory module 133 in advance will be described.

First, the work RAM 132 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 60, the work RAM 132 specifically supplies power to itself while the transferred data is used even after it has been used for a period of time in which it may be used thereafter. A regular area 132a for storing and holding the data while the supply is continued, and a changing area 132b for being overwritten when transferring other data after use are provided.

Program data necessary for proceeding with main processing (FIG. 9), V interrupt processing (FIG. 11), command interrupt processing, and the like on the display CPU 131 is written in the regular area 132a. By providing the regular area 132a, the main process, the V interrupt process, the command interrupt process, and the like, which are repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals, can be smoothly started.

If it becomes necessary to temporarily store data that exceeds the storage capacity of the change area 132b, all or part of the data in the regular area 132a will not be hindered by the display CPU 131. May be configured to be temporarily erased. In this case, it is necessary that the data is returned to the regular area 132a by the start of the corresponding process.

Program data necessary for executing a subroutine that is started as needed in each of these processes is written in the change area 132b. Further, the program data required for the next subroutine to be executed may be transferred to the change area 132b while the predetermined subroutine is being executed, but the transfer transfers the program data of the subroutine being executed. It is done so as not to erase. Since the change area 132b is provided as described above, data transfer can be performed satisfactorily in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the work RAM 132 is suppressed to be smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 133.

Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main control device 50, the work RAM 132 is not supplied with backup power. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power source to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored and held in the work RAM 132 up to that point is erased or destroyed.

Next, the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 will be described.

Specifically, power is continuously supplied to the expansion buffer 141 while the transferred image data is used once but may be used thereafter. A regular area 141a for storing and holding the image data while the image is being used, and a changing area 141b for being overwritten when transferring other image data after use are provided.

In the regular area 141a, image data for an object, image data for a texture, and image data for the back surface used when starting variable display of a symbol in the symbol display device 31 are written, and a predetermined fraud is written. The abnormality notification data used to display the abnormality notification image when an abnormality is detected is written. Since the regular area 141a is provided, even if a drawing instruction is suddenly given from the display CPU 131, the VDP 135 can satisfactorily draw an image corresponding to the drawing instruction by accessing the regular area 141a. can.

When it becomes necessary to temporarily store image data that exceeds the storage capacity of the change area 141b, all or one of the regular areas 141a is used as long as the smooth image display on the symbol display device 31 is not hindered. The data of the part may be temporarily erased. In this case, it is necessary that the image data is returned to the normal area 141a by the drawing timing of the corresponding image.

Image data for objects, image data for textures, image data for the back surface, and the like are written in the change area 141b. Further, the image data required for the next effect may be transferred to the change area 141b during the execution of the predetermined effect, but the transfer erases the image data necessary for the effect during the execution. It is done so as not to. Since the change area 141b is provided as described above, data transfer can be performed satisfactorily in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the expansion buffer 141 is suppressed to be smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 133.

Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main control device 50, the backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 134. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power source to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored and held in the VRAM 134 until then is erased or destroyed.

<Basic processing in display CPU 131>
Next, the basic processing in the display CPU 131 will be described.

The display CPU 131 starts the main process when the supply of operating power is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset. The content of the main process is the same as that of the main process (FIG. 9) executed by the display CPU 72 of the first embodiment, except for the following points.

The initial image data for which the transfer request is made in step S307 is not merely 3D image data, but a combination of 2D still image data and plate polygon image data. Further, various parameters grasped in step S313 include address information of the area to which the initial image data is transferred in the VRAM 134, information of the frame areas 142a and 142b in which drawing data should be created using the initial image data. The geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 include information for creating drawing data corresponding to the initial image from the initial image data.

Further, the regular image data for which the transfer request is made in step S316 includes the image data for the back surface used when starting the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 31, and also for displaying the symbol. Image data for objects and image data for textures are included. The image data for the back surface and the image data for displaying the design are set according to the type of the display mode, but the normal image data includes the image data of both display modes. In addition, the abnormality notification data used when displaying the abnormality notification image when a predetermined fraud or abnormality is detected is included, and this abnormality notification data is for 2D still image data and for plate polygons. It is a combination with the image data of.

By executing the main processing on the display CPU 131, it is allowed to execute the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing. The content of the command interrupt process is the same as that of the first embodiment. The content of the V interrupt process is the same as the V interrupt process (FIG. 11) executed by the display CPU 72 of the first embodiment, except for the task process of step S407.

<Task processing in display CPU 131>
Here, the task processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 62.

In the task process, first, in step S3501, the setting process for starting control is executed. In the setting process for starting control, the display CPU 131 executes a process for setting an individual image for which control (calculation) is newly started at this processing time. The individual image is a 2D image defined by still image data such as image data for the back surface, or a 3D image defined by a combination of image data for an object and image data for a texture. That is.

Specifically, regarding the setting process for starting control, first, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be controlled started in this process. If it exists, in the change area 132b of the work RAM 132, the free buffer area for performing various operations in controlling the individual image is searched, and the individual image grasped as the control start target is selected. Allocate a free buffer area so that there is a one-to-one correspondence. Further, the initialization process is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and the parameters for starting control according to the individual images are set for the initialized free buffer areas.

In the following step S3502, the control update target is grasped. The control update target is an individual image for which the control start processing has been completed and may be included in the image for one frame after the current processing.

In the following step S3503, the background arithmetic processing is executed. In the background arithmetic processing, the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, light information for adding light and darkness, and projection in the world coordinate system are performed for the backmost image that constitutes the background image and the background character. It executes a process of calculating and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information to be performed and Z test designation.

In the following step S3504, the effect calculation process is executed. In the effect calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the above-mentioned various parameters for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect is executed.

In the following step S3505, the symbol arithmetic processing is executed. In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the above-mentioned various parameters is executed for the image of the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner in each game.

Incidentally, in each process of step S3503 to step S3505, a process of updating the control start parameter set in step S3501 is executed. Further, in each process of steps S3503 to S3505, animation data set so as to change various parameters of individual images according to a specific pattern each time the image update timing is reached is used. This animation data is defined according to the type of individual image. Further, the animation data is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 162, and is pre-transferred to the work RAM 132 by the time when the display CPU 131 needs to read the data.

After that, in step S3506, the process of grasping the object to be arranged in the world coordinate system is executed, and then this task process is terminated. In the process of grasping the object to be arranged in the world coordinate system, the process of grasping the individual image set as the drawing target in the current drawing list among the individual images targeted for control update by each of the processes of steps S3503 to S3505. To execute. The grasp is performed based on the currently set data table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

That is, since the number of individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 131 is set to be larger than the number of individual images to be controlled by the VDP 135, the adjustment is performed in step S3506. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the display CPU 131 and the individual image to be controlled by the VDP 135 may be the same. In this case, the process of step S3506 is executed. No need.

In addition, in the setting process for the control start in step S3501, in order to disperse the processing load of the display CPU 131, the control start timing of each individual image is distributed and set as in the first embodiment. May be good.

<Basic processing in VDP135>
Next, the basic processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described.

In the VDP 135, a process of setting the value of the register 153 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 131, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131, At least the process of outputting the image signal to the symbol display device 31 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 142a and 142b.

Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 153 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 156 for the display CPU 131. Further, the process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined period (for example, 20 msec) in cooperation with the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152. Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 155 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. 63 (a) to 63 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information on the target buffer, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b is to be created for the image for one frame related to the drawing list, is set. There is. In addition, various designated information is set in the header information. The contents of various designated information will be described later. When moving image data is included as the image data handled by VDP135, the presence / absence of decoding designation and the information of the address to which the moving image data to be decoded is transferred are set in the header information. May be good.

In the drawing list, in addition to the above header information, a plurality of types of image data to be arranged in the world coordinate system when creating the drawing data this time are set, and further, information on the drawing order of each image data and information on the drawing order of each image data. Parameter information of each image data is set. In detail, the drawing order information is set so as to be serial number numerical information, and the parameter information is set so that each numerical information has a one-to-one correspondence.

In the drawing list of FIG. 63 (a), the image data for the back surface is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second object, the background object B is set as the third object, and so on. There is. Further, the image data for the effect is set in the order after the image data for the background. For example, the object A for the effect is set as the mth, the object B for the effect is set as the m + 1th, and so on. There is. Further, the image data for the symbol is set in the order after the image data for the effect, for example, the symbol object A is set as the nth, the symbol object B is set as the n + 1th, and so on. There is.

Parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), ..., P (m), P (m + 1), ..., P (n), P (n + 1), ... Has multiple types of parameters set. Specifically, regarding the parameter P (1) of the image data for the back surface, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the information of the address of the area to which the image data for the back surface is transferred in the VRAM 134 and the image for the back surface. Coordinate information (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating a position in the world coordinate system when setting data, and in the world coordinate system when setting image data for the back surface. Information on the rotation angle indicating the rotation angle, information on the scale indicating the magnification when setting in the world coordinate system with respect to the scale set as the initial state of the image data for the back surface, and image data for the back surface. A uniform α value information indicating the entire transparent information (or transparent information) in the case of setting is set.

Here, the coordinate information is set individually for all the pixels of the image data for the object. Further, although the coordinate information is set for the image data for the object, it is not set for the image data for the texture. In the image data for the texture, the coordinate value of each pixel is predetermined in association with each pixel of the image data for the object. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the NAND flash memory 162 in a state of being attached to the combination of the image data for the object and the image data for the texture. There is. This UV coordinate value is referenced by VDP135 when texture mapping.

Further, in the parameter (P1), the camera information including the coordinates and orientation information of the virtual camera when projecting the image data for the back surface on the virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing and the image data for the back surface are rendered. Light information including information on the position and orientation of the virtual light source that determines the shadow in the case of the above is set.

Further, in the parameter (P1), information for specifying the Z test indicating whether or not the Z buffer method, which is a kind of method for erasing the hidden surface, is applied is set. The Z-buffer method is a viewpoint for each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel) arranged on the Z-axis when a large number of objects or two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system. This is a processing method for depth adjustment that sequentially refers to the distances of the above and sets the numerical information set in the pixel closest to the viewpoint to the corresponding unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b. When applying the Z-buffer method, the Z-buffer 143 provided in the VRAM 134 is used. The specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 will be described later.

In addition to the Z-buffer method, a Z-sort method is set as a method for erasing the hidden surface. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in the corresponding unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b for each pixel arranged on the Z axis. When the Z sort method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and if necessary, the addition process as described above and the calculation process for fusion as described above are executed as necessary. The Rukoto. Although the description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sorting is omitted, it is activated when displaying the effect image.

Further, in the parameter (P1), information on α data designation indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target, information on fog designation indicating whether or not fog is applied and an application target, and a background image are created to be displayed. For the drawing data for the background image, information for specifying separate storage indicating whether or not to save separately is set.

Here, the α value is the transparency information of the corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the above-mentioned uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transparent information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 131. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparent information applied to each pixel of 2D still image data and image data for texture, and is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 162 as image data. In the α data, the transparency information can be different for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the image data for the same texture. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

By setting the α value and α data uniformly as described above, the transparency of 2D still image data and image data for textures is not finely controlled on a pixel-by-pixel basis, but uniformly for all pixels. In situations where control is sufficient, the required data capacity can be reduced by being able to handle with a uniform α value, and by applying α data, it is possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units.

Further, the fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically, a Z-axis direction in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to represent fog or the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, the image for one frame is fogged in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, if the same fog as other objects is applied to the object located on the back side in the Z-axis direction, it will be too dark and the texture will not be obtained. In this case, another fog is set for the object. It is good to have a configuration. As a result, the effect of setting the fog can be obtained while not impairing the texture.

Further, the separate storage means that the drawing data for the background image once created is written and saved in the mode buffer 145 provided separately from the frame areas 142a and 142b so that the drawing data for the background image can be used as it is in the subsequent frame. say. As shown in FIG. 60, the mode buffer 145 is provided with a first mode buffer 145 and a second mode buffer 145 so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. The specific contents of this separate storage will be described in detail later.

Further, in other parameters such as the parameter P (2), as shown in FIG. 63 (c), among the various information in FIG. 63 (b), the information of the object is used instead of the information of the image data for the background. Texture information is set. As such information, information on the address of the area to which the object or texture is transferred is set.

The drawing process in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the following description, a state in which drawing data is created as the drawing process is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 65.

First, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not a new drawing list is received from the display CPU 131. If a new drawing list has been received, the background setting process is executed in step S3602.

In the background setting process, among the image data specified in the drawing list this time, the image data for the back surface for displaying the background image and the object for the character are grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and the object for the character are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

If it is not arranged, the free buffer area to be referred to for arranging it in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if the free buffer area is secured, the initialization process of that area is executed. After that, the VRAM 134 grasps and reads the address to which the image data is pre-transferred, and sets the coordinate values of the local coordinate system for the image data so as to have the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale specified in the drawing list. The world conversion process for converting to the coordinate values of the world coordinate system is executed, and the buffer area secured above is set.

If it is placed, the update processing of various parameters set in the buffer area already secured is executed. Further, in the background setting process, the control end process for erasing the background image data not specified in the drawing list this time among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

In the following step S3603, the setting process for the effect is executed. In the setting process for the effect, among the image data specified in the drawing list this time, the object for displaying the effect image is grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case described in the setting process for the background. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for the effect, the control end process for erasing the image data for the effect that is not specified in the drawing list this time among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

In the following step S3604, the setting process for the symbol is executed. In the setting process for the symbol, among the image data specified in the drawing list this time, the object for displaying the symbol is grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case described in the setting process for the background. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for the symbol, the control end process for erasing the image data for the symbol that is not specified in the drawing list this time among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

By executing the process of step S3602 to step S3604, as shown in FIG. 65, it is designated as an arrangement target by the drawing list in the world coordinate system defined by the X-axis, the Y-axis, and the Z-axis. The setting of the scene in which the rearmost image PC21 and the various objects PC22 to PC30 are arranged at the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale also specified by the drawing list is completed. Note that FIG. 65 simply shows how the rearmost image PC21 and various objects PC22 to PC30 are arranged.

In the following step S3605, the conversion process to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed. In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is set as the origin based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint. Convert to the camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 65, the viewpoint PC 31 shown in the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding to the viewpoint PC 31 is set.

Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (rearmost image PC21 and various objects PC22 to PC30), and the camera coordinate system actually exists for each individual image. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, it is possible to switch the viewpoint individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 65 shows a state in which all the individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

In the following step S3606, the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed. In the conversion process to the field of view coordinate system, each of the camera coordinate systems is converted into a field of view coordinate system corresponding to the field of view (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, for each individual image, if it is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image near the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

In the following step S3607, clipping processing is executed. In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S3606 is grasped with the corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. Then, in that state, extraction is performed in step S3606 with reference to the space corresponding to the screen area PC32 (see FIG. 65) corresponding to the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn (that is, the display screen G of the symbol display device 31). Clip each individual image that has been created.

In the following step S3608, the lighting process is executed. In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and orientation of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and shadows, reflections, and the like are calculated for each object extracted by the clipping process based on the virtual light source. ..

In the following step S3609, the texture mapping process is executed. In the texture mapping process, the corresponding texture is pasted on each object extracted by the clipping process, and the appearance of each object is determined. This texture mapping process includes not only the process of pasting image data for texture but also the process of bump mapping and transparency mapping.

After that, in steps S361 to S3612, each individual image extracted in step S3607 and further completed in the lighting process and the texture mapping process is projected onto the screen area PC32 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection or parallel projection). Create drawing data by projecting).

Specifically, first, in step S3610, the drawing data creation process for the background is executed. In the background drawing data creation process, the background drawing data is created by projecting the backmost image and the object set as the background image onto the screen area PC 32 while erasing the hidden surface.

Here, the VRAM 134 is provided with a screen buffer 144 as shown in FIG. 60, and the screen buffer 144 is written with a background buffer in which drawing data for the background is written and drawing data for the effect. A buffer for the effect and a buffer for the symbol to which the drawing data for the symbol is written are set. Further, in the background buffer, the effect buffer, and the design buffer, an area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC32 is set. The background drawing data created in step S3610 is written in the background buffer. If the background image data is not specified in the drawing list, the background drawing data is not created.

In the following step S3611, the drawing data creation process for the effect is executed. In the drawing data creation process for the effect, the object set as the effect image is projected onto the screen area PC 32 while erasing the hidden surface, so that the effect buffer in the screen buffer 144 is used for the effect. Create drawing data. If the image data for the effect is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the effect is not created.

In the following step S3612, the drawing data creation process for the symbol is executed. In the drawing data creation process for a symbol, the object set as the symbol is projected onto the screen area PC32 while erasing the hidden surface, so that the drawing for the symbol is drawn in the buffer for the symbol in the screen buffer 144. Create data. If the image data for the symbol is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the symbol is not created.

Then, in step S3613, after executing the drawing data composition process, the main drawing process is terminated. In the drawing data compositing process of step S3613, the drawing data for the background, the drawing data for the effect, and the drawing data for the design, which are individually created in the screen buffer 144 by the processes of steps S361 to S3612, are combined. The composition is performed, and the composition result is written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn as drawing data for one frame.

In this case, it is stipulated that the drawing data for the background, the drawing data for the effect, and the drawing data for the design are arranged in the order from the back side to the front side, and the images are set so as not to overlap in the depth direction. ing. Therefore, in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, first, the drawing data for the background is written, then the drawing data for the effect is written, and finally, the drawing data for the design is written. At this time, if a completely transparent α value is set for the pixel to be drawn, the image on the back side is used as it is, and if a semi-transparent α value is set, the α value is set. The image on the back side and the image on the front side are fused at the reference ratio, and when the opaque α value is set, the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side. Then, the calculation for fusion as described above is executed.

By the way, although each drawing data is specified to have an area for one frame, a completely transparent α value is set for the blank part that was not projected in the drawing data for production and the drawing data for design. Has been done.

The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within the range of the 20 msec cycle. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit 155 to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data. However, since the double buffer method is adopted as described above, the output of the image signal is output to the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data for the relevant frame one frame later. Further, the display circuit 155 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame areas 142a and 142b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. The frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting an image signal.

The steps S3602 to S3607 are the processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 151, and the steps S3608 to S3613 are the processes executed by the rendering unit 152.

<Mask display using Z-buffer 143>
Next, the mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

As described above, the Z-buffer 143 is used when the hidden surface is erased by the Z-buffer method. Here, the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The hidden surface processing using the Z buffer is started in each drawing data creation process of steps S361 to S3612 in the drawing process (FIG. 64) when the Z test is specified in the drawing list. Further, when the Z test is specified, the display CPU 131 sets the camera information of each individual image to be hidden surface processing using the Z buffer so that each viewpoint has the same coordinates and orientation. Set so that the direction of the viewpoint is the direction in the Z-axis direction of the world coordinate system. Therefore, the Z-axis of the screen area PC32, which is a reference in the hidden surface processing using the Z-buffer, is set to be parallel to the Z-axis of the world coordinate system. Further, only one Z-buffer 143 is set, and the screen buffer 144 has an area having the same number of dots as the background buffer, the effect buffer, and the design buffer.

First, in step S3701, the individual image included on the Z-axis of the current projection target dot in the screen area PC32 (see FIG. 65) is set as the target pixel of the individual image to be tested this time. Grasp the set Z value. In the following step S3702, the Z value set in the dot area corresponding to the drawing target dot on a one-to-one basis in the Z buffer 143 is grasped.

In the following step S3703, it is determined whether or not the Z value of the individual image grasped in step S3701 corresponds to the front side in the Z-axis direction with respect to the Z value of the Z buffer 143 grasped in step S3702. If it corresponds to the front side, the process proceeds to step S3704, and the Z value grasped in step S3701 is overwritten in the dot area referred to in step S3702 in the Z buffer 143. In the following step S3705, the numerical information for drawing such as the color information set for the pixel referred to in step S3701 is overwritten in the area of the projection target dot this time in the drawing target buffer in the screen buffer 144. After that, the process proceeds to step S3706.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3703 that it does not correspond to the front side, the process proceeds to step S3706 without executing the processes of steps S3704 to S3705. That is, if the Z value of the pixel to be tested is the same as the Z value already set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143 or is on the back side in the Z axis direction, the Z buffer 143 is updated. Not only that, the numerical information for drawing that has already been set is retained as it is. On the other hand, if the Z value of the pixel to be tested is on the front side in the Z-axis direction from the Z value already set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143, the Z buffer 143 is updated. , Numerical information for drawing is also updated.

In step S3706, it is determined whether or not the Z test is completed for all the target pixels included on the Z axis with respect to the projection target dot. If it is not completed, the process returns to step S3701 and a Z test is performed on a new target pixel.

If it is completed, in step S3707, it is determined whether or not the Z test is completed for all the dots in the screen area PC32. If it is not completed, in step S3708, after updating the projection target dot, the process returns to step S3701 and a Z test is performed on the new projection target dot. If it is completed, this hidden surface processing is terminated.

By executing the hidden surface processing as described above, even if a plurality of individual images are lined up on the Z axis, only the individual images on the side closer to the viewpoint are displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, the mask (that is, partial display) of the character for the background is executed by utilizing the hidden surface processing. Then, this mask is performed by setting the Z value of the object for the mask on the display CPU 131.

Hereinafter, the arithmetic processing for the mask executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67. It should be noted that the arithmetic processing for the mask is the effect arithmetic processing of step S3504 in the task processing (FIG. 62) when it is indicated that the arithmetic processing for the mask should be executed in the area referred to in the data table. Is executed.

First, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the current processing time corresponds to the first mask display based on the currently set data table. Here, as the mask display, a first mask display and a second mask display are set. The first mask display is a display mode in which a state in which a part of the character is partially displayed is maintained over a plurality of frames, and the second mask display is a display mode in which the pixels to be masked from the state in which the entire character is displayed are displayed in a plurality of frames. It is a display mode that gradually increases and finally disappears.

When the first mask display is supported, in step S3802, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S3803, the pixels to be masked in the object grasped in step S3802 are grasped based on the currently set data table.

After that, after executing the Z value setting process in step S3804, this calculation process ends. In the Z value setting process, the Z value of the pixel targeted for masking in the object is set to be on the back side of the backmost image, and the pixel not targeted for masking is set to be on the back side. The Z value is set so as to be on the front side of the rearmost image and correspond to the position that should be originally displayed.

As described above, the arithmetic processing for the mask is executed, and the drawing list including the object for which the Z value is set is transmitted to the VDP135, so that the Z buffer is used as the hidden surface processing in the VDP135. The hidden surface process (FIG. 66) is executed, and finally the first mask display is performed on the display screen G. The specific content of the first mask display will be described with reference to FIG. 68. For convenience of explanation, the 3D image is shown as a 2D image in FIG. 68.

FIG. 68A shows a case where the character CH10 is displayed as usual without the first mask display being performed. Further, FIG. 68 (a-1) is an image diagram of a Z value specified by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 33 corresponding to the character CH10, and FIG. 68 (a-2) is an image diagram of the Z value on the display screen G. The display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 68 (a-1), since the Z value is set for each pixel so as to be on the front side of the rearmost image, as shown in FIG. 68 (a-2). The entire character CH10 is displayed.

FIG. 68B shows a case where the first mask display is performed. Further, FIG. 68 (b-1) is an image diagram of a Z value specified by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 33 corresponding to the character CH10, and FIG. 68 (b-2) is an image diagram of the Z value on the display screen G. The display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 68 (b-1), a Z value is set for a part of each pixel so as to be on the front side of the backmost image, but for the remaining pixels, the backmost side is set. The Z value is set so that it is on the back side of the image of. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68 (b-2), only the portion corresponding to the pixel whose Z value is set so as to be on the front side of the character CH10 is displayed.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of Z value setting patterns corresponding to the first mask display for the same character CH10 may be set by the control program of the display CPU 131. In this case, it is possible to set a plurality of types of first mask display modes for the same character CH10.

Returning to the description of the arithmetic processing for the mask (FIG. 67), if it is determined in step S3801 that the current processing time does not correspond to the first mask display, the current processing time is the second mask. Since it means that the display is supported, the process proceeds to step S3805. In step S3805, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the second mask display based on the currently set data table.

If it is the start timing, in step S3806, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S3807, a dedicated mask table is read out based on the currently set data table. The dedicated table for this mask is stored and retained until the second mask display is completed. In the following step S3808, the pixels set as the initial erasure target in the dedicated table for the mask are grasped.

After that, after executing the Z value setting process in step S3809, this calculation process ends. In the Z value setting process, in the above object, for the pixel grasped as the initial erase target in step S3808, the Z value is set to be on the back side of the rearmost image, and the pixel is set as the initial erase target. For pixels that are not, the Z value is set so that it is on the front side of the rearmost image and corresponds to the position where it should be displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3805 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S3810. In step S3810, the erase target counter set in the work RAM 132 is updated. In the following step S3811, in the currently read dedicated table for mask, the data corresponding to the value of the erasure target counter updated in step S3810 is confirmed, and the pixel to be erased is grasped.

Then, after executing the Z value setting process in step S3812, the present calculation process is terminated. In the Z value setting process, in the above object, for the pixel grasped as the erase target in step S3811, the Z value is set to be on the back side of the rearmost image and is the erase target. For pixels that do not exist, the Z value is set so that it is on the front side of the rearmost image and corresponds to the position where it should be displayed.

As described above, the arithmetic processing for the mask is executed, and the drawing list including the object for which the Z value is set is transmitted to the VDP135, so that the Z buffer is used as the hidden surface processing in the VDP135. The hidden surface process (FIG. 66) is executed, and finally the second mask display is performed on the display screen G. The specific contents of the second mask display will be described with reference to FIG. 69. For convenience of explanation, the 3D image is shown as a 2D image in FIG. 69.

FIG. 69A shows an image diagram of the information set in the dedicated mask table, and FIG. 69B shows the case where the character CH11 is displayed as usual without the second mask display being performed. Is shown. As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the object PC 34 corresponding to the character CH 11 has a plurality of pixels, and in the dedicated mask table, the plurality of pixels are grouped by a plurality of pixels and each group is divided into groups. On the other hand, the frame order to be erased is set. Specifically, the group indicated as "Z1" is set as the initial deletion target, and thereafter, the group indicated as "Z2" → the group indicated as "Z3" → the group indicated as "Z4" → indicated as "Z5". It will be deleted in the order of the group.

In the frame in which the second mask display is started and the group indicated as "Z1" is to be erased, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the pixel portion corresponding to the group "Z1" is missing. The character CH11 is displayed. Further, in the subsequent frame, when the group shown as "Z2" is to be erased, as shown in FIG. 69 (d), the pixels corresponding to the group of "Z2" in addition to the group of "Z1". The character CH11 is displayed with the portion missing. Then, in the frame in which the group finally indicated as "Z5" is the target of erasure, the character CH 11 is not displayed.

As described above, the Z buffer 143 can be used to mask the object. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform the mask calculation on the program of the display CPU 131, and it is not necessary to set the mask data which is a kind of image data in the VDP 135. Therefore, the mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity required for storing the image data.

Further, since the display CPU 131 only needs to adjust the Z value of each object, the mask display can be performed without significantly increasing the processing load of the display CPU 131. Further, a plurality of types of mask displays such as the first mask display and the second mask display can produce the above-mentioned excellent effects.

Further, a Z value on the back side of the rearmost image is set in the hidden portion. Since the rearmost image is an image that always constitutes the back surface in any frame, it serves as an absolute reference as the position in the Z axis (depth direction). By setting the Z value of the part to be hidden based on this, it is possible to make the setting mode of the Z value when it is hidden uniform, and the process related to the setting of the Z value. The processing load is reduced.

In addition, only one of the first mask display and the second mask display may be set. Further, in the second mask display, the pixels may be erased for each pixel instead of being erased for each of a plurality of pixels, and the pixel to be erased may be set as the display target again. May be.

Further, by reversing the setting of the Z value, the characters are not sequentially erased over the display period for a plurality of frames, but are displayed so that the characters appear sequentially over the display period for a plurality of frames. It may be configured to be.

<Another form of mask processing using Z-buffer 143>
Another form of mask display using the Z-buffer 143 will be described.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another form of the arithmetic processing for the mask executed by the display CPU 131.

First, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing based on the currently set data table. When it is the start timing, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table in step S3902, and the initial stage is performed based on the currently set data table in step S3903. Read the mask table.

In the following step S3904, the mask lottery process is executed. In the mask lottery process, the numerical information currently set in the lottery counter provided in the work RAM 132 is read, and the information to be erased corresponding to the numerical information is extracted from the initial mask table read in step S3903. ..

The lottery counter is configured to be updated every time the process of step S202 is executed in, for example, the main process (FIG. 9), and further, when the counter value goes around once, the initial value is randomly selected. It is configured to be. Further, in the initial mask table, information to be erased is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each counter value of the lottery counter, and the information to be erased is all pixels constituting the object to be masked. Of these, a plurality of pixels are grouped into one group, and there is a one-to-one correspondence with each group.

In the following step S3905, the pixels to be erased are grasped from the information to be erased acquired in step S3904. Then, after executing the Z value setting process in step S3906, the present calculation process is terminated. In this Z value setting process, in the above object, the Z value of the pixel grasped as the erase target in step S3905 is set to be on the back side of the rearmost image, and is the erase target. For pixels that do not exist, the Z value is set so that it is on the front side of the rearmost image and corresponds to the position where it should be displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3901 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S3907. In step S3907, the mask table is rewritten so that the information of the erasure target already set as the erasure target is excluded from the initial mask table that has already been read. For example, the counter value corresponding to the information to be erased that has already been set as the target to be erased is rewritten so as to be duplicated with the information to be erased. This allocation may be made randomly, or may be configured to be assigned to the information to be erased corresponding to the counter value immediately below on the table.

After that, using the mask table rewritten in step S3907, the processes of steps S3904 to S3906 are executed, and then this calculation process is terminated.

As described above, according to the present alternative form, the pixels to be erased are randomly selected, so that the mask display mode can be diversified.

The mask display using the Z-buffer 143 may be applied not to the background character but to the effect character or symbol. For example, when it is applied to a character for effect, the hidden surface processing is executed collectively for the image data for background and the image data for effect, so that the back surface is the same as the above configuration. The Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be sorted based on the Z value of the image. Further, when applied to a symbol, the hidden surface processing is collectively executed for the background image data, the effect image data, and the symbol image data, so that the same configuration as the above configuration is performed. , The Z value of the display target and the non-display target may be sorted based on the Z value of the rearmost image.

Further, even when the hidden surface processing is performed individually for the background, the effect, and the pattern, it is defined that the pixel in which the Z value on the back side of the rearmost image is set in VDP135 is not drawn. If so, the Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be sorted based on the Z value of the rearmost image in the same manner as in the above configuration.

Further, the Z value of the display target and the non-display target is not sorted based on the Z value of the rearmost image, but the Z value in front of the viewpoint is set as the Z value of the non-display target, for example. , The Z value on the back side of the viewpoint may be set as the Z value to be displayed.

Further, the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 may be performed not based on the Z axis of the world coordinate system but based on the direction in which the viewpoint faces.

Further, in the configuration for displaying a 2D image as in the first embodiment, when the VDP 76 is configured to be able to operate the drawing data in pixel units, the information in the depth direction set for each pixel of the image data is displayed. The image may be partially displayed by allocating it to either the target information or the non-display target information.

<Configuration related to display mode switching>
Next, the configuration related to the switching of the display mode will be described.

The display mode is a state in which the types of the standby image displayed until the game round is started and the game round image displayed in the situation where the game round is being executed are set to a predetermined type, and there are a plurality of types. Display mode is set. Specifically, a first display mode and a second display mode are set.

In the first display mode and the second display mode, the display mode of the background image and the display mode of each symbol are different from each other. Specifically, when comparing the symbols with the same number, the outer shape and shape of the symbols are the same in the first display mode and the second display mode, but the colors and patterns are different. Regarding the background image, the type of the rearmost image is different between the first display mode and the second display mode, and the number and types of characters displayed in front of the rearmost image are different. The number of characters to be displayed is set more in the first display mode than in the second display mode.

The display mode is switched based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. Specifically, the display mode can be sequentially switched by operating the effect operation device 48 in a situation where the game rotation or the opening / closing execution mode is not executed. Further, the switching is performed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 under a predetermined condition in the situation where the game round is being executed.

A specific processing configuration related to switching of the display mode will be described.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an operation occurrence command correspondence process executed by the display CPU 131. The operation occurrence command correspondence process is executed in the command correspondence process of step S403 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not an operation generation command for mode switching is received from the voice emission control device 60. If it has not been received, the process corresponding to this operation command is terminated as it is, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S4002.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is the first switchable period. The first switchable period is a period in which neither the game times nor the open / close execution mode is executed. Information for specifying whether or not it is the first switchable period is set in the data table, and in step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is the first switchable period based on the currently set data table. .. When it is the first switchable period, in step S4003, the first switch execution flag is set for a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132.

On the other hand, if it is not the first switchable period, the process proceeds to step S4004 to determine whether or not it is the second switchable period. The second switchable period is a period from the start timing to a predetermined reference timing during the execution in the situation where the game round is being executed. Specifically, when the game rotation effect is executed by the symbol display device 31, the fluctuation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started → the high-speed fluctuation display in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 → the low-speed fluctuation. It includes a display flow of sequentially stopping each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 via the display. In this case, the second switchable period is the period from the start of the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to the end of the high-speed fluctuation display in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

As for the mode of the variation display of the symbols, the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started → the acceleration period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 → the high-speed fluctuation display in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (high speed is constant). Speed) → The display flow may be such that each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is sequentially stopped via a low-speed fluctuation display (low speed is a constant speed). In this case, the second switchable period may be the period during which the high-speed fluctuation display is executed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Further, a medium speed fluctuation display may be included between the high speed fluctuation display and the low speed fluctuation display. That is, the specific number of steps is arbitrary as long as the mode of the variable display of the symbol is switched in a plurality of steps such as two steps, three steps, or four steps or more. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period of the low discriminating stage in which the discriminatingness of the symbol by the player is low among the stages.

Further, if the flow of the variation display of the symbol includes the state of the variation display in the relatively low identification mode → the variation display in the high identification mode, the specific variation mode is arbitrary, for example, any mode. However, the fluctuation speed is the same, but in the fluctuation display in the low identification mode, the design is displayed in a transparent, translucent, hollow or partially excluded state, and in the fluctuation display in the high discrimination mode, the entire design is displayed. It may be a display configuration. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period during which the variable display in the low identification mode is performed.

Information for specifying whether or not it is the second switchable period is set in the data table, and in step S4004, it is determined whether or not it is the second switchable period based on the currently set data table. .. If it is determined that it is not the second switchable period, the operation corresponding to this operation generation command is terminated as it is, and if it is the second switchable period, a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 is provided in step S4005. The second switching execution flag is set for.

After executing the process of either step S4003 or step S4005, the process proceeds to step S4006. In step S4006, the counter for the display mode is updated.

The display mode counter is a counter for specifying the current display mode on the display CPU 131, and is provided in the work RAM 132. The counter value for the display mode is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. In the present embodiment, since two types of display modes, the first display mode and the second display mode, are set as described above, the counter value is a numerical value of "0" corresponding to the first display mode and the second display. A numerical value of "1" corresponding to the mode is set. In this case, since the initial value of the counter for the display mode is set as "0", when the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 131 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the first value is obtained. 1 Display mode is set.

In step S4006, the counter for the display mode is updated so that the display mode is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order each time the effect operation device 48 is operated once. Specifically, when the process of step S4006 is executed in the situation where the counter for the display mode is "0" and is set to the first display mode, the counter for the display mode is set to "1" and the second counter is set to "1". When switching to the display mode and executing the process of step S4006 in a situation where the counter for the display mode is "1" and is set to the second display mode, the counter for the display mode is set to "1". 1 Switch to display mode. After executing the process of step S4006, the process corresponding to this operation occurrence command is terminated.

Next, the arithmetic processing for the display mode background executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 72. The calculation process for the display mode background is executed in the background calculation process in step S3503 in the task process (FIG. 62). In addition, when the jackpot effect is executed, the background image corresponding to the display mode is not displayed, so the calculation process for the display mode background is not executed, and when the standby image is displayed or the effect for the game is executed. The arithmetic processing for the display mode background is executed.

First, in step S4101, the counter for the display mode provided in the work RAM 132 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the work RAM 132 is the first display mode. In the first display mode, in step S4102, the first rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S4103, various parameters of the grasped first rearmost image are calculated to update the control information. In the following step S4104, based on the currently set data table, the object corresponding to the first display mode and the object to be updated for the background is grasped. In the following step S4105, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update the control information.

On the other hand, in the second display mode, in step S4106, the second rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S4107, various parameters of the grasped second rearmost image are calculated to update the control information. In the following step S4108, based on the currently set data table, the object corresponding to the second display mode and the object to be updated for the background is grasped. In the following step S4109, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated and the control information is updated.

At the execution timing of the process in step S4102, the setting process for starting control (step S3501) for the background object corresponding to the first rearmost image and the first display mode is completed. Further, at the execution timing of the process in step S4106, the setting process for starting control (step S3501) for the background object corresponding to the second rearmost image and the second display mode is completed.

After executing the process of step S4105 or step S4109, it is determined in step S4110 whether or not either the first switching execution flag or the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. If any of the switching execution flags is set, in step S4111, it is determined whether or not the processing load is large.

A situation with a large processing load is that when both geometry calculation and rendering for the image data specified in the drawing list this time are executed by VDP135, the processing load of VDP135 is large enough to cause processing omission or processing. It refers to a situation in which the processing load of VDP135 is relatively large even if no drop occurs. Information on whether or not the processing load is heavy is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S4111 is performed based on the information.

When the processing load is not large, it is determined in step S4112 whether or not the background image corresponding to the current display mode has been saved separately. Here, the separate storage means that the drawing data for the background for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode is individually saved and the saved state is maintained. For separate storage, the mode buffer 145 provided in the VRAM 134 is used (see FIG. 60).

In the mode buffer 145, the area 145a for the first mode in which the drawing data for the background for displaying the background image corresponding to the first display mode is written, and the background image corresponding to the second display mode are displayed. A second mode area 145b, in which drawing data for the background of the above is written, is provided. Further, the VDP 135 has a function of writing background drawing data to either the first mode area 145a or the second mode area 145b, and the written background drawing data is read into the screen buffer 144. It has a display mode control unit 154 having a writing function.

If it is not saved separately, the execution designation information of the separate save is stored in step S4113, and then the main calculation process is ended. If the calculation is saved separately, the main calculation process is ended as it is.

When the calculation process for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process is for the background corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Image data is set. Further, when the process of step S4113 is being executed, the execution designation information of another storage is set. The execution designation information of the separate storage includes information indicating that the separate storage should be executed, and also includes information of the address of the separate storage destination.

On the other hand, when the processing load is large (step S4111: YES), it is determined in step S4114 whether or not the background image of the display mode of the switching destination has been saved separately. If it has not been saved separately, this calculation process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has been saved separately, the calculation process ends after storing the usage designation information of the separately saved data in step S4115.

When the calculation process for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process is for the background corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Image data is set. Further, when the process of step S4115 is executed, the usage designation information of the separately saved data is set. The usage designation information of the separately stored data includes information indicating that the separately stored data should be used, and also includes information of the address where the separately stored data is stored.

Next, the symbol arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73. The symbol calculation process is executed in step S3505 of the task process (FIG. 62).

First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to execute the control update process for the symbol based on the currently set data table. The case where it is not necessary to execute includes the case where the jackpot effect is executed, and the case where it needs to be executed includes the case where the effect for game rounds is executed and the case where the standby image is displayed. If it is not necessary to execute it, the calculation process for this symbol is terminated as it is, and if it is necessary to execute it, is the game time being executed based on the currently set data table in step S4202? Judge whether or not.

If the game round is not being executed, in step S4203, it is determined whether or not the first switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. When the first switching execution flag is set, in step S4204, the symbol to be controlled is changed according to the display mode of the switching destination. Specifically, while holding the information for the parameters of each free buffer area reserved for controlling the symbol in the work RAM 132 as it is, only the information of the symbol to be controlled (for example, the information of the transfer destination address). Is rewritten to the information corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination. The processing of step S4203 and step S4204 may be executed in the setting processing (step S3501) for starting control in the task processing (FIG. 62). Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, the first switching execution flag is cleared.

If a negative determination is made in step S4203 or the process of step S4204 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4205. In step S4205, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in the following step S4206, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the calculation process for this symbol is terminated.

When the symbol arithmetic processing is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing includes image data for symbols corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Is set.

When the game round is being executed (step S4202: YES), it is determined in step S4207 whether or not high-speed fluctuation display is being performed in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 based on the currently set data table. judge. When the high-speed fluctuation display is being performed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, it is determined in step S4208 whether or not the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132.

When the second switching execution flag is set, in step S4209, it is determined whether or not the symbol to be controlled can be changed according to the display mode of the switching destination. This is because when the drawing process (FIG. 64) corresponding to the current drawing list is executed on the VDP135, if the symbol to be controlled is changed according to the display mode of the switching destination, a processing omission occurs. Based on whether or not there is a processing omission, it is possible to change it if no processing omission occurs, and it is determined that it is impossible to change it if a processing omission occurs.

For example, if the image data for the background corresponding to the switching of the display mode is newly set in the drawing list this time, it is necessary to newly set the image data setting in the world coordinate system in VDP135. The processing load of VDP135 is increased. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that it is impossible to change the design. On the other hand, when separately saved data is set as the background image data in the current drawing list, or when the background image data corresponding to the same display mode as the display mode related to the previous drawing list is set. Since it is not necessary to newly set the image data in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135, the processing load of the VDP 135 becomes relatively small. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the design can be changed.

Information on whether or not it is possible to change is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S4209 is performed based on the information. Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4208, the second switching execution flag is cleared. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the time for one cycle of V interrupt processing is determined whether or not the symbol to be controlled can be changed according to the execution mode of the switching destination. It may be configured depending on how far it has progressed. For example, if the progress of the signal output to each dot of the display screen G can be recognized by the display CPU 131 by the signal output from the VDP 135, the above determination may be performed from the content of the signal output.

If it is determined in step S4209 that the change is possible, in step S4210, the symbol to be controlled is changed according to the display mode of the switching destination. The specific content of this process is the same as in step S4204. After executing the process of step S4210, the process proceeds to step S4213.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4209 that the change is not possible, the change standby flag is set for the predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S4211, and then the process proceeds to step S4213. .. The change waiting flag is a flag for the display CPU 131 to specify that the change of the symbol to be controlled is waiting. When the change waiting flag is set, even if it is determined in step S4208 that the second switching execution flag is not set, the process of step S4212 is executed, so that the process of step S4209 is performed. Will be executed. If both the second switching execution flag and the change standby flag are not set, the process proceeds to step S4213 as it is. Further, the change waiting flag is cleared when an affirmative determination is made in step S4212.

In step S4213, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in the following step S4214, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the calculation process for this symbol is terminated.

When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, the image data for the symbol corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. NS. In this case, if it is determined in step S4209 that the symbol cannot be changed to the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination, the image data of the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching source is set in the drawing list as it is. NS. Then, a symbol that does not correspond to the display mode is finally displayed on the display screen G, but since the timing at which the second switching execution flag is set is during high-speed fluctuation display, the player can perform the above state. Unrecognizable or difficult to recognize.

If the symbol cannot be changed to the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination, the change standby flag is set and the change is made in the subsequent processing times. As a result, it is possible to switch the display mode satisfactorily while preventing the processing dropout in the VDP 135. The processing load of the VDP 135 is adjusted so that the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination is changed within the range in which the high-speed fluctuation display is performed.

If the high-speed fluctuation display is not in progress (step S4207: NO), the process proceeds to step S4215. In step S4215, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in the following step S4216, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the calculation process for this symbol is terminated. When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, the image data for the symbol corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. NS.

Next, the background setting process executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74. The background setting process is executed in step S3602 in the drawing process (FIG. 64).

First, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not the use designation of the separately saved data is set in the drawing list this time. If it is set, in step S4302, information for setting another saved data corresponding to the designation as drawing data for the background is stored in the register 153.

If it is not set (step S4301: NO) or after executing the process of step S4302, the process proceeds to step S4303. In step S4303, the rearmost image designated in the drawing list this time is grasped, and in step S4304, various parameters designated for the rearmost image are grasped. After that, in step S4305, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for the rearmost image. The contents related to this setting are as described above.

In the following step S4306, the background object specified in the drawing list this time is grasped, and in step S4307, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. After that, in step S4308, the setting process for the background is completed after the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for the object.

By executing the setting process for the background as described above, drawing is performed not only in the situation where the usage specification of the separately saved data is not set, but also in the situation where the usage specification of the separately saved data is set. The image data specified in the list can be set in the world coordinate system. Along with this, for example, when the drawing list this time is related to the switching of the display mode, the setting for starting the control of the image data corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination can be made.

Next, the drawing data creation process for the background executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 75. The drawing data creation process for the background is executed in step S3610 in the drawing process (FIG. 64).

First, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the information of the usage setting of the separately stored data is set in the register 153. If it is not set, the hidden surface process is executed in step S4402 to create drawing data for the background in the screen buffer 144. The hidden surface treatment has already been described.

In the following step S4403, it is determined whether or not the execution designation of another save is set in the drawing list this time. If it is not set, the drawing data creation process is terminated as it is. If it is set, in step S4404, the target mode area of the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145 is used for the background created in step S4402. Write the drawing data of. As a result, the drawing data for the background is saved separately. After that, the drawing data creation process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the information of the usage setting of the separately saved data is set in the register 153 in step S4401, the process proceeds to step S4405. In step S4405, out of the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145, the separately saved data is read from the mode area designated this time, and the read different saved data is used for this time. It is written in the screen buffer 144 as drawing data for the background. After that, the drawing data creation process is terminated.

By executing the background drawing data creation process as described above, the background drawing data through geometry calculation and rendering, or the background drawing data related to the separately stored data is stored in the screen buffer 144. .. Further, in the frame in which the image corresponding to each display mode is displayed, the drawing data creation process for the effect (step S3611) and the drawing data creation process for the design (step S3612) are subsequently executed for the effect. The drawing data and the drawing data for the design are created, and the drawing data composition process (step S3613) is executed to create the drawing data for one frame.

Here, the timing at which the separately stored data for the first display mode and the separately stored data for the second display mode are created will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 76.

FIG. 76 (A) shows the drawing data PD66 for the background corresponding to the first display mode, and FIG. 76 (B) shows the drawing data PD67 for the background corresponding to the second display mode. Further, FIG. 76 (a) shows the ON / OFF state of the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 76 (b) shows the presence / absence of the first display mode, and FIG. 76 (c) shows the presence / absence of the second display mode. FIG. 76 (d) shows the presence / absence of separately stored data for the first display mode, and FIG. 76 (e) shows the presence / absence of separately stored data for the second display mode.

When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing of t1, the power supply to the display CPU 131 is started, and the processing is started by the display CPU 131. Further, since the display mode is set to the first display mode, the drawing list is output from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 in order to display the image corresponding to the first display mode at a timing after the timing of t1. Further, based on the drawing list, VDP135 starts creating drawing data corresponding to the first display mode.

After that, at the timing of t2, the creation of the drawing data PD66 for the background corresponding to the first display mode is completed, and the drawing data becomes the first mode of the mode buffer 145 as separate storage data for the first display mode. It is stored in the usage area 145a. In the background image by the background drawing data PD66 corresponding to this first display mode, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), the 3D character image shown by "A" to "F" in front of the rearmost image. Is displayed. Further, the separately stored data stored in the first mode area 145a is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued. Further, at the timing of t2 or a predetermined timing thereafter, the display of the image corresponding to the first display mode is started.

After that, the display mode is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 at the timing of t3. Then, the drawing data for the second display mode is created, and the display of the image corresponding to the second display mode is started. Further, since the creation of the drawing data PD67 for the background corresponding to the second display mode is completed at that timing, the drawing data is used as separate storage data for the second display mode as the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145. Is remembered in. In the background image by the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to this second display mode, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), the 3D character image indicated by "G" to "J" in front of the rearmost image. Is displayed. Further, the separately stored data stored in the second mode area 145b is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued.

Here, the background drawing data PD66 corresponding to the first display mode has a larger number of objects to be set than the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode. Then, if the switching from the second display mode to the first display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load of the VDP 135 is large, there is a concern that processing omission may occur in the VDP 135. On the other hand, of the data saved separately for both, the processing load is large by creating the separately saved data for the first display mode using the time when the initial setting is performed when the power is turned on. When the display mode is switched to the first display mode in the situation, it is possible to avoid the processing omission by using the separately stored data.

On the other hand, the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode has a small processing load of the VDP135 for its creation, and even if the switching to the second display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load of the VDP135 is large. It is set so that processing omissions do not occur. However, when the drawing data PD67 for the background corresponding to the second display mode is also saved separately and the processing load is relatively large even if the processing omission does not occur, the switching to the second display mode is performed. The separately stored data is used for.

By creating the separately saved data as described above, as shown at the timings of t4 to t9, when the display mode switching is repeatedly executed in a short time, the separately saved data is stored in each display mode. By displaying an image for the background by using it, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing omissions.

In addition, the target of separate storage is the background image, and does not include individual images such as patterns that are noticeable for fluctuations. As a result, when the display mode is switched in a situation where the individual image is fluctuating, even if the image is displayed using the separately saved data, the movement of the individual image whose fluctuation is noticed is continued. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

The display mode is not limited to two stages, and may be set to three stages or four or more stages. Even in this case, the display mode can be switched satisfactorily by separately storing the drawing data for the background corresponding to each display mode.

Further, regardless of the switching timing of the display mode, the configuration may be such that the switching of the symbol type is performed without waiting. Further, the design may be configured so as not to be different between the display modes.

Further, the character for production may also be configured to be switched depending on the display mode. In this case, the character for production may be configured not to be stored separately, or may be configured to be stored separately.

<Configuration for displaying 3D images using connected objects>
Next, a configuration for displaying a 3D image using a concatenated object will be described.

A concatenated object is a unit of objects in which a plurality of part objects (partial objects) are concatenated with a joint as a joint, and is set to give movement to a character in a 3D image by relatively displace each part object. Has been done. By using the connected object, the character of the 3D image can be operated smoothly. In addition, considering that the connected object has a skeleton portion and a joint portion, it can also be called a bone model.

The concatenated object is set to display a character that performs a predetermined action. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of connected objects for displaying a common character are set. The plurality of types of connected objects will be described with reference to FIG. 77.

As shown in FIGS. 77A and 77B, a first concatenated object PC35 and a second concatenated object PC36 are set in order to display a common character. The first connection object PC35 and the second connection object PC36 each have a plurality of connection portions CT1 and CT2, but the connection portions CT1 and CT2 are set at different locations from each other.

Specifically, the first connecting object PC35 is not provided with a connecting portion at the knee portion, but is provided with a connecting portion CT1 at the elbow portion, as shown in FIGS. 77 (a-1) and 77 (a-2). It is possible to display the operation as shown. On the other hand, the second connecting object PC36 is not provided with a connecting portion at the elbow portion, but is provided with a connecting portion CT2 at the knee portion, as shown in FIGS. 77 (b-1) and (b-2). The operation can be displayed. By setting the connecting portion at different places as described above, it is possible to make the character perform different actions depending on whether the first connected object PC35 is used or the second connected object PC36 is used. It becomes.

Although both connected objects PC35 and PC36 have connecting portions CT1 and CT2 at a common location, they may not have connecting portions CT1 and CT2 at a common location. Further, although a common texture is mapped to both connected objects PC35 and PC36, the texture may be set individually for each. If it is possible to make the character perform different actions by preparing a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36, the positions of the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 and the type of the character are arbitrary.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying the state in which the character is operating using the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 will be described.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for the concatenated object executed by the display CPU 131. The arithmetic processing for the concatenated object is executed in the effect arithmetic processing in step S3504 of the task processing (FIG. 62). Further, the arithmetic processing for the concatenated object is started when the data table corresponding to the game times in which the effect using the concatenated objects PC35 and PC36 is executed is set.

First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is being executed (the character is being displayed) based on the currently set data table. If the effect is not being executed, step S4502 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36. If it is not the start timing, the present calculation process is terminated as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S4503.

In step S4503, the start designation information of the concatenated object effect is stored, and in the subsequent step S4504, the first concatenated object PC35 and the second concatenated object PC36 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table. do. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S4504, the process for starting control is completed for both the connected objects PC35 and PC36 in the setting process for starting control immediately before (step S3501). Further, the information for controlling the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 whose control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the current series of effects using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 are completed.

In the following step S4505, various parameters of the first concatenated object PC35 are calculated to update the control information related to the first concatenated object PC35. Further, in step S4506, various parameters of the second connected object PC36 are calculated to update the control information related to the second connected object PC36.

In the following step S4507, the designated information of the first production period is stored. Here, the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is divided into a plurality of types of effect periods, specifically, a first effect period, a second effect period, and a third effect period. Then, during the first effect period and the third effect period, the character is displayed using the first connected object PC35, and during the second effect period, the character is displayed using the second connected object PC36. After that, in step S4508, the parameters of the first connected object PC35 of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set so as to be specified in the drawing list this time.

In the following step S4509, based on the currently set data table, another object for the first effect period and the object to be updated this time is grasped. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process in step S4509, the process for starting control is completed for the object to be updated this time in the setting process for starting control immediately before (step S3501). After that, in step S4510, various parameters of the other objects grasped above are calculated to update the control information related to these other objects, and then this calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for the concatenated object is executed as described above, both concatenated objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set. On the other hand, the parameters of the first concatenated object PC35 are set. Further, the start designation information of the connected object effect indicating that the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 should be started and the designated information of the first effect period indicating that it is the first effect period are set in the drawing list. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is being executed (step S4501: YES), is it during the first effect period based on the data table currently set in step S4511? Judge whether or not. If it is during the first effect period, the calculation process ends after the processes of steps S4504 to S4510 are executed. By the way, since this time is during the first production period, the first connected object PC35 performs a predetermined first operation (see FIG. 77A) as the first production period progresses. In addition, the parameter calculation is performed in step S4505.

When the arithmetic processing for the concatenated object is executed as described above, both concatenated objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set. On the other hand, the parameters of the first concatenated object PC35 are set. In addition, the designation information of the first effect period indicating that it is the first effect period is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S4511 that it is not in the first effect period, it is determined in step S4512 whether or not it is in the second effect period based on the currently set data table. When the second effect period is in progress, in step S4513, the first concatenated object PC35 and the second concatenated object PC36 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

In the following step S4514, various parameters of the first concatenated object PC35 are calculated to update the control information related to the first concatenated object PC35. Further, in step S4515, various parameters of the second concatenated object PC36 are calculated to update the control information related to the second concatenated object PC36. By the way, since the second production period is in progress this time, the second connected object PC36 performs a predetermined second operation (see FIG. 77 (b)) as the second production period progresses. In addition, the parameter calculation is performed in step S4515.

In the following step S4516, the designation information of the second effect period is stored, and in step S4517, the parameters of the second connected object PC36 out of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 are specified in the drawing list this time. Set.

In the following step S4518, the object to be updated this time, which is another object for the second effect period, is grasped based on the currently set data table. Here, the second effect period is a state in which the effect is more developed than the first effect period, and at least the number of objects displayed when switching from the first effect period to the second effect period increases. The setting process for starting control (step S3501) for the object increased by the amount increased when switching from the first effect period to the second effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process in step S4518. After that, in step S4519, various parameters of the other objects grasped above are calculated to update the control information related to these other objects, and then this calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for the concatenated object is executed as described above, both concatenated objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set. On the other hand, the parameters of the second concatenated object PC36 are set. Further, the designation information of the second effect period indicating that it is the second effect period is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S4512 that it is not in the second effect period, it means that it is in the third effect period, so the process proceeds to step S4520. In step S4520, the first concatenated object PC35 and the second concatenated object PC36 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

In the following step S4521, various parameters of the first concatenated object PC35 are calculated to update the control information related to the first concatenated object PC35. By the way, since the third effect period is in progress this time, the first connected object PC35 performs a predetermined first operation (see FIG. 77 (a)) as the third effect period progresses. In addition, the parameter calculation is performed in step S4521. Further, in step S4522, various parameters of the second connected object PC36 are calculated to update the control information related to the second connected object PC36.

In the following step S4523, the designation information of the third effect period is stored, and in step S4524, the parameters of the first connected object PC35 of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 are specified in the drawing list this time. Set.

In the following step S4525, based on the currently set data table, another object for the third effect period and the object to be updated this time is grasped. Here, the third effect period is a state in which the effect is more developed than the second effect period, and at least the number of objects displayed when switching from the second effect period to the third effect period increases. The setting process for starting control (step S3501) for the object increased by the amount increased when switching from the second effect period to the third effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process in step S4525. After that, in step S4526, various parameters of the other objects grasped above are calculated to update the control information related to these other objects, and then this calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for the concatenated object is executed as described above, both concatenated objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set. On the other hand, the parameters of the first concatenated object PC35 are set. In addition, the designation information of the third effect period indicating that it is the third effect period is set in the drawing list.

Next, the setting process for the connected object effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 79. The setting process for the effect of the connected object is executed in the setting process for the effect in step S3603 in the drawing process (FIG. 64). Further, the setting process for the concatenated object effect is activated when any of the start designation of the concatenated object effect and the designation of the first effect period to the third effect period is set in the drawing list this time.

First, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not the start designation of the concatenated object effect is set in the drawing list this time. If it is set, in step S4602, based on the current drawing list, the address to which the first concatenated object PC35 is pre-transferred in the VRAM 134 is grasped, and the first concatenated object PC35 is read out. .. Further, in step S4603, based on the current drawing list, the address to which the second concatenated object PC36 is pre-transferred in the VRAM 134 is grasped, and the second concatenated object PC36 is read out.

In the following step S4604, a uniform α value setting process for the first effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first concatenated object PC35 is set to "1" which is opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second concatenated object PC36 is set to "0" which is completely transparent information. do. As a result, the preset color information (including the α value information set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied to all the pixels of the first concatenated object PC35 as it is, whereas the first one is applied. The α value of "0" is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the concatenated object PC36 of 2.

In the following step S4605, the parameters specified for the first concatenated object PC35 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of both concatenated objects PC35 and PC36. After that, in step S4606, the setting process for both connected objects PC35 and PC36 in the world coordinate system is executed.

Since this time is the processing time related to the start designation of the concatenated object effect, both concatenated objects PC35 and PC36 are arranged in the world coordinate system. Further, although the shapes of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 are substantially the same, the connected portions of the component objects are different. Then, even if the parameters of the first concatenated object PC35 are applied to the second concatenated object PC36 as they are, some pixels whose coordinate specifications do not match will occur, but for such pixels, a predetermined adjustment is performed on the VDP135 side. ..

In the following step S4607, other objects for the first effect period specified in the drawing list this time are grasped, and in step S4608, various parameters designated for the objects are grasped. After that, in step S4609, after executing the setting process for the world coordinate system for the object, the setting process for the present connected object effect is terminated.

By executing the setting process for producing the connected object as described above, the arrangement of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 is started at the same time with respect to the world coordinate system. Further, since the same parameters are applied to both connected objects PC35 and PC36, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are arranged so as to overlap each other at the same position in the world coordinate system. However, since the process of step S4604 is executed, the second concatenated object PC36 is treated as a completely transparent object at the time of rendering, so that the first concatenated object of the two concatenated objects PC35 and PC36 is displayed on the display screen G. Only PC35 is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4601 that the start designation of the concatenated object effect is not set in the drawing list this time, the process proceeds to step S4610. In step S4610, it is determined whether or not the designation of the first effect period is set in the drawing list this time.

If it is set, the present setting process ends after the processes of steps S4604 to S4609 are executed. In this case, in step S4606, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are grasped from the parameter information set corresponding to the first connected object PC35 in the drawing list. Update.

By executing the setting process for the effect of the connected object as described above, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are updated, but since the process of step S4604 is executed, both connected objects are displayed on the display screen G. Of the objects PC35 and PC36, only the first concatenated object PC35 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S4605 corresponds to the first connection object PC35, the first connection is performed so that the display screen G performs the first operation as the first effect period progresses. The object PC35 is displayed.

If it is determined in step S4610 that the designation of the first effect period is not set in the drawing list this time, the process proceeds to step S4611. In step S4611, it is determined whether or not the designation of the second effect period is set in the drawing list this time.

If it is set, in step S4612, a uniform α value setting process for the second effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first concatenated object PC35 is set to "0" which is completely transparent information, and the uniform α value of the second concatenated object PC36 is set to "1" which is opaque information. do. As a result, the preset color information (including the α value information set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is to all the pixels of the second concatenated object PC36, whereas the second connection object PC36 is the first. The α value of "0" is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the concatenated object PC35 of 1.

In the following step S4613, the parameters specified for the second concatenated object PC36 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of both concatenated objects PC35 and PC36. After that, in step S4614, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for both the connected objects PC35 and PC36.

Since this time is the processing time related to the update of the second production period, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are set corresponding to the second connected object PC36 in the drawing list. It is grasped from the information of the parameter that is being used and updated. In this case, the shapes of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 are substantially the same, but the connected portions of the component objects are different. Then, even if the parameters of the second concatenated object PC36 are applied to the first concatenated object PC35 as they are, some pixels whose coordinate specifications do not match will occur, but for such pixels, a predetermined adjustment is performed on the VDP135 side. ..

In the following step S4615, another object for the second effect period specified in the drawing list this time is grasped, and in step S4616, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. After that, in step S4617, after executing the setting process for the world coordinate system for the object, the setting process for the present connected object effect is terminated. Here, when the current processing time is the timing related to the switching from the first effect period to the second effect period, the number of displayed objects increases, and therefore, in step S4617, the corresponding process is executed. ..

By executing the setting process for the effect of the connected object as described above, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are updated, but since the process of step S4612 is executed, both connected objects are displayed on the display screen G. Of the objects PC35 and PC36, only the second concatenated object PC36 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S4613 corresponds to the second connected object PC36, the second connection is performed so that the display screen G performs the second operation as the second effect period progresses. The object PC36 is displayed.

If it is determined in step S4611 that the designation of the second effect period is not set in the current drawing list, it means that the designation of the third effect period is set in the current drawing list. The process proceeds to step S4618.

In step S4618, a uniform α value setting process for the third effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first concatenated object PC35 is set to "1" which is opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second concatenated object PC36 is set to "0" which is completely transparent information. do. As a result, the preset color information (including the α value information set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied to all the pixels of the first concatenated object PC35 as it is, whereas the first one is applied. The α value of "0" is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the concatenated object PC36 of 2.

In the following step S4619, the parameters specified for the first concatenated object PC35 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of both concatenated objects PC35 and PC36. After that, in step S4620, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for both the connected objects PC35 and PC36.

Since this time is the processing time related to the update of the third production period, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are set corresponding to the first connected object PC35 in the drawing list. It is grasped from the information of the parameter that is being used and updated.

In the following step S4621, another object for the third effect period specified in the drawing list this time is grasped, and in step S4622, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. After that, in step S4623, after executing the setting process for the world coordinate system for the object, the setting process for the present connected object effect is terminated. Here, when the current processing time is the timing related to the switching from the second effect period to the third effect period, the number of displayed objects increases, and therefore, in step S4623, the corresponding process is executed. ..

By executing the setting process for the effect of the connected object as described above, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are updated, but since the process of step S4618 is executed, both connected objects are displayed on the display screen G. Of the objects PC35 and PC36, only the first concatenated object PC35 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S4619 corresponds to the first connection object PC35, the first connection is performed so that the display screen G performs the first operation as the third effect period progresses. The object PC35 is displayed.

Next, the contents of the connected object effect will be described with reference to FIG. 80.

FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the connected object effect. Further, FIG. 80 (a) shows a first effect period, FIG. 80 (b) shows a second effect period, and FIG. 80 (c) shows a third effect period. Note that FIGS. 80 (a-1), (b-1), and (c-1) are image diagrams of the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 80 (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2) are. The display screen G is shown. Further, although the background image and the design are omitted in FIGS. 80 (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2), the background image is actually displayed behind the image for each production. At the same time, the design is displayed on the front side.

In the first effect period, as shown in FIG. 80 (a-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but the second connected object PC36 is subjected to the transparency process. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80 (a-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the first connected object PC35 is displayed on the display screen G, and the first operation is performed as the first effect period progresses. .. Further, as images corresponding to other objects, the characters CH13 to CH15 shown in "A" to "C" are displayed.

In the second effect period, as shown in FIG. 80 (b-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but the first connected object PC35 is subjected to the transparency process. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80 (b-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the second connected object PC36 is displayed on the display screen G, and the second operation is performed as the second effect period progresses. ..

Here, when comparing FIGS. 80 (a-2) and 80 (b-2), both characters CH12 are shown as having different shapes, but in reality, both connected objects PC35, The same texture is mapped to the PC36, and the connecting portion (joint portion) becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even if the first effect period is switched to the second effect period, the same, substantially the same, or similar images are displayed on the display screen G for the character CH12, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the switch. .. However, if it is difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of switching, textures may be set individually for both connected objects PC35 and PC36.

Further, in the second effect period, the characters CH13 to CH17 shown in "A" to "E" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of the characters CH13 to CH17 is larger than that in the case of the first effect period.

In the third effect period, as shown in FIG. 80 (c-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but the second connected object PC36 is subjected to the transparency process. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80 (c-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the first connected object PC35 is displayed on the display screen G, and the first operation is performed as the third effect period progresses. .. Further, in the third effect period, the characters CH13 to CH19 represented by "A" to "G" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of the characters CH13 to CH19 is larger than that in the case of the second effect period.

As described above, since a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set for a common character, it is possible to switch the connected objects PC35 and PC36 to be displayed according to the type of operation using the joint portion. .. For example, if a plurality of types of operations are to be performed on a single connected object, it becomes necessary to set a corresponding number of connected parts and component objects for the single connected object. Then, the data capacity of one image data becomes large, and there is a concern that the capacity that can be stored as a single image data in the NAND flash memory 162 will be exceeded. There is a concern that the processing time and transfer time will be longer in handling. On the other hand, since the plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of operations without causing the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In addition, there are many opportunities to modify the production at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and if the overall movement of the connected object is reviewed each time the movement of the character is modified, the time required for the design will be long. turn into. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 according to the type of operation to be performed as described above, even if it becomes necessary to modify the effect, the already created connected object PC35 , It is not necessary to modify all of PC36. Therefore, it is possible to make the character perform a plurality of types of operations while making it possible to design the pachinko machine 10 satisfactorily.

Further, not only the switching source object but also the switching destination object is controlled by the display CPU 131 before the timing when the connected object is switched to display the character, and is arranged in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135. Be targeted. As a result, when the switching timing is reached, the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 do not execute the control start processing for the switching destination object, but execute the control update processing having a smaller processing load than the control start processing. Therefore, the processing load at the switching timing is reduced.

In particular, at the switching timing, the effect is developed and the number of displayed objects is increased, so that the processing load is relatively large for the display CPU 131 and VDP 135. In this case, assuming a configuration in which control start processing is performed on the switching destination object, there is a concern that processing omission may occur in the display CPU 131 and VDP 135. However, as described above, control update processing is performed on the switching destination object. Since it may be executed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the processing omission.

Further, since both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system and the uniform α value to be applied is switched between completely transparent information and non-transparent information, the display CPU 131 has a uniform α value for switching between the two. Switching designation may be performed, and in VDP135, the uniform α value to be applied may be switched according to the designation. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned excellent effects while suppressing the complexity of the processing configurations of the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135.

Further, the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 are provided with only the parameter information for the connected object to be displayed among the connected objects PC35 and PC36 that are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system. As a result, the amount of data set in the drawing list can be reduced. Further, in VDP135, since the parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 may be updated in the same manner, the processing load of VDP135 can be reduced.

In addition, in the switching between the first effect period and the third effect period, instead of or in addition to the increase in the number of characters, the operation of the character for effect different from the character for which the above-mentioned plurality of connected objects are prepared is performed. The configuration may be newly added, or may be a configuration in which the display of the character for production, which has a large processing load, is started separately from the character in which the plurality of connected objects are prepared.

Further, the control start timing in the display CPU 131 of the second connected object PC 36 and the control start timing in the VDP 135 do not have to be the same as those of the first connected object PC 35. For example, the timing may be before the switching timing from the first effect period to the second effect period, but after the control start timing of the first connected object PC35.

Further, although the processing load at the switching timing of the effect period increases as compared with the above configuration, the control of the second connected object PC 36 may be started at the switching timing. In this case, since the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are not arranged at the same time in the world coordinate system, it is not necessary to uniformly adjust the α value to switch the display target.

Further, for both connected objects PC35 and PC36 simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, the display target may be switched not by uniformly adjusting the α value, but by switching the rendering target. In this case, since the connected object on the side that is not the display target is not rendered, the processing load at the time of rendering is reduced as compared with the above configuration.

Further, the configuration may be such that the third production period is not provided, or the production period may be set to be equal to or longer than the fourth production period. Further, a configuration in which three or more connected objects are prepared for one character may be used.

Further, the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 may have a configuration in which the number of connected portions is different instead of the configuration in which the connected portions are different. In this configuration, the processing load when the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are arranged and controlled in the world coordinate system is different. In this case, the connected objects PC35 and PC36 are not arranged in the world coordinate system at the same time. Then, at the update timing in which the processing load is small due to the relationship between the characters other than the characters represented by the connected objects PC35 and PC36 and the background image, the side of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 having the larger processing load during control is used. On the other hand, at the update timing where the processing load is large due to the character and the background image, it is preferable to use the side of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 where the processing load is small during control.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

As described with reference to FIGS. 66-70, the Z-buffer 143 can be used to mask the object. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform the mask calculation on the program of the display CPU 131, and it is not necessary to set the mask data which is a kind of image data in the VDP 135. Therefore, the mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity required for storing the image data.

As described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 76, the drawing data for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode is separately stored, and is sent to the player's production operation device 48 in a situation where the processing load of the VDP 135 is large. When the display mode is switched based on the operation of, the separately saved data is used. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing omissions even when the display mode switching is repeatedly executed in a short time.

As described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80, since a plurality of connection objects PC35 and PC36 are set for a common character, the connection to be displayed according to the type of movement using the joint portion. The objects PC35 and PC36 can be switched. For example, if a plurality of types of operations are to be performed on a single connected object, it becomes necessary to set a corresponding number of connected parts and component objects for the single connected object. Then, the data capacity of one image data becomes large, and there is a concern that the capacity that can be stored as a single image data in the NAND flash memory 162 will be exceeded. There is a concern that the processing time and transfer time will be longer in handling. On the other hand, since the plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of operations without causing the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In addition, there are many opportunities to modify the production at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and if the overall movement of the connected object is reviewed each time the movement of the character is modified, the time required for the design will be long. turn into. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 according to the type of operation to be performed as described above, even if it becomes necessary to modify the effect, the already created connected object PC35 , It is not necessary to modify all of PC36. Therefore, it is possible to make the character perform a plurality of types of operations while making it possible to design the pachinko machine 10 satisfactorily.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the display control device 190 is different from each of the above-described embodiments. FIG. 81 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the display control device 190.

As shown in FIG. 81, the display control board 191 of the display control device 190 is provided with a first display CPU 193 and a second display CPU 194 as control means for creating a drawing list and transmitting the drawing list to the VDP 192. Further, a management CPU 195 is provided to control the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194.

The management CPU 195 determines the content of the effect based on the instruction from the voice emission control device 60 received through the input port 196, and based on the determination result, one frame is provided for each of the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194. It provides the base information for determining the content of the image. Information corresponding to different frames is provided to the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194, and the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194 correspond to an image for one frame based on the received information. The drawing list is transmitted to VDP192.

The control program of each CPU 193 to 195 is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory of the memory module 197, and is pre-transferred to the work RAM 198 based on the transfer instruction from the management CPU 195 by the timing required by each CPU 193 to 195. NS. Each CPU 193 to 195 executes various processes while accessing the work RAM 198. Further, the image data is stored in the memory module 197 in advance, and the image data is pre-transferred to the expansion buffer 202 of the VRAM 201 based on the transfer instruction from the management CPU 195 by the timing required by the VDP 192. ..

The VDP 192 is provided with a first drawing unit 203 and a second drawing unit 204 in a one-to-one correspondence with the display CPUs 193 and 194. The drawing list transmitted from the first display CPU 193 is transmitted to the first drawing unit 203, and the drawing list transmitted from the second display CPU 194 is transmitted to the second drawing unit 204. Here, the drawing units 203 and 204 may be for 2D display as in the first embodiment, or may be for 3D display as in the second embodiment.

Each of the drawing units 203 and 204 operates individually and simultaneously, and creates drawing data for one frame corresponding to the received drawing list in the VRAM 201. The frame buffer 205 of the VRAM 201 is provided with a first frame area 206, a second frame area 207, and a third frame area 208, and drawing data by the drawing units 203 and 204 is stored in any of the frame areas 206 to 208. It is drawn.

Each drawing unit 203, 204 and each frame area 206 to 208 are connected through a selector unit 211, and the drawing target of each drawing unit 203, 204 is set to one of the frame areas 206 to 208 by the selector unit 211. NS. Further, not only the drawing units 203 and 204 but also the display circuit 212 is connected to the selector unit 211, and the frame areas 206 to 208 to which the image signal is output by the display circuit 212 are also switched by the selector unit 211.

In the above configuration, the drawing units 203 and 204 use the drawing period of two frames to create drawing data in each frame area 206 to 208, and when compared between the drawing units 203 and 204, one frame is used. The drawing data is created by shifting the drawing period of. That is, the creation of drawing data is completed every drawing period for one frame. Then, at each update timing, the display circuit 212 outputs the image signal by targeting the frame areas that are not the drawing targets of the drawing units 203 and 204 as the output target. By creating the drawing data by the triple buffer method in this way, the image is updated every time the update timing for one frame is reached, while the drawing period for two frames is secured as the drawing data creation period for one frame. Can be made to. Therefore, as compared with each of the above-described embodiments, a margin is created in the drawing data creation period, and even in a configuration in which a complicated image or a large screen image is displayed, the image can be displayed satisfactorily.

In the above configuration, the first drawing unit 203 alternately creates drawing data for one frame for the first frame area 206 and the second frame area 207 in the drawing period for one frame, and the second drawing unit 204. May be configured to create drawing data for one frame with respect to the third frame area 208 in a drawing period for a plurality of frames. In this case, the drawing data can be basically created by the double buffer method, and the drawing data corresponding to a particularly complicated image can be created over a drawing period for a plurality of frames.

Further, the number of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit may be two, and the frame area may be provided with four or more, and the number of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit may be three. In addition, the configuration may be such that four or more frame areas are provided, or the number of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit may be five and six or more frame areas may be provided. .. That is, by providing a plurality of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit and providing a frame area equal to or more than the number of combinations added by 1, drawing data for one frame is created by using the drawing period for a plurality of frames. be able to.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the arithmetic processing for the background executed by the display CPU 131 is different from that of the second embodiment. The arithmetic processing for the background will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 82.

First, in step S4701, the rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S4702, various parameters of the grasped rearmost image are calculated to update the control information. In the following step S4703, the object to be updated for the background is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S4704, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated and the control information is updated.

After that, in step S4705, it is determined whether or not the current processing time is the processing time for creating the drawing list corresponding to the frame at the timing immediately before the development effect, based on the currently set data table. ..

The development effect is at least one of an effect in which the number of characters for the effect increases, an effect in which the action of the character for the effect is newly added, and an effect in which the character for the effect with a large processing load is displayed. It is a production corresponding to. Further, in the development effect, the object grasping process corresponding to the development effect and the information update process for controlling the object are executed in the effect calculation process (step S3504) in the task process (FIG. 62) of the display CPU 131. At the same time, in the setting process (step S3603) for the effect in the drawing process (FIG. 64) of the VDP 135, the geometry calculation and the rendering as described above for the object corresponding to the development effect are performed.

If it is determined in step S4705 that the timing is immediately before the development effect, the calculation process ends after storing the execution designation information separately saved in step S4706.

When the calculation process for the background is executed as described above, the image data for the background corresponding to the timing immediately before the development effect is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and the image data for the background is set. Execution specification information for separate storage is set. By executing the background drawing data creation process (FIG. 75) in the second embodiment on the VDP135, the background drawing data corresponding to the timing immediately before the development effect is separately saved for this drawing list. Will be done. In this case, in the present embodiment, the VRAM 134 is provided with a separate storage buffer instead of the mode buffer 145, and the drawing data for the background is separately stored in the separate storage buffer.

If it is determined in step S4705 in the background calculation process (FIG. 82) that the timing is not immediately before the development effect, the development effect is being performed based on the currently set data table in step S4707. Judge whether or not. If the development effect is not in progress, this calculation process is terminated as it is. In this case, by outputting the drawing list corresponding to the drawing list, the VDP135 creates the drawing data for the background as usual using the designated rearmost image and the object.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4707 that the development effect is in progress, the calculation process ends after storing the usage designation information of the separately saved data in step S4708.

When the calculation process for the background is executed as described above, at least the usage designation information of the separately saved data is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. By executing the background drawing data creation process (FIG. 75) in the VDP 135 for this drawing list, at least the background drawing data is not rendered. The drawing data for the background saved separately is diverted as the drawing data for the background during the development effect.

According to the above configuration, the rendering of the drawing data for the background is omitted in the situation where the processing load for displaying the character for the effect is large. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the processing load of the VDP 135 becomes extremely large and the processing is dropped in the situation where the development effect is performed.

Further, the drawing data for the background, which is saved separately, corresponds to the background image displayed in the frame immediately before the development effect is started. As a result, even if the background image is diverted during the development production, it becomes difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

If the background image is an image that is displayed so as to be scrolled in a predetermined direction over a display period of a plurality of frames, the scroll display is performed until immediately before the development effect, and the scroll display is displayed during the development effect. It will be in a stopped state.

Further, in the above processing configuration, the display CPU 131 may not perform parameter calculation and update on the background image data during the development effect, and the VDP 135 may not perform the geometry calculation. In this case, the processing load can be further reduced.

<Supplementary explanation>
Here, a supplementary explanation of the processing configuration executed by the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 in each of the above embodiments will be given with reference to the flowchart.

<First processing configuration>
First, regarding the processing content when the reading processing, the game time control processing, and the game state transition processing, which are a part of the processing necessary for advancing the game, are set to be distributed between the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing. explain.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This process is periodically started by the MPU 52 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S4801, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various winning detection sensors are read, the states of the various winning detection sensors are determined, and the winning detection information is saved. Further, when the winning of the game ball is detected by the winning detection sensor corresponding to the generation of the prize ball, the prize ball command for instructing the payout control device 55 to pay out the prize ball is set.

In the following step S4802, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0.

In the following step S4803, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values, they are cleared to 0, respectively.

In the following step S4804, a winning process for through winning is executed in association with winning the through gate 25. In the winning process for through, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S4804 is set to electric service hold on condition that the number of accessory hold stored in the electric service hold area is less than 4. Store in the area.

After that, in step S4805, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 23 and 24 is executed. In the winning process for the operating port, when a winning is generated in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24, the number of start-holding storages stored in the holding ball storage area 54b is the upper limit number (for example, ". 4 ”) The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S4803 is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 54b on condition that the number is less than the above. .. In this case, it is stored in the first hold area of the free hold areas RE1 to RE4 of the hold area RE, that is, the hold area corresponding to the current number of start hold storages. After executing the process of step S4805, the timer interrupt process ends. Incidentally, the process of step S4805 corresponds to the process of acquiring the pending information described in the first embodiment.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing normal processing. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S4901 to S4909 are executed as processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S4910 and S4911 are executed in the remaining time.

In step S4901, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 55. If a predetermined effect command is set, it is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60.

In the following step S4902, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0.

In the following step S4903, the game time control process for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In this game time control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 31, display control of the main display unit 33, and the like are performed.

After that, in step S4904, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. In the game state transition process, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot winning is completed, the transition process to the open / close execution mode is executed, and the open / close process of the variable winning device 22 is started. When starting the open / close execution mode, during the open / close execution mode, ending the open / close execution mode, etc., various commands for the open / close execution mode are transmitted to the voice emission control device 60. In addition, when the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode are changed according to the jackpot type related to the game times that triggered the start of the mode.

In the following step S4905, the demo display process is executed. In the demo display process, a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) for starting the demo elapses without starting a new game round after the end of the game round in a situation where the open / close execution mode is not in progress. Executes the determination process of whether or not it has been done. Further, after the power supply to the MPU 52 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) for starting the demonstration has elapsed without starting a new game round. The determination process of whether or not it has been performed is executed. Then, when it is determined that the elapse has passed, a command for displaying a demo is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60.

In the following step S4906, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 24a provided in the lower operating port 24 is executed. In this electric service support process, the information stored in the electric service holding area 54c of the RAM 54 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 24a, open / close processing of the electric accessory 24a, and for the accessory. Display control of the display unit 34 and the like are performed.

After that, in step S4907, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 58 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 57. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In the following step S4908, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the RAM 54. The power failure flag is a flag that is stored when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed and is deleted in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not stored, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S4909, that is, the previous time. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

That is, in step S4910, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Further, in step S4911, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is added by 1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S4901 to S4907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4908 that the power failure flag is stored, the power supply is cut off, so the power failure processing after step S4912 is executed. That is, in step S4912, the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then the RAM determination value is calculated and saved in step S4913, access to the RAM 54 is prohibited in step S4914, and then the power supply is completely shut off for processing. Continues an infinite loop until it can no longer be executed.

Next, the game times control process in step S4903 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 85 and the like.

In the game times control process, first, in step S5001, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the game turn control process is terminated without executing the processes after step S5002. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the operating ports 23 and 24 have been won.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S5002 whether or not the main display unit 33 is in the variable display. If the main display unit 33 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S5003 to S5005.

In the game round start process, first, in step S5003, it is determined whether or not the start reserved ball number N is "0". When the starting reserved ball number N is "0", it means that the reserved ball storage area 54b does not store the reserved information. Therefore, the main game times control process is terminated as it is.

If the number of starting reserved balls N is not "0", the data setting process for setting the data stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 54b for variable display is executed in step S5004. Specifically, the data stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE is shifted to the execution area AE. After that, the data stored in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Then, after executing the fluctuation start process in step S5005, the game turn control process is terminated.

Here, the fluctuation start processing of step S5005 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S5101, a hit / fail determination process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the current fluctuation start process corresponds to the jackpot winning is executed. Specifically, among the pending information shifted to the execution area AE, the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 and the winning / failing table corresponding to the current winning / losing lottery mode are referred to to determine whether or not the jackpot is won. judge. Incidentally, the process of step S5101 corresponds to the win / fail lottery process described in the first embodiment.

In the following step S5102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won. If the jackpot is won, the type determination process is executed in step S5103. In the type determination process, the jackpot type is specified by referring to the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 and the distribution table among the pending information shifted to the execution area AE.

In the following step S5104, the stop result setting process corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 in the game times related to the start of the fluctuation this time is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 53. The specified information is stored in the RAM 54. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 is set differently for each type of the jackpot result, and in step S5104, it is specified in step S5103. The RAM 54 stores information on the mode of the pattern according to the type of jackpot result.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5102 that the jackpot is not won, in step S5105, the stop result setting process for the case of a loss is executed. Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 in the game round related to the start of the fluctuation this time is specified from the stop result table for the time of disconnection stored in advance in the ROM 53. The specified information is stored in the RAM 54. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After executing the process of step S5104 or step S5105, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S5106.

In such a process, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 54a of the RAM 54 is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 31 in this game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the fluctuation this time are the big hit results, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, even if it is not a big hit result, if the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the variation display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the variation display time table for the reach generation stored in the ROM 53, and the variation is obtained. The display time information is set in the variable display time counter provided in the RAM 54. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the variation display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the variation display time table for non-reach storage stored in the ROM 53. Then, the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter. Incidentally, the variable display time that can be acquired by referring to the non-reach variable display time table is different from the variable display time that can be acquired by referring to the reach generated variable display time table.

The fluctuation display time information when the reach does not occur is set so that the larger the number of start-holding balls N, the shorter the fluctuation display time. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach is not selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable display time table for occurrence is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display time may not fluctuate according to the number of start-holding balls N and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. Further, in the case of various jackpot results, a variable display time table may be set individually for each of the case of off-reach and the case of non-reach.

After executing the variation display time setting process in step S5106, the variation command and the type command are set in step S5107. The fluctuation command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time acquired by referring to the non-reach variable display time table is different from the variable display time acquired by referring to the reach generated variable display time table, and therefore varies. Even if the command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, the voice emission control device 60, which is a control device on the sub side, can specify the presence or absence of reach occurrence from the information on the fluctuation display time. In this respect, it can be said that the variable command contains information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes any one of the normal jackpot result information, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, the 15R probability variation jackpot result information, and the deviation result information as the game result information.

The variation command and the type command set in step S5107 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 60 in step S4901 in the normal process (FIG. 84). After the process of step S5107 is executed, the variable display of the pattern is started on the main display unit 33 in step S5108. After that, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 85), when the main display unit 33 is in the variable display, the processes of steps S5006 to S5009 are executed. In this process, first, in step S5006, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game times has elapsed.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S5007. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 33 is changed. After that, the game times control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S5008. In the variable end processing, the information stored in the RAM 54 in the process of step S5104 or step S5105 is specified, and the main display unit 33 is displayed so that the mode of the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 33. Display control.

In the following step S5009, a variable end command is set. The variable end command set here is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60 in step S4901 in the normal process (FIG. 84). The voice emission control device 60 ends the effect in the game round based on the received variable end command. Further, a command corresponding to the command is transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 to the display control device 70, and the display control device 70 makes a definite display (final stop display) of the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round. After that, the game times control process is terminated.

<Second processing configuration>
Next, the processing contents when the reading process, the game time control process, and the game state transition process, which are a part of the processes necessary for advancing the game, are integrated into the timer interrupt process will be described.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 when the supply of operating power is started.

First, in step S5201, the start-up process accompanying the power-on is executed. In the following step S5202, access to the RAM 54 is permitted. After that, in step S5203, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply and the firing control device 57 is turned on, and in the following step S5204, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the RAM 54. Further, in step S5205, the RAM determination value is calculated, and in the subsequent step S5206, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined.

If the RAM erase switch is not turned on, the power failure flag is stored, and the RAM determination value is normal, the power failure flag is erased from the RAM 54 in step S5207, and the RAM is cleared in step S5208. Erase the judgment value. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S5209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S5210, and the variation type counter CS is updated in step S5211. Then, after executing the processes of steps S5209 to S5211, the process returns to step S5209, and the processes of steps S5209 to S5211 are repeated.

It should be noted that the interrupt may be disabled immediately after the interrupt enable is set in step S5209. In this case, the timer interrupt processing described later may be configured to wait for execution until the next interrupt enable setting is made when the start timing comes in the situation where the interrupt disable setting is set. ..

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to steps S5212 to S5213. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the data stored and held is confirmed by the RAM determination value, the process proceeds to the process of steps S5212 to S5213 in the same manner.

In step S5212, the used area of the RAM 54 is cleared to "0", and in step S5213, the initial setting of the RAM 54 is executed. After that, the process proceeds from step S5209 to step S5211.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 52 of the main control device 50.

In the timer interrupt processing, in steps S5301 to S5305, the same processing as in steps S4801 to S4805 of the first processing configuration is executed.

After that, in step S5306, the variation type counter CS update process is executed, in step S5307, the game times control process is executed, in step S5308, the game state transition process is executed, and in step S5309, the demo display process is executed. Is executed, the electric service support process is executed in step S5310, the game ball launch control process is executed in step S5311, and the external output process is executed in step S5312. After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated. The detailed contents of each of these processes are the same as in the case of the first process configuration.

<Other Embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied independently to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied to the configuration of each of the above embodiments in a predetermined combination. Further, each of the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment not exemplified as an application target of the configuration.

(1) When the purpose is to improve the data read speed in the display CPUs 72, 131 and VDP 76, 135, the NAND flash memories 102, 162 are not used as the memory modules 74, 133, but NOR. A configuration related to data pre-transfer configuration and a configuration related to reading boot data from boot memories 119 and 179 may be applied to a configuration in which a memory capable of random access such as a type flash memory is used.

(2) Focusing on the effect that the initial setting process can proceed smoothly, the boot memories 119 and 179 are not provided, and the boot data is stored in the NAND flash memories 102 and 162. The boot data may be pre-transferred to the work RAMs 73 and 132 before the setting process is started. In this case, the display CPUs 72 and 131 may execute the wait process until the transfer of the boot data to the work RAMs 73 and 132 is completed. In the case of the above configuration, the time from the start timing of power supply to the display CPUs 72 and 131 to the actual start timing of the initial setting process is longer than that of each of the above embodiments, but the initial setting process cannot proceed smoothly. It will be possible.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the program data may be stored in advance in another randomly accessible memory provided separately from the NAND flash memories 102 and 162. Further, a part or all of the image data may be stored in advance in another randomly accessible memory provided separately from the NAND flash memories 102 and 162.

(4) The boot memories 119 and 179 may be provided separately from the memory modules 74 and 133. In this case, the signal path between the boot memories 119 and 179 and the display CPUs 72 and 131, the signal path between the memory modules 74 and 133 and the display CPUs 72 and 131, and the memory modules 74 and 133 and the RAMs 73 and 75, respectively. , 132, 134 can be provided separately to transfer data from the memory modules 74, 133 to the work RAMs 73, 132 and VRAM 75, 134 by using the period during which the boot data is being read into the display CPUs 72, 131. It will be possible.

(5) The program data of the initial setting process (FIG. 10) may be configured only by the boot data without requiring the data of the latter half part. In this case, it is necessary to increase the storage capacity required for the boot memories 119 and 179 as compared with each of the above embodiments, but it is not necessary to transfer the program data for the initial setting process during the initial setting process. Incidentally, in the configuration, it is necessary that the program data for instructing the transfer of the regular program data and the regular image data is set in the boot data.

(6) In addition to the memory modules 74 and 133, a memory for storing image data in advance may be provided. Specifically, regarding the configuration, a NOR type flash memory is provided as another memory, and the NOR type flash memory stores regular image data. Then, by connecting the NOR type flash memory to the VDPs 76 and 135, when displaying an image corresponding to the regular image data, the regular image data may be read from the NOR type flash memory. According to this configuration, it is necessary to provide a plurality of types of memories for storing image data in advance, but the regular image data can be supported without transferring the regular image data when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The displayed image can be displayed satisfactorily. Further, even in this configuration, only the regular image data is stored in the NOR flash memory, and the memory modules 74 and 133 store the image data for change whose data capacity tends to increase due to the diversification of the effects. With this configuration, it is sufficient to use a NOR type flash memory having a small storage capacity, so that the above effects can be achieved while reducing the cost. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the regular program data.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, when the backup power is not supplied to the RAMs of the display control devices 70 and 130 and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data group stored in the RAMs up to that point is stored. Instead of the configuration in which the RAM is destroyed or erased, a configuration in which backup power is supplied to the RAM may be used.

As a means for supplying the backup power, the power supply and the power generation control device 57 may also use the power supply unit during power failure to supply the backup power to the RAM 54 or the like of the main control device 50, and the power supply unit may be different from the power supply unit. A medium power supply unit may be provided.

(8) The storage means to which the program data and the image data are pre-transferred is a RAM which is a volatile storage means if the speed required for reading the data is faster than that of the NAND flash memories 102 and 162 and can be overwritten. Not limited.

(9) The configuration for pre-transferring program data and image data and the configuration for reading boot data from boot memories 119 and 179 may be applied to control devices other than the display control devices 70 and 130. For example, it may be applied to the voice emission control device 60. Further, it may be applied to the main control device 50, the payout control device 55, or the power supply and launch control device 57. Further, in a configuration in which a movable object for performing a game rotation operation is provided instead of the symbol display device 31, the above configuration may be applied to a control device for driving and controlling the movable object.

(10) With respect to an image displayed so as to perform a predetermined operation over a display period for a plurality of frames, after the operation in a predetermined order is reproduced in the forward direction, the image may be reproduced in reverse. .. In this case, since it is not necessary for the first operation and the last operation to have continuity, it is possible to facilitate the creation of image data at the design stage as compared with the case of loop reproduction.

(11) At the timing when the processing load on the display CPUs 72, 131 and VDP 76, 135 increases, such as when the character for production performs a complicated operation or when the character for production increases, it is called a character for background. The display of the character on the side that is not noticed may be continued, but the operation may not be updated. As a result, the processing load can be reduced.

(12) A plurality of image data for displaying a predetermined character may be set in the frame areas 82a and 82b at the same time. This makes it possible to display a plurality of characters while suppressing the number of image data to be stored in advance. Further, in this case, the image data may be flipped horizontally and set, or the coordinates may be set so that the timing of passing through the predetermined position is different when the effect of passing through the predetermined position is performed.

(13) The image data in which a plurality of effect images are combined may be stored in the memory module 74 in advance. In this case, the visual effect of the effect image can be enhanced while suppressing the increase in the processing load.

(14) In the second embodiment, the camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system, but instead of this, all the cameras (viewpoints) are arranged in the world coordinate system. A single camera may be set in common for the image data.

(15) In the second embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is projected in units of a background image, an effect image, and a pattern image, but is summarized in units of a background image and an effect image. It may be a configuration in which the images are projected together, a configuration in which the effect image and a pattern image are projected together, or a configuration in which all of them are projected together.

(16) In the second embodiment, when the texture mapping process is performed, the texture may be pasted only on the projected surface of a single object. In this case, the rendering processing load can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of performing texture mapping before projection, texture mapping may be performed after projection.

(17) In the second embodiment, the design may be displayed based on arranging the data obtained by pasting the two-dimensional image data on the plate polygon in the world coordinate system. In this case, by changing the vertex colors of the four corners of the plate polygon in order, the design may be displayed as if it is illuminated by light.

(18) In the second embodiment, by combining the camera work in the world coordinate system and the enlargement / reduction of the object, the moving distance of the character is displayed while displaying the predetermined character in a certain size. You may perform a display effect that makes it look longer.

(19) Focusing on the characteristic configuration related to the display control using the image data in each of the above embodiments, the NAND flash memories 102 and 162 are used as the storage means for storing the program data and the image data in advance. The configuration and the configuration that is pre-transferred to the RAMs 73, 75, 132, and 134 for reading are arbitrary, and a storage means capable of random access such as a NOR flash memory is used as a storage means for storing program data and image data in advance. The above-mentioned characteristic configuration related to display control may be applied to the configuration that is used or the configuration that does not have prior transfer to the RAMs 73, 75, 132, 134.

(20) The hold information relating to the winning of the upper operating port 23 and the holding information relating to the winning of the lower operating port 24 are stored separately, and the holding information relating to the winning of the lower operating port 24 has priority. A configuration that is digested may be applied, and conversely, a configuration in which the pending information relating to the winning of the upper operating port 23 is preferentially digested may be applied.

Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operating ports are not arranged vertically, but the first operating port corresponding to the upper operating port 23 and the second operating port corresponding to the lower operating port 24 are left and right. The configuration may be arranged side by side, or both of these operating ports may be arranged side by side at an angle. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 41, both operating ports may be arranged apart from each other so that only the winning of the first operating port or the winning of the second operating port can be aimed at.

Further, in the above configuration, the main display unit 33 has a first display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the hold information has been acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 23, and the acquisition based on the winning of the lower operating port 24. A second display area may be provided to display the result of the hit / fail determination of the held information. In this case, the variable display of the pattern in the first display area is based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 is subject to the hit / fail judgment or is subject to the hit / fail judgment. Is started, the stop result corresponding to the hit / fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display of one game is terminated. In addition, the variable display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area prior to the holding information acquired based on the winning of the lower operating port 24 or based on the fact that the winning / failing judgment is made. At the same time as the start, the stop result corresponding to the hit / fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display of one game is terminated.

(21) The player depends on the case where the hold information related to the winning of the upper operating port 23 is the target of the winning / failing judgment and the case where the holding information related to the winning of the lower operating port 24 is the target of the winning / failing judgment. May be configured in which the profits obtained are different. Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of operating ports are provided as in each of the above embodiments, the number of operating ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the configuration may be such that only one operating port is provided.

(22) Based on the command output from the main control device 50, instead of the configuration in which the display control devices 70 and 130 are controlled by the voice emission control device 60, based on the command output from the main control device 50. The display control devices 70 and 130 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 60. In this case, the display control devices 70 and 130 may determine the content of the effect based on the command output from the main control device 50. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used. In this case, the integrated control device may determine the content of the effect based on the command output from the main control device 50.

Further, one of the functions of the voice emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 may be integrated in the main control device 50, or both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 50. good. Further, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 50 to the voice emission control device 60 is also arbitrary.

Further, the target for electrically connecting the effect operation device 48 is not limited to the voice emission control device 60, and may be connected to, for example, the main control device 50, and is connected to the display control devices 70 and 130. It may have been done. However, since the operation of the effect operation device 48 is performed when selecting an effect, it is preferable that the operation device 48 is connected to a control device that determines the content of the effect. For example, in the configuration in which the display control devices 70 and 130 control the voice emission control device 60 as described above, it is preferable that the effect operation device 48 is connected to the display control devices 70 and 130. Further, in a configuration in which one control device in which the functions of the voice emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 are integrated is provided, the content of the effect is determined by the control device. , It is preferable that the effect operation device 48 is connected to the control device.

Further, in a control device that executes a predetermined process such as selection of an effect according to the operation status of the effect operation device 48, the operation of the effect operation device 48 is performed a plurality of times during a unit period. The configuration may be such that a filter means for reducing the number of times of recognizing is provided. For example, when the effect operating device 48 is operated once, the operation of the effect operation device 48 may be invalidated from the timing of recognizing the operation for a predetermined invalid period. ..

(23) A configuration including a display CPU and a VDP having both a function of displaying a two-dimensional image as in the first embodiment and a function of displaying a three-dimensional image as in the second embodiment. However, it may be configured to include both of the above functions and an element in which the functions of the display CPU and the VDP are integrated. In this case, it is possible to switch between the effect using the two-dimensional image as in the first embodiment and the effect using the three-dimensional image as in the second embodiment according to the progress of the game. It will be possible.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, every time the image of the display screen G is updated, a signal is output to all the dots of the display screen G and the setting of the image for one frame is repeated. There is no limitation, and signal output is performed for a part of the dots at a predetermined update timing (for example, 2 msec), the setting of a part of the image is repeated, and the above-mentioned predetermined update timing is A configuration may be configured in which signals are output to dots in other ranges at different update timings (for example, 4 msec) and the settings of the remaining images are repeated.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, as image data for displaying a specific type of character or a specific type of background image, the first image data having a relatively high processing load during use and the processing load during use are A relatively small second image data is set, and a specific type of individual image is displayed at the update timing when the processing load is small due to the relationship between the individual images other than the specific type of individual image corresponding to the image data. On the other hand, it is preferable to use the second image data in order to display the specific type of individual image at the update timing when the processing load is large due to the relationship between the individual images other than the specific type of individual image. .. For example, when high-resolution image data is set as the first image data and low-resolution image data is set as the second image data, the processing load for displaying an image for one frame is increased. With a small update timing, it is possible to display a specific type of individual image as a high-resolution image to improve the appearance of the specific type of individual image, while the processing load for displaying one frame of image. At the update timing with a large value, the appearance of the specific type of individual image is deteriorated, but the effect can be made flashy in relation to the other individual images.

(26) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels are provided as a plurality of orbiters with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and then stopped. A slot that gives the player benefits such as paying out medals when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window after the reel is stopped by operating the switch. The present invention can also be applied to machines. In this case, the present invention can be applied to various controls of the slot machine, and in a configuration provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in addition to the reel, the present invention is applied to control related to image display in the display control device. Can be applied.

In addition, a pachinko machine and a slot machine that are equipped with a take-in device and start rotating the reel by operating the start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which the above are fused.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A first storage means (NAND flash memory 102, 162) that stores information in advance, and a control means (display CPUs 72, 131) that executes specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with,
When the information read from the first storage means is stored and compared by reading information of the same capacity, the period required for reading the information is shorter than that when the information is read from the first storage means (second storage means). Work RAM 73, 132) and
A transfer means for reading specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means. (Controllers 101 and 161) and
When the initial start-up information used when the control means executes the initial start-up process based on the predetermined initial start-up state is stored in advance and the information is read out to the same capacity for comparison. The third storage means (boot memory 119,179), which requires a shorter period for reading information than the case of reading from the first storage means, and
With
The control means
Specific control execution means (a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading the specific information stored in the second storage means and executing the specific control, and
An initial execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S302 to S306 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) that reads the initial start-up information stored in the third storage means and executes the initial start-up process.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, the specific information is stored in the second storage means, which requires a shorter period for reading the information than when the information is read from the first storage means, at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means. The control means is configured to read the specific information stored in the second storage means and execute the specific control. Therefore, the time required for reading the specific information in the control means can be shortened, and the specific control can be smoothly performed.

Further, the initial start-up information used when executing the initial start-up process is stored in advance not in the first storage means but in a third storage means in which the period required for reading the information is shorter than when the information is read out from the first storage means. Has been done. Then, the initial start-up process is executed by reading the initial start-up information from the third storage means. As a result, when the initial startup process is executed, there is no waiting time for the second storage means to transfer the initial startup information. Therefore, from the initial startup state to the start of the initial startup process. Time can be shortened.

From the above, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the processing speed in executing the control.

The "first storage means" includes storage means used exclusively for reading information when the control means executes control, and storage and retention of information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Includes storage means to perform. This also applies to the following independent features.

Feature A2. A first storage means (NAND flash memory 102, 162) that stores information in advance, and a control means (display CPUs 72, 131) that executes specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with,
The first storage means has a NAND flash memory and has a NAND flash memory.
Further, when the information read from the first storage means is stored and compared by reading information of the same capacity, the period required for reading the information is shorter than that when reading from the first storage means. Means (work RAM 73, 132) and
A transfer means for reading specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means. (Controllers 101 and 161) and
When the initial start-up information used when the control means executes the initial start-up process based on the predetermined initial start-up state is stored in advance and the information is read out to the same capacity for comparison. The third storage means (boot memory 119,179), which requires a shorter period for reading information than the case of reading from the first storage means, and
With
The control means
Specific control execution means (a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading the specific information stored in the second storage means and executing the specific control, and
An initial execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S302 to S306 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) that reads the initial start-up information stored in the third storage means and executes the initial start-up process.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A2, since the NAND flash memory is used as the first storage means, it is easy to increase the capacity as compared with the configuration in which the NOR flash memory is used. Further, the specific information is stored in the second storage means in which the period required for reading the information is shorter than that in the case of reading from the first storage means at the timing before the specific control is executed by the control means, and the control means is stored. The configuration is such that specific control is executed using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even in a configuration in which a NAND flash memory that requires a relatively long period of reading is used as the first storage means, the time required to read the specific information in the control means can be shortened, and the specific control can be smoothly performed. be able to.

Further, the initial start-up information used when executing the initial start-up process is stored in advance not in the first storage means but in a third storage means in which the period required for reading the information is shorter than when the information is read out from the first storage means. Has been done. Then, the initial start-up process is executed by reading the initial start-up information from the third storage means. As a result, when the initial startup process is executed, there is no waiting time for the second storage means to transfer the initial startup information. Therefore, from the initial startup state to the start of the initial startup process. Time can be shortened.

From the above, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the processing speed in executing the control.

Feature A3. The specific control execution means starts the specific control after the execution of the initial activation process is completed.
Further, the initial activation information includes reference information for specific information indicating that the specific information should be read from the first storage means and transferred to the second storage means.
The initial execution means transfers the specific information to the second storage means by referring to the reference information for the specific information as at least a part of the initial activation process. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the processing (process of step S312 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) is executed.

According to the feature A3, since the information for transferring the specific information is set in the initial activation information, the transfer of the specific information necessary for performing the subsequent specific control during the execution of the initial activation process is performed. Instructions are given. Thereby, the specific control can be started satisfactorily.

Feature A4. The control means reads the post-boot information transferred to the second storage means, and executes the post-boot process after the initial boot process (steps S307 to 131 in the display CPUs 72 and 131). Further equipped with a function to execute the processing of S316)
The initial start-up information includes reference information for post-startup information indicating that the post-startup information should be read from the first storage means and transferred to the second storage means.
The initial execution means transfers the post-launch information to the second storage means by referring to the reference information for the post-launch information as at least a part of the initial start-up process. (Processing in step S304 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) is executed.
Further, when the execution of the initial start-up process and the post-start-up process is completed, the initial start-up setting based on the initial start-up state in the control means is completed, and the specific control execution is completed. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the means is to start the specific control when the execution of the initial start-up process and the post-start-up process is completed.

According to the feature A4, the information used for executing and completing the initial start setting in the control means is divided into the initial start information and the post-start information. Then, the initial activation information to be used first is stored in advance in the third storage means, and the post-activation information to be used later is stored in advance in the first storage means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the third storage means, as compared with the configuration in which the initial start-up information and the post-start-up information are collectively stored in the third storage means.

Further, even in this configuration, since the information for transferring the post-boot information is set in the initial boot information, it is necessary to perform the subsequent post-boot processing during the execution of the initial boot process. The necessary post-start information transfer instructions are given. As a result, the post-startup process can be started satisfactorily.

Feature A5. The initial activation information includes reference information for specific information indicating that the specific information should be read from the first storage means and transferred to the second storage means.
The post-startup execution means transfers the specific information to the second storage means by referring to the reference information for the specific information as at least a part of the post-startup process. The gaming machine according to feature A4, wherein the processing to be performed (the processing of step S312 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) is executed.

According to the feature A5, since the information for transferring the specific information is set in the initial startup information, the transfer of the specific information necessary for performing the subsequent specific control during the execution of the post-start processing is performed. Instructions are given. Thereby, the specific control can be started satisfactorily.

Feature A6. The transfer means selects a storage area corresponding to the transfer instruction information from a large number of storage areas included in the first storage means based on the transfer instruction information transmitted by the control means, and stores the selected storage area. It is provided with management means (controller CPUs 113 and 173) for reading information stored in advance in the area.
When the control means reads the initial activation information from the third storage means, the control means transmits the corresponding transfer instruction information to the management means, and the information is read from the third storage means based on the transmission instruction information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, which is characterized in that it is played.

According to the feature A6, since the management means is provided, the information is satisfactorily transferred from the first storage means in response to the transfer instruction from the control means. In this case, the control means may transmit the transfer instruction information to the management means even when reading the information from the third storage means. As a result, the transfer destinations of the transfer instruction information from the control means are aggregated, and the configuration related to the transfer instruction can be simplified.

Feature A7. The management means, the first storage means, and the third storage means are provided as storage modules (memory modules 74, 133) having a common port portion (I / F 111, 171) for the control means. The gaming machine according to the feature A6.

According to the feature A7, the control means is a common port of the storage module in both the case of giving the transfer instruction from the first storage means to the second storage means and the case of reading the information from the third storage means. The transfer instruction information may be transmitted to the unit. As a result, the transfer destinations of the transfer instruction information from the control means are aggregated, and the configuration related to the transfer instruction can be simplified.

Feature A8. The first storage means is a NAND flash memory.
The transfer means
Management information storage means (control ROMs 114, 174) that store management information in which the physical address information of the first storage means is associated with the logical address information transmitted by the control means.
By referring to the management information, a physical address specifying process for specifying a physical address corresponding to the information of the logical address transmitted by the control means is executed, and a large number of storage areas included in the first storage means are used. Among them, a management means (controller CPU 113, 173) that executes a read process for reading information from the storage area of the physical address specified by the physical address identification process, and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that

According to the feature A8, a defective block may occur in the NAND flash memory, but since the management means identifies the physical address for the logical address transmitted from the control means, the information from the NAND flash memory can be obtained. The reading is done well.

Feature A9. The transfer means stores the information read from the storage area of the first storage means corresponding to the information of the logical address, and the period required for reading the information is the period required for reading the information when compared by reading the information of the same capacity. When the storage means (cache memories 117, 177) shorter than the case of reading from the first storage means is provided and the information corresponding to the information of the logical address is transferred to the transfer destination, the information is transferred after being stored in the storage means. It is a composition,
When the management means reads the information corresponding to the information of the logical address transmitted by the control means from the first storage means and stores it in the storage means, the management means corresponds to the logical address associated with the logical address. The game according to feature A8, which comprises a prediction start means (a function of executing the process of step S107 in the controllers CPUs 113 and 173) for starting the transfer of information from the storage area of the physical address to the storage means. Machine.

According to the feature A9, when the information of the logical address is transmitted from the control means, the information corresponding to the logical address is only read from the first storage means to the storage means and transferred from the storage means to the transfer destination. Instead, it is predicted that the logical address associated with the received logical address is the logical address related to the next transfer instruction, and the information corresponding to the logical address is read out from the first storage means. As a result, when the information corresponding to each of the plurality of associated logical addresses is read, the logical address information is transmitted from the control means for the information corresponding to the logical address whose read order is later. Reading can be started in advance without waiting, and the time required for reading such information can be shortened.

However, in the above configuration, the reading of the information corresponding to the first logical address largely depends on the reading speed of the NAND flash memory. On the other hand, since the configuration of the above feature A1 is provided and the initial start-up information is stored in advance in the third storage means instead of the first storage means, the initial start-up process is started after the initial start-up state is reached. The time required to complete the process can be shortened.

Feature A10. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) is provided.
The specific control execution means is configured to control the display of an image to be displayed on the display screen as the specific control.
As the initial activation process, the initial execution means displays an image (initial image) for the pre-stage at which the display of the image based on the specific control is started (step S313 and step S314 in the display CPUs 72 and 131). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, characterized in that processing) is executed.

According to the feature A10, since the display of the image for the previous stage is started on the display screen based on the execution of the initial start-up process, the image is displayed on the display screen until the display of the image based on the specific control is started. The display of the image on the display screen can be started at an earlier timing than the configuration in which is not displayed at all.

Feature A11. A display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) is provided, and the control means is configured to control the display of an image to be displayed on the display screen.
The first storage means stores in advance control program data used when executing various processes in the control means and image data used when displaying an image on the display screen.
The control means causes the transfer means to perform the transfer while adjusting the timing of information transfer so that the period during which the control program data is transferred and the period during which the image data is transferred do not overlap. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, which comprises means (a function of executing steps S306, S311, S315, etc. in the display CPUs 72 and 131).

According to the feature A11, since both the control program data and the image data are stored in advance in the first storage means, the storage destinations of these information can be aggregated. Further, in the configuration, the timing of information transfer is adjusted so that the period during which the control program data is transferred and the period during which the image data is transferred do not overlap, so that the hardware configuration related to the transfer of each information is configured. It is possible to transfer each information satisfactorily while suppressing the complexity.

Feature A12. A plurality of types of control program data are stored, and the types of image data required for displaying an image based on processing using the control program data differ depending on the type of control program data.
The transfer adjusting means gives priority to the transfer of the image data so that the control program data corresponding to the image data is transferred, and the image data is not used in the processing using the control program data. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the image data is transferred while the process is being executed.

According to the feature A12, since the control program data corresponding to the image data is transferred with priority over the image data transfer, the occurrence of waiting for processing can be suppressed. In addition, since the image data is transferred while the process that does not use the image data is being executed in the process that uses the control program data, the display of the image using the image data is not hindered. It becomes possible to.

Feature A13. The initial execution means is a process for displaying an image (initial image) for a pre-stage in which an image display is started based on the specific control as the initial start-up process (steps S313 and steps in the display CPUs 72 and 131). It is a configuration that executes the process of S314).
The transfer adjusting means is an image corresponding to the image for the previous stage after the transfer of the initial activation information is completed and before the transfer of the control program data used in the specific control is started. The gaming machine according to feature A12, wherein data is transferred.

According to the feature A13, since the display of the image for the previous stage is started on the display screen based on the execution of the initial startup process, the image is displayed on the display screen until the display of the image based on the specific control is started. The display of the image on the display screen can be started at an earlier timing than the configuration in which is not displayed at all.

Feature A14. The control means is a downstream control means that performs the specific control according to instruction information transmitted based on the execution of the upstream process in the upstream control means (main control device 50).
Further, the first storage means is a NAND flash memory, and the upstream storage means (ROM53) that previously stores the control program data used when the upstream control means performs the upstream processing is random. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, which is an accessible memory.

According to the feature A14, the control means on the upstream side can be randomly accessed for reading the control program data, thereby simplifying the configuration for reading the control program data, and the control means on the downstream side is large. The configuration can be configured with an emphasis on capacity increase.

Feature A15. A first storage means (NAND flash memory 102, 162) that stores information in advance, and a control means (display CPUs 72, 131) that executes specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with,
The first storage means has a NAND flash memory and has a NAND flash memory.
Further, when the information read from the first storage means is stored and compared by reading information of the same capacity, the period required for reading the information is shorter than that when reading from the first storage means. Means (work RAM 73, 132) and
A transfer means for reading specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means. (Controllers 101 and 161) and
With
The control means
Specific control execution means (a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading the specific information stored in the second storage means and executing the specific control, and
The initial start-up process is executed based on the predetermined initial start-up state, and it is required to read out the information when the information is transferred to the second storage means or compared by reading out information of the same capacity. Initial execution means (steps S302 to step S302 to 131 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) that read the initial start-up information stored in advance in another storage means whose period is shorter than that read from the first storage means and execute the initial start-up process. Function to execute the processing of S306) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A15, since the NAND flash memory is used as the first storage means, it is easy to increase the capacity as compared with the configuration in which the NOR flash memory is used. Further, the specific information is stored in the second storage means in which the period required for reading the information is shorter than that in the case of reading from the first storage means at the timing before the specific control is executed by the control means, and the control means is stored. The configuration is such that specific control is executed using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even in a configuration in which a NAND flash memory that requires a relatively long period of reading is used as the first storage means, the time required to read the specific information in the control means can be shortened, and the specific control can be smoothly performed. be able to.

Further, the initial start-up information used when executing the initial start-up process is read after being transferred to the second storage means, or the period required for reading the information is shorter than that when reading from the first storage means. Is read from the storage means of. As a result, the initial startup process can be executed satisfactorily.

From the above, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the processing speed in executing the control.

Feature A16. A display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G), first storage means (NAND flash memories 102, 162) for storing information in advance, and the first storage means. In a gaming machine provided with display control means (display CPUs 72, 131, VDP 76, 135) that control the display of an image to be displayed on the display screen based on the information provided.
The first storage means stores in advance control program data used when executing various processes in the display control means and image data used when displaying an image on the display screen.
When the information read from the first storage means is stored and compared by reading information of the same capacity, the period required for reading the information is shorter than that when the information is read from the first storage means (second storage means). Work RAM 73, 132, VRAM 75, 134) and
Transfer means (controllers 101 and 161) that read the necessary information from the first storage means and store it in the second storage means at a timing before the timing required by the display control means.
With
The display control means is configured to execute processing using the control program data transferred to the second storage means and to display an image using the image data transferred to the second storage means. ,
Further, a transfer adjusting means (display) for causing the transfer means to perform the transfer while adjusting the timing of information transfer so that the period during which the control program data is transferred and the period during which the image data is transferred do not overlap. Functions for executing steps S306, S311, S315, etc. in the CPUs 72 and 131) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A16, the information is stored and displayed in the second storage means, which requires a shorter period for reading the information than the case where the information is read from the first storage means, at a timing before the timing required by the display control means. The control means performs processing using the information stored in the second storage means and displays an image. Therefore, the time required for reading information in the display control means can be shortened, and the image can be displayed smoothly.

Further, since both the control program data and the image data are stored in advance in the first storage means, the storage destinations of these information can be aggregated. Further, in the configuration, the timing of information transfer is adjusted so that the period during which the control program data is transferred and the period during which the image data is transferred do not overlap, so that the hardware configuration related to the transfer of each information is configured. It is possible to transfer each information satisfactorily while suppressing the complexity.

From the above, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the processing speed in executing the control.

Feature A17. A first storage means (NAND flash memory 102, 162) that stores information in advance, and a control means (display CPUs 72, 131) that executes specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with,
The first storage means has a NAND flash memory and has a NAND flash memory.
Further, when the information read from the first storage means is stored and compared by reading information of the same capacity, the period required for reading the information is shorter than that when reading from the first storage means. Means (work RAM 73, 132) and
A transfer means for reading specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means. (Controllers 101 and 161) and
With
The transfer means
Management information storage means (control ROMs 114, 174) that store management information in which the physical address information of the first storage means is associated with the logical address information transmitted by the control means.
By referring to the management information, a physical address specifying process for specifying a physical address corresponding to the information of the logical address transmitted by the control means is executed, and a large number of storage areas included in the first storage means are used. Among them, a management means (controller CPU 113, 173) that executes a read process for reading information from the storage area of the physical address specified by the physical address identification process, and
Storage means (cache memories 117, 177) for storing information read from the storage area of the first storage means corresponding to the information of the logical address, and
When the information corresponding to the information of the logical address is transferred to the transfer destination, the information is stored in the storage means and then transferred.
When the management means reads the information corresponding to the information of the logical address transmitted by the control means from the first storage means and stores it in the storage means, the management means corresponds to the logical address associated with the logical address. A gaming machine including a prediction start means (a function of executing the process of step S107 in the controllers CPUs 113 and 173) for starting the transfer of information from the storage area of the physical address to the storage means.

According to the feature A17, since the NAND flash memory is used as the first storage means, it is easy to increase the capacity as compared with the configuration in which the NOR flash memory is used. Further, the specific information is stored in the second storage means in which the period required for reading the information is shorter than that in the case of reading from the first storage means at the timing before the specific control is executed by the control means, and the control means is stored. The configuration is such that specific control is executed using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even in a configuration in which a NAND flash memory that requires a relatively long period of reading is used as the first storage means, the time required to read the specific information in the control means can be shortened, and the specific control can be smoothly performed. be able to.

In addition, although a defective block may occur in the NAND flash memory, the management means identifies the physical address for the logical address transmitted from the control means, so that the information can be read well from the NAND flash memory. Will be done.

When the information of the logical address is transmitted from the control means, the information corresponding to the logical address is not only read from the first storage means to the storage means and transferred from the storage means to the transfer destination, but also the information. It is predicted that the logical address associated with the received logical address is the logical address related to the next transfer instruction, and the information corresponding to the logical address is read out from the first storage means. As a result, when the information corresponding to each of the plurality of associated logical addresses is read, the logical address information is transmitted from the control means for the information corresponding to the logical address whose read order is later. Reading can be started in advance without waiting, and the time required for reading such information can be shortened.

The invention of the feature A group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. .. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory. Further, in recent years, by diversifying the production mode by images and using complicated moving images and live-action images as images, it is attempted to increase the degree of attention to the image and to increase the degree of attention to the game accordingly. Attempts have been made.

Here, when an image drawing instruction is generated, it is preferable that the image is displayed at an early stage. As a method of displaying an image at an early stage, a method of increasing the reading speed of the memory for image data can be considered. Further, as another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of the CPU that performs image processing can be considered. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom in selecting the memory is reduced at the game machine design stage, and in the latter case, the cost increases as the processing speed is increased.

It should be noted that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to the display of the image, and similarly occurs in the configuration related to other controls.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features A1 to A17, the following features B1 to B13, the following features C1 to C10, the following features C'1, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1 ~ F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features G'1 to G'2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. The configuration limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) that displays an image on the display screen using the image data stored in the display storage means and updates the content of the image at a predetermined update timing. When,
In a gaming machine equipped with
Image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to the individual images so that the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen (a function of executing the writing process in the VDP 76, steps S1901 and S1905 in the VDP76). (Functions for executing the processes of S2001, step S2005, step S2101 to step S2104), and
When the plurality of individual images are displayed so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, the transparency value set as a part of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side corresponds to the individual image on the back side. A function of executing the processing of step S1904, step S2004, and step S2107 in the transparent value adjusting means (step S1904, step S2004, and step S2107 in VDP76) for partially displaying the individual image on the front side by setting the overlapping portion of the image data to be the display target. )When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, the partial display of the individual image is performed by adjusting the transparency value of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to separately prepare the image data for partial display and the image data for full display, so that the storage capacity of the display storage means can be suppressed.

Feature B2. The image data has a large number of unit image data (pixels) to which color information is associated.
The display storage means is transparent value adjustment data (partial α data PD22 to PD25, partial α data PD30 to PD33, α palette data) in which transparent values are set corresponding to each unit image data of the image data. , Partial α data PD37, PD38) is stored in advance.
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the transparent value adjusting means causes the partial display by applying the transparent value adjusting data to the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side. ..

According to the feature B2, since the partial display is performed only by reading the transparency value adjustment data from the display storage means and applying it to the image data, the processing configuration for performing the partial display becomes complicated. Is suppressed.

Feature B3. In the transparency value adjustment data, the transparency of the contour portion is higher than that of the portion adjacent to the unit image data corresponding to the contour portion of the region partially displayed in the individual image on the front side. The transparency value is set so that
Further, the individual images displayed as the individual images on the front side include a first individual image on the front side and a second individual image on the front side, and one-to-one with each of the individual images on the front side. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the transparency value adjusting data is provided in correspondence with the feature B2.

According to the feature B3, since the transparency value adjustment data is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the first front side individual image and the second front side individual image, partial display is performed for those individual images. Can be done. Further, since the transparency value of each transparency value adjustment data is set so that the transparency of the outline portion of the corresponding individual image is higher than that of the adjacent portion inside the data, the transparency value adjustment is performed to perform partial display. At the same time, when the data is applied, the jaggies of the partially displayed image can be reduced.

Feature B4. The individual images displayed as the front side individual images include a first front side individual image (individual image corresponding to the symbol sprite data PD26) and a second front side individual image (individual image corresponding to the symbol sprite data PD27). Image) is included
The transparency value adjusting means is common to both the case where the first front side individual image is partially displayed and the case where the second front side individual image is partially displayed. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the data for use (α data for partial α data PD30 to PD33) is applied.

According to the feature B4, it is possible to partially display each of the first front side individual image and the second front side individual image while suppressing the storage capacity required for storing the transparency value adjustment data. can.

Feature B5. The transparency value adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to a large number of the unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the front side, and the transparency value information is set in each unit adjustment area. Ori,
The transparency value adjusting means applies the transparency value information included in each unit adjustment area of the transparency value adjustment data to the color information associated with the corresponding unit image data in the image data, thereby performing the portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, characterized in that the display is performed.

According to the feature B5, when the partial display is performed, the transparency value information set in each unit adjustment area of the transparency value adjustment data can be applied to the color information associated with the corresponding unit image data. Therefore, the complexity of the processing related to the application can be suppressed.

Feature B6. The image data setting means is configured to display an image based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and when the image data is set in the setting storage means. The configuration is such that the coordinate information in the setting storage means for a part of a large number of the unit image data included in the image data is specified, and the image data is set at a position corresponding to the coordinate information.
Further, the transparency value adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to a large number of the unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the front side, and the transparency value information is set in each unit adjustment area. Has been
The transparency value adjusting means applies the transparency value information included in each unit adjustment area of the transparency value adjustment data to the color information associated with the corresponding unit image data in the image data, thereby performing the portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, characterized in that the display is performed.

According to the feature B6, when the image data is set in the setting storage means, it is not necessary to specify the coordinate information for all the unit image data of the image data, so that the complexity of the processing configuration related to the specification can be suppressed.

In this configuration, the transparency value adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to a large number of unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the front side, and the transparency value information is set in each unit adjustment area. Data structure. As a result, even if the coordinate information is not individually specified for all the unit image data of the image data, the transparency value information set in each unit adjustment area of the transparency value adjustment data is set to the corresponding unit. It can be applied to the color information associated with the image data.

Feature B7. The image data setting means is configured to display an image based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and when the image data is set in the setting storage means. , Parameter information including coordinate information in the setting storage means of the image data is specified, and the image data is set according to the specific result.
In the transparency value adjusting means, when the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side is set in the setting storage means, the image data is set according to the specified parameter information. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the transparency value adjusting data is applied to the image data at a previous timing.

According to the feature B7, a predetermined parameter is applied to the image data to which the transparency value adjustment data is applied, and the data of the application result is set in the setting storage means. As a result, it is not necessary to specify the parameters for setting the transparent value adjusting data in the setting storage means, so that the processing load for specifying the parameters can be suppressed.

Feature B8. Identification information is individually set for each unit image data.
The transparency value adjusting data is characterized in that a combination of color information and transparency value information of unit image data in which the identification information is set is set in correspondence with the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of B2 to B4.

According to the feature B8, a transparency value for partial display can be applied in accordance with setting color information for each unit image data.

Feature B9. The transparency value adjusting means is characterized in that the transparency value is adjusted so that the transparency of the contour portion of the region partially displayed in the individual image on the front side is higher than that of the adjacent portion inside the region. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B8.

According to the feature B9, when the transparency value is adjusted to perform the partial display, the jaggies of the partially displayed image can be reduced at the same time.

Feature B10. The transparency value adjusting means switches the range in which the transparency value is set for displaying the overlapping portion of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the back side, thereby displaying the partial display area on the individual image on the front side. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, characterized in that

According to the feature B10, it is possible to perform a display effect in which the partially displayed area in the front individual image changes only by switching the applied transparency value.

Feature B11. A partition area control means (a function of executing the process of step S1806 in the display CPU 72) that controls the display means so that the partition area (partial display area PL5) in which a part of the display screen is partitioned is displayed. Prepare,
The front side individual image is an individual image used to be displayed in the compartment area, and the back side individual image is an individual image used to be displayed in a surrounding area including the periphery of the partition area. It is an image
When the individual image on the front side is displayed so that a part of the boundary of the partition area is covered, the transparent value adjusting means is said to prevent the individual image on the front side from protruding into the surrounding area. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, characterized in that an individual image on the front side is partially displayed.

According to the feature B11, it is possible to perform a display effect in which individual images are displayed within the range of the division area only by adjusting the transparency value.

Feature B12. Character color change control means (character transition processing in VDP76) that controls the display means so that a plurality of character images are displayed side by side in a specific direction on the display screen and the colors of the plurality of character images are sequentially changed. Has the ability to execute)
The individual image on the front side is an individual image including the plurality of character images.
The individual image on the back side is an individual image including the plurality of character images and the color of each character image is set to be different from the individual image on the front side.
The image data setting means is configured to display an image based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and also has a display effect in which the color of the character image is sequentially changed. When this is done, the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side is set in front of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the back side.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein the transparent value adjusting means partially displays an individual image on the front side when the display effect is performed.

According to the feature B12, it is possible to perform a display effect in which the color of the character image is sequentially changed only by adjusting the transparency value.

Feature B13. A pattern determination means (a function of executing the process of step S403 in the display CPU 72) for determining display effect pattern information composed of images for a plurality of update timings based on the establishment of predetermined pattern determination conditions, and
Derivation means (function to execute task processing in the display CPU 72) for deriving parameter information when using image data corresponding to individual images displayed at each update timing based on the determined display effect pattern information. )When,
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B12, wherein the image data setting means sets the image data in a state where the parameter information derived by the derivation means is applied. ..

According to the feature B13, the parameter information of the image data corresponding to each update timing is derived based on the reference to the display effect pattern information determined in advance, and the image data is set in the state where the parameter information is applied. By doing so, in a configuration in which images for each update timing are displayed, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described in the above feature B1 and the like.

The invention of the feature B group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the 2D image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the characters and characters are stored in the memory for the image data. Has been done. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying characters and characters in front of the background is created for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which characters or characters are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

In addition, for example, when displaying an image as if a character or character is moving in a predetermined manner in front of the background, the coordinates are adjusted to match the predetermined movement each time the display device is updated. Drawing data in which the above character or character data is set in the form is created.

Here, the present inventor shifts from a state in which the entire character or character is displayed to a state in which only a part of the character or character is displayed in the process of movement of the character or character as a display effect in the display device. I came up with a display effect to make it.

However, in order to perform the display effect, it is not preferable that the capacity of the memory for the image data is extremely increased, and it is necessary to enable the display effect while suppressing the increase in the capacity to some extent. ..

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features B1 to B13, the above features A1 to A17, the following features C1 to C10, the following features C'1, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1 ~ F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features G'1 to G'2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. The configuration limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
Based on setting the image data in the predetermined setting storage means (frame areas 82a, 82b), the image is displayed on the display screen, and the update timing is set to the predetermined range. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) for updating the contents of the image,
In a gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of divided image data (divided part data PD2 to PD10, divided data groups PD12 to PD15) are stored in advance in the display storage means.
The display control means sets the plurality of divided image data side by side in the setting storage means according to a predetermined relative position, so that the same type of display mode corresponds to each divided image data. A set setting means for displaying a series of images that straddle the boundaries of individual images for division (a function of executing arithmetic processing for scroll background in the display CPU 72 or a function of executing arithmetic processing for displacement background in the display CPU 72, and A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing setting processing of divided parts data in VDP76).

According to the feature C1, the image data for displaying a series of images is divided and stored as a plurality of divided image data. As a result, the data unit when individually set in the setting storage means can be suppressed to a small size, and the processing load for handling a single image data can be suppressed.

Feature C2. When the first divided image data (divided part data PD5) and the second divided image data (divided part data PD6) having an adjacent positional relationship are set in the setting storage means, the set setting means The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein an overlapping region (overlapping region PA1) of both data is generated over the entire boundary portion of the divided image data.

According to the feature C2, in the configuration in which each divided image data is individually set in the setting storage means, there is a concern that a gap may occur between the two data depending on, for example, the individual size adjustment of each divided image data. Will be done. On the other hand, since both data are set in the setting storage means so that an overlapping area is generated, the above-mentioned gap does not occur, and the effect of storing as each divided image data is good. Can be demonstrated.

Feature C3. The game according to feature C2, wherein the portion constituting the overlapping region in the first divided image data and the second divided image data is associated with color information that is the same as each other. Machine.

According to the feature C3, since the color information that is the same as each other is associated with the portion forming the overlapping region in both divided image data, for example, the same magnification is applied to each divided image data. Even if the size is adjusted individually and the width of the overlapping area is slightly deviated, it is expected that the color information to be displayed as the overlapping area is reflected in the deviated part. Therefore, even if each divided image data is an image as a result of being individually set for the setting storage means, a good display mode can be obtained.

Feature C4. The image data has a large number of unit image data to which color information is associated.
The gaming machine according to feature C2 or C3, wherein the overlapping region is composed of one column of unit image data in each of the first divided image data and the second divided image data. ..

According to the feature C4, it is possible to achieve the effect that each divided image data is set so as to generate the overlapping area while suppressing the data capacity allocated to generate the overlapping area as much as possible.

Feature C5. When all of the divided image data are set on a predetermined scale, the series of images formed by the divided image data are created so as to exceed the size corresponding to the display screen. In addition, at least at a specific update timing among the update timings to be set on the predetermined scale, a division size such that a part of the divided image data is not included in the predetermined range. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, which is characterized in that it is created in.

According to the feature C5, the series of images generated by setting all the divided image data is configured to exceed the size corresponding to the display screen, so that the image is set in the range exceeding the size of the display screen. It is possible to make the player recognize that the image is being played, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the image. In this case, at least at a specific update timing, a part of each divided image data is not included in the predetermined range. As a result, it is possible to prevent the divided image data not included in the predetermined range from being set in the setting storage means at the specific update timing, and the processing is compared with the configuration in which the all divided image data is always set. The load can be reduced.

Feature C6. The image data has a large number of unit image data to which color information is associated.
When the display control means sets the image data in the setting storage means, the display control means obtains the color information of the unit image data by executing a predetermined drawing process for each unit image data of the image data. Even when the unit image data of the image data set in the setting storage means and determined as the setting target in the setting storage means protrudes from the setting storage means, the color information of the unit image data is Although it is not set in the setting storage means, it executes the drawing process.
When all of the divided image data are set on a predetermined scale, the series of images formed by the divided image data are created so as to exceed the size corresponding to the display screen. In addition, at least at a specific update timing among the update timings to be set on the predetermined scale, a division size such that a part of the divided image data is not included in the predetermined range. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, which is characterized in that it is created in.

According to the feature C6, when the display control means sets the image data in the setting storage means, even if the image data contains the unit image data that protrudes from the setting storage means, the unit image data is included in the unit image data. On the other hand, the same drawing process is executed. As a result, the display control means does not need to execute a dedicated process for the unit image data protruding from the setting storage means.

In addition, the series of images generated by setting all the divided image data is configured to exceed the size corresponding to the display screen, so that the images are set in the range exceeding the size of the display screen. Can be recognized by the player, and the degree of attention to the image can be increased. However, in the configuration in which the same drawing process is executed for the unit image data protruding from the setting storage means as described above, the image data forming the series of images is provided as a single image. Then, the frequency of wastefully executing the above drawing process increases, and the processing load increases.

On the other hand, at least at a specific update timing, a part of each divided image data is not included in the predetermined range. As a result, it is possible to prevent the divided image data not included in the predetermined range from being set in the setting storage means at the specific update timing, and the processing is compared with the configuration in which the all divided image data is always set. The load can be reduced.

Feature C7. The set setting means is
A division image grasping means (a function of executing arithmetic processing for a scroll background in the display CPU 72) for grasping a part of the divided image data included in the predetermined range to be updated among the divided image data, and
A division image setting means (a function of executing a division part data setting process in the VDP 76) that causes the division image data grasped by the division image grasping means to be set in the setting storage means, and
The gaming machine according to the feature C5 or C6, which comprises the above-mentioned feature C5 or C6.

According to the feature C7, at least at a specific update timing, the divided image data not included in the predetermined range is not set in the setting storage means. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the fully divided image data is always set.

Feature C8. The image data is provided with parameter information specifying means (a function of executing arithmetic processing for scroll background in the display CPU 72) for specifying parameter information including coordinate information in the setting storage means.
The display control means has a configuration in which the image data is set in the setting storage means in a state where the parameter information corresponding to the specific result of the parameter information specifying means is applied.
When the parameter information specifying means specifies the parameter information for the image data constituting the image for the predetermined range corresponding to at least the specific update timing, the image for the predetermined range also includes a part of the area. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C7, wherein the parameter information is not specified for the divided image data corresponding to the individual images for division.

According to the feature C8, the parameter information is not specified for the divided image data not included in the predetermined range at least at a specific update timing. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the parameter information is always specified for the fully divided image data.

Feature C9. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the series of images is images that are scroll-displayed in a predetermined direction over an image display period for a plurality of update timings.

According to the feature C9, a series of images can be scrolled and displayed, and the scrolling display can be satisfactorily performed by having the configuration of the feature C1 and the like.

Feature C10. The divided image data is created so that each of the individual images for division includes a plurality of unit images, and the display mode of the plurality of unit images is sequentially changed over a plurality of update timings. A plurality of the divided image data are provided corresponding to each of the divided positions so that the display can be performed.
At each of the division positions where the individual images for division are displayed side by side, the setting storage means is set so that the display mode of the plurality of unit images is sequentially changed over the display period for a plurality of update timings. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, which comprises an image switching means (a function of executing arithmetic processing for a displacement background in the display CPU 72) for switching each divided image data.

According to the feature C10, the display of the plurality of unit images is collectively controlled in units of the divided image data, instead of individually setting the image data corresponding to each of the plurality of unit images in the setting storage means. As a result, it is possible to perform a display effect in which the display mode of the plurality of unit images is sequentially changed. Thereby, in addition to the excellent effect as described in the above feature C1, it is possible to execute the display effect in which the display mode of the plurality of unit images is sequentially changed while reducing the processing load.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature C group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the 2D image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character or the like are stored in the memory for the image data. ing. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Here, the larger the size of the image, the larger the capacity of the image data. For example, a background image that is scrolled and only a part of the area is displayed on the display screen for each frame is a character image in which the entire area is displayed on the display screen at the default size. The capacity of the image data is larger than that of the image data.

In this case, depending on the capacity, it is assumed that one unit of image data cannot be stored in the memory for image data in advance. Further, even if it can be stored, if there are many areas that are not actually displayed on the display screen, the amount of calculation for display for each frame increases accordingly, and the processing load increases. On the other hand, for a large image as described above, it is conceivable that the image data at the time of initial setting is always enlarged and displayed, but if this is done, the image quality will be deteriorated.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features C1 to C10, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the following features C'1, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1 ~ F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features G'1 to G'2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. The configuration limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature C'>
Feature C'1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
Based on setting the image data in the predetermined setting storage means (frame areas 82a, 82b), the image is displayed on the display screen, and the update timing is set to the predetermined range. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) for updating the contents of the image,
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the display storage means, aggregated image data (divided data groups PD12 to PD15) used for collectively displaying a plurality of unit images are stored in advance, and a plurality of display modes of the plurality of unit images are stored. A plurality of the aggregated image data are stored so that the display can be displayed so as to change sequentially over the update timing of.
Further, the aggregated image switching means (displacement in the display CPU 72) for switching the aggregated image data set in the setting storage means so that the display mode of the plurality of unit images is sequentially changed over the display period for the plurality of update timings. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function to execute arithmetic processing for the background.

According to the feature C'1, instead of individually setting the image data corresponding to each of the plurality of unit images for the setting storage means, the display of the plurality of unit images is collectively performed in the unit of the divided image data. By controlling, it is possible to perform a display effect in which the display mode of a plurality of unit images is sequentially changed. As a result, it is possible to execute a display effect in which the display mode of the plurality of unit images is sequentially changed while reducing the processing load.

The invention according to the above feature C'1 is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the 2D image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character or the like are stored in the memory for the image data. ing. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Here, as the number of unit images included in the image for one frame increases, the processing load for each frame increases. On the other hand, if the number of unit images included in the image for one frame is reduced, there is a concern that the degree of attention to the image will decrease.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features C'1, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1 ~ F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features G'1 to G'2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. The configuration limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) composed of a plurality of dots arranged vertically and horizontally, and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
As image data of an individual image for operation (sprite CH5 for smooth movement) displayed so that at least a part moves in a specific direction, at least a part of the image data is moved in the specific direction by less than 1 dot. It is a configuration that can acquire a plurality of corresponding image data for operation (sprite data PD48, PD49).
When at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, the display control means performs the operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image a plurality of times. It is characterized by having an image switching means for operation (a function of executing arithmetic processing for smooth movement in the display CPU 72 and a function of executing setting processing for smooth movement in VDP76) for sequentially switching over the update timing of images. A game machine to be.

According to the feature D1, at least a part of the individual images for operation is moved in a specific direction by sequentially switching a plurality of image data for operation corresponding to the state of movement by less than 1 dot as the target of use. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the image as if it is moving in units of less than one dot, and it is possible to facilitate the movement of the individual image for operation.

Feature D2. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) composed of a plurality of dots arranged vertically and horizontally, and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means has at least a part of the image data of an individual image for operation (sprite CH5 for smooth movement) displayed so as to move in a specific direction. It stores multiple image data for operation (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to the state of movement by less than a dot.
When at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, the display control means performs the operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image a plurality of times. It is characterized by having an image switching means for operation (a function of executing arithmetic processing for smooth movement in the display CPU 72 and a function of executing setting processing for smooth movement in VDP76) for sequentially switching over the update timing of images. A game machine to be.

According to the feature D2, a plurality of motion image data corresponding to a state of movement of less than one dot are sequentially switched as usage targets, so that at least a part of the motion individual images moves in a specific direction. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the image as if it is moving in units of less than one dot, and it is possible to facilitate the movement of the individual image for operation.

Further, in this configuration, since it is sufficient to sequentially switch a plurality of operation image data used for displaying the individual operation images, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load. From the above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize the smooth movement of the individual image for operation.

Feature D3. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) composed of a plurality of dots arranged vertically and horizontally, and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
The image data is set in the setting storage means (frame areas 82a, 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, and the image signal corresponding to the data set in each unit setting area is output to the display means. Based on the display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) for displaying an image on the display screen,
In a gaming machine equipped with
As image data of an individual image for operation (sprite CH5 for smooth movement) displayed so that at least a part moves in a specific direction, at least a part of the image data is more than the unit setting area one in the specific direction. It is a configuration that can acquire a plurality of operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to the mutually moving state due to the small size.
When at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, the display control means performs the operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image a plurality of times. It is characterized by having an image switching means for operation (a function of executing arithmetic processing for smooth movement in the display CPU 72 and a function of executing setting processing for smooth movement in VDP76) for sequentially switching over the update timing of images. A game machine to be.

According to the feature D3, at least one of the individual images for operation is obtained by sequentially switching a plurality of image data for operation corresponding to the mutually moving state as the objects to be used by a size smaller than one unit setting area. The part is displayed so that it moves in a specific direction. As a result, it is possible to display the image as if it is moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area, and it is possible to facilitate the movement of the individual image for operation.

Feature D4. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) composed of a plurality of dots arranged vertically and horizontally, and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
The image data is set in the setting storage means (frame areas 82a, 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, and the image signal corresponding to the data set in each unit setting area is output to the display means. Based on the display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) for displaying an image on the display screen,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means has at least a part of the image data of an individual image for operation (sprite CH5 for smooth movement) displayed so as to move in a specific direction. A plurality of operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to the mutually moving state are stored by a size smaller than the unit setting area of the above.
When at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, the display control means performs the operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image a plurality of times. It is characterized by having an image switching means for operation (a function of executing arithmetic processing for smooth movement in the display CPU 72 and a function of executing setting processing for smooth movement in VDP76) for sequentially switching over the update timing of images. A game machine to be.

According to the feature D4, a plurality of motion image data corresponding to the mutually moving state are sequentially switched as usage targets by a size smaller than one unit setting area, so that at least one of the motion individual images is used. The part is displayed so that it moves in a specific direction. As a result, it is possible to display the image as if it is moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area, and it is possible to facilitate the movement of the individual image for operation.

Further, in this configuration, since it is sufficient to sequentially switch a plurality of operation image data used for displaying the individual operation images, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load. From the above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize the smooth movement of the individual image for operation.

Feature D5. The display control means is a coordinate information determining means (step S2405, step S2411, step S241 in the display CPU 72) for determining coordinate information when each of the plurality of operation image data is individually set in the setting storage means. It has a function to execute the processing of S2416).
When the operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image is sequentially switched over a specific plurality of times of the update timing, the coordinate information determining means is used for all of the operation image data. The gaming machine according to feature D3 or D4, wherein the information of the same coordinates is applied.

According to the feature D5, a plurality of image data for operation corresponding to the mutually moving state are sequentially set for the same coordinates by a size smaller than one unit setting area, so that one can be set. It is possible to display the individual image for operation as if it is moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than the unit setting area, and it is possible to facilitate the movement of the individual image for operation.

Feature D6. The display control means is a coordinate information determining means (step S2405, step S2411, step S241 in the display CPU 72) for determining coordinate information when each of the plurality of operation image data is individually set in the setting storage means. It has a function to execute the processing of S2416).
The coordinate information determining means updates the information of the next coordinate after the information of the same coordinate is applied to all of the plurality of image data for operation, and the information of the next coordinate is before the update. The gaming machine according to the feature D3 or D4, wherein the information is updated so that the information of the coordinates deviates to the side corresponding to the movement in the specific direction by one unit setting area from the coordinates of the above.

According to the feature D6, a plurality of image data for operation corresponding to the mutually moving state are sequentially set for the same coordinates by a size smaller than one unit setting area, so that one can be set. It is possible to display the individual image for operation as if it is moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than the unit setting area, and it is possible to facilitate the movement of the individual image for operation.

In addition, after the information of the same coordinates is applied to all of the plurality of image data for operation, the information of the next coordinate is updated, and the information of the next coordinate is one from the coordinate before the update. The unit setting area is updated so that the coordinate information is shifted to the side corresponding to the movement in a specific direction. As a result, the state in which the individual image for operation is moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area is repeated. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the movement of the individual image for operation.

Feature D7. The display control means updates the content of the image at a predetermined update timing.
When at least a part of the individual operation images is displayed so as to move in the specific direction over a display period for a plurality of update timings, the operation image switching means may display the plurality of operation image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features D3 to D6, wherein is repeatedly set in a predetermined order for the setting storage means.

According to the feature D7, the processing load can be reduced because the process of repeatedly switching the operation image data set for the setting storage means in a predetermined order may be executed.

Feature D8. At least a part of the plurality of operation image data is specified by differentiating the transparency value indicating the transmission ratio of the image data overlapping on the back side at the portion constituting the edge portion of the corresponding operation individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of features D3 to D7, characterized in that it corresponds to a state of movement smaller than one unit setting area in the direction of.

According to the feature D8, for a plurality of operations corresponding to the mutually moving state by a size smaller than one unit setting area by a simple method of differentiating the transparency values of the parts constituting the edge portion. Image data can be provided.

Feature D9. The plurality of operation image data are stored in advance in the display storage means, and are more than the first operation image data (first sprite data PD48) and the first operation image data. It is characterized in that at least a part thereof is composed of a second operation image data (second sprite data PD49) corresponding to a state in which the image is moved by a size smaller than one unit setting area in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D3 to D8.

According to the feature D9, only the first operation image data and the second operation image data are stored in advance in the display storage means as the operation image data for facilitating the movement of the individual operation images. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above while suppressing the storage capacity required for storing the operation image data in the display storage means.

Feature D10. The second operation image data corresponds to a state in which at least a part of the first operation image data is moved by half or substantially half the size of one unit setting area in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to feature D9, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature D10, the setting target in the setting storage means is switched from the first operation image data to the second operation image data, and the second operation image data to the first operation. It is possible to make the movement amount of the individual image for operation the same or substantially the same as when the image data is switched to.

The configuration limited to any one of the above features D5 to D10 may be applied to the above features D1 or D2. In this case, the configuration defined based on "one unit setting area" may be applied as the configuration defined based on "one dot".

The invention of the feature D group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, those provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the 2D image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character or the like are stored in the memory for the image data. ing. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Further, for example, when displaying an image as if a character or the like is moving in a predetermined manner in front of the background, the coordinates or form corresponding to the predetermined movement are set each time the display device is updated. The drawing data in which the data such as the above character is set is created in. Then, every time drawing data is created, a new signal output is made to the display device, and the image on the display screen is updated so that the character or the like makes a predetermined movement.

Here, on a display screen composed of a large number of dots arranged side by side, for example, when trying to move a character or the like in a predetermined direction, the minimum movement unit that can be set at one update timing is limited to one dot. NS. Then, even if an attempt is made to smoothly move the character or the like in a predetermined direction, a limitation occurs. This is also the case when trying to make a character or the like perform a predetermined operation. Further, in order to solve this, a measure to increase the number of dots included in the unit area can be considered, but the cost of the display device increases as the number of dots increases.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features D1 to D10, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the above features C'1, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1. ~ F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features G'1 to G'2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. The configuration limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) and
A display storage means (memory module 133) in which image data is stored in advance, and
By setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame areas 142a, 142b), drawing data is created in the setting storage means, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Based on the display control means (display CPU131, VDP135) for displaying an image on the display screen,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means
Depth information determining means (processing of steps S3503 to S3505 in the display CPU 131) for determining information in the depth direction of image data corresponding to each individual image for a plurality of individual images displayed so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display screen. Function to execute) and
By applying the information in the depth direction determined by the depth information determining means to the image data corresponding to the individual images and setting the image data in the setting storage means, the individual images are displayed in the depth direction on the display screen. Image data setting means (a function to execute hidden surface processing using the Z buffer in VDP135) so that it is displayed so as to overlap with
Partial display of the specific individual image is performed by making the information in the depth direction applied to a part of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image determined as the information for partial display. Partial display setting means (function to execute arithmetic processing for mask in display CPU 131) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, partial display of the individual image is performed by adjusting the information in the depth direction of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to separately prepare the image data for partial display and the image data for full display, so that the storage capacity of the display storage means can be suppressed.

Feature E2. The partial display setting means switches the range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image by switching the range in which the information in the depth direction is determined as the information for the partial display in the specific image data. Characteristic The gaming machine according to the feature E1.

According to the feature E2, the range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image is switched by using the single specific image data. As a result, it is possible to perform a display effect of switching the range in which partial display is performed in a specific individual image while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage means.

Feature E3. The partial display setting means displays the specific individual image for a plurality of update timings by stepwise switching the range in which the information in the depth direction is determined as the information for the partial display in the specific image data. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, which is characterized in that it is gradually erased or gradually appears over a period of time.

According to the feature E3, since the display effect in which the specific individual image is gradually erased or gradually appears over the display period for a plurality of update timings is performed, the degree of attention to the image can be increased. In this case, the display mode of the specific individual image increases according to the number of update timings in the process of gradually erasing or gradually appearing, but the switching of the display mode is in the depth direction of the specific image data. It is performed by adjusting the information of the above, and it is not necessary to prepare specific image data according to each display mode. Therefore, it is possible to perform the above-mentioned display effect while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage means.

Feature E4. The image data of the object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, the image data is projected on the projection plane set based on the line of sight from a given viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the image data is projected on the projection plane. Storage means (frame areas 142a, 142b) for storing generated data (drawing data) generated based on the generated data, and
A display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) that outputs and displays an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means to the display means (design display device 31), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means
Arrangement means for arranging the image data of the object in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the process of step S3602 to step S3604 in VDP135) and
A viewpoint setting means (a function of executing the process of step S3605 in VDP135) for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, and
Distance information determining means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3503 to S3505 in the display CPU 131) for determining the distance information corresponding to the relative distance from the viewpoint in the direction in which the viewpoint is directed, and
The generated data is generated using the projection data created by projecting the image data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and a plurality of the image data are arranged in the direction in which the viewpoint faces. In this case, the drawing setting means (execution of the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer in the VDP135) for comparing the distance information in each of the arranged parts and giving priority to the part on the side where the relative distance is short is reflected in the generated data. Function to do) and
By making the distance information determined by the distance information determining means determine the information for partial display with respect to a part of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image, the specific individual image A partial display setting means for performing partial display (a function of executing arithmetic processing for a mask in the display CPU 131) and
A gaming machine characterized by displaying an image generated by the above-mentioned display means.

According to the feature E4, the partial display of the individual image is performed by adjusting the distance information of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to separately prepare the image data for partial display and the image data for full display, so that the storage capacity can be suppressed. In particular, according to this configuration, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect by using the configuration of hidden surface erasing for displaying a three-dimensional image.

Feature E5. The partial display setting means generates such that the range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image is switched by switching the range in which the distance information is determined as the information for the partial display in the specific image data. The gaming machine according to feature E4, which is characterized by generating data.

According to the feature E5, the range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image is switched by using the single specific image data. As a result, it is possible to perform a display effect of switching the range in which partial display is performed in a specific individual image while suppressing the storage capacity.

Feature E6. The partial display setting means gradually switches the range in which the distance information is determined as the information for the partial display in the specific image data, thereby setting the specific individual image into a display period for a plurality of update timings. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5, characterized in that it generates generated data that is gradually erased or gradually appears.

According to the feature E6, since the display effect in which the specific individual image is gradually erased or gradually appears over the display period for a plurality of update timings is performed, the degree of attention to the image can be increased. In this case, the display mode of the specific individual image increases according to the number of update timings in the process of gradually erasing or gradually appearing, but the switching of the display mode is in the depth direction of the specific image data. It is performed by adjusting the information of the above, and it is not necessary to prepare specific image data according to each display mode. Therefore, it is possible to perform the above-mentioned display effect while suppressing the storage capacity.

Feature E7. The information for partial display is described in any one of features E4 to E6, which is set as distance information corresponding to the relative distance being farther than the back image data constituting the back image. Game machine.

Since the back image is an image that always constitutes the back, it is an absolute reference as a position in the depth direction. In this case, according to the feature E7, the information for partial display is set as the distance information corresponding to the relative distance being farther than the rear image data, so that the partial display of the specific individual image is performed. The processing load related to the setting of information for partial display in the case can be reduced.

Feature E8. The display screen of the display means is configured by arranging a large number of dots vertically and horizontally, and the generated data has a large number of unit generation data.
The display control means outputs an image signal corresponding to each unit generation data in the generated data to the display means, so that the image output corresponding to each unit generation data is converted into each dot corresponding to each unit generation data. To be done
The distance information determining means determines the distance information in correspondence with each of a large number of unit image data constituting the image data.
Further, when the generated data is generated, the comparison area has a large number of comparison areas corresponding to the large number of unit generation data, and the distance information referred to in the drawing setting means is stored in each of the comparison areas. The storage means (Z buffer 143) is used.
The drawing setting means
When a plurality of the image data are arranged in the direction in which the viewpoint faces, the distance information is individually compared corresponding to each of the unit-generated data, and the distance information is compared.
When performing individual comparisons, if the distance information referred to at a later timing is closer to the relative distance than the distance information referred to earlier and stored in the corresponding comparison area, then The distance information referred to at the timing of is overwritten in the comparison area, and the unit image data for which the distance information is determined is reflected in the unit generation data corresponding to the comparison area. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E7.

According to the feature E8, the excellent effect as described in the feature E4 and the like can be obtained by utilizing the configuration of the hidden surface elimination by using the comparative storage means.

The invention of the feature E group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, those provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon which is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture which is 2D image data such as characters and patterns is pasted on the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon with a texture attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a three-dimensional image is displayed.

Here, the present inventor, when making or erasing individually defined individual images such as characters and characters on the display screen, the whole display and a partial display of the individual images. I came up with a display effect that switches between display and display.

However, if a plurality of types of image data are required for the same type of individual image in order to perform the display effect, the switching mode between the overall display and the partial display becomes multi-step. There are many types of image data to be stored in advance. Then, the storage capacity required in the memory for image data increases, which is not preferable.

It should be noted that the above problem is not limited to the display of a three-dimensional image, but also occurs when a two-dimensional image is displayed.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features E1 to E8, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the above features C'1, the above features D1 to D10, and the following features F1. ~ F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features G'1 to G'2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. The configuration limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) and
Display storage means (memory modules 74, 133) in which image data is stored in advance, and
Based on setting the image data in the predetermined setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b, frame areas 142a and 142b), the image is displayed on the display screen and the update timing is set in advance. Display control means (display CPUs 72, 131, VDP 76, 135) for updating the contents of the image, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores in advance a plurality of types of image data corresponding to different individual images.
The display control means
Grouping means for grouping a plurality of types of image data (a function of executing the process of step S1705 in the VDP 76, a function of executing the process of step S2306 in the VDP 76, and a function of executing the process of step S4404 in the VDP 135).
In the grouping data setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1706 in the VDP 76, a function of executing the process of step S505 in the VDP 76, a function of executing the process of step S505 in the VDP 76, the grouping data setting means for setting the grouped data formed by grouping in the setting storage means. (Function to execute the process of step S4405) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature F1, by grouping a plurality of types of image data, it is possible to handle the plurality of types of image data as a single data. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the image data is always handled individually. Further, since the plurality of types of image data are individually stored in the display storage means, these image data can be handled independently. This makes it possible to handle image data flexibly. Furthermore, the storage capacity required in the display storage means can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the data in which the plurality of types of image data are grouped is stored in the display storage means in advance.

From the above, when displaying a plurality of individual images at the same time, it is possible to reduce the processing load for displaying the images.

Feature F2. A grouping storage area (composite data area 81c, mode buffer 145) for storing the grouping data grouped by the grouping means is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the grouping data setting means sets the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in the setting storage means.

According to the feature F2, the grouping data is stored in the grouping storage area, and if necessary, is read out from the grouping storage area and set in the setting storage means. As a result, the grouped data can be used over a plurality of update timings.

Feature F3. When a plurality of types of image data to be grouped are targeted to be set in the setting storage means, the grouping means groups the plurality of types of image data, and after the grouping, the grouping means performs grouping. The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the image data is stored in the grouping storage area as the grouping data.

According to the feature F3, when a plurality of types of image data to be grouped are targeted to be set in the setting storage means, the plurality of types of image data are grouped and used as grouping data. It is stored in the grouping storage area. This eliminates the need to independently set the processing timing for grouping.

Feature F4. As the display effect over the display period for a plurality of update timings, the number of the first display effect and the number of individual images displayed on the display screen is larger than that of the first display effect, or the setting storage means. A second display effect in which an individual image is displayed in which the processing load of the display control means when setting image data is larger than that of the individual image displayed in the first display effect is set. ,
The grouping means performs the grouping during a period in which the process for displaying the image at the update timing included in the first display effect is executed, and the grouped image data is used as the grouping data. Is stored in the grouping storage area as
The grouping data setting means displays the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area during a period in which a process for displaying an image at an update timing included in the second display effect is executed. The gaming machine according to feature F2 or F3, which is set in the setting storage means.

According to the feature F4, grouping data is created in a situation where the processing load of the display control means is relatively small, and the grouping data is used in a situation where the processing load of the display control means is relatively large. As a result, the processing load of the display control means can be distributed by using the grouping data.

Feature F5. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of update timings, a first display effect and a second display in which the processing load of the display control means becomes large when the image data is set in the setting storage means. The production and is set,
The grouping means performs the grouping during a period in which the process for displaying the image at the update timing included in the first display effect is executed, and the grouped image data is used as the grouping data. Is stored in the grouping storage area as
The grouping data setting means displays the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area during a period in which a process for displaying an image at an update timing included in the second display effect is executed. The gaming machine according to feature F2 or F3, which is set in the setting storage means.

According to the feature F5, grouping data is created in a situation where the processing load of the display control means is relatively small, and the grouping data is used in a situation where the processing load of the display control means is relatively large. As a result, the processing load of the display control means can be distributed by using the grouping data.

Feature F6. The display control means determines drawing data on the display screen based on setting drawing data to create drawing data in the setting storage means and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means. It is configured to display images for the range,
The image for the predetermined range of at least the start timing in the second display effect includes a plurality of types of common individual images displayed in the image for the predetermined range of the end timing in the first display effect. And
When the drawing data corresponding to the end timing is created based on the image data corresponding to the common individual images being set in the setting storage means, the grouping means is an individual common to each of them. The image data corresponding to the image is grouped and stored as the grouping data in the grouping storage area.
When the drawing data corresponding to the start timing is created, the grouping data setting means sets the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in the setting storage means. Characteristic Feature The gaming machine according to F4 or F5.

According to the feature F6, even if a plurality of types of common individual images are displayed using the grouping data at the start timing in the second display effect, the grouping data is based on the end timing in the first display effect. Since it is created in, the display between both timings corresponds. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein the plurality of types of common individual images are individual images forming an image for a background.

According to the feature F7, since the grouping data is applied to the background image, even if a common individual image used at different update timings is displayed, it becomes inconspicuous and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to achieve the excellent effect as already explained while suppressing the holding of.

Feature F8. The display control means creates drawing data in the setting storage means by setting the image data, and outputs an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means, so that an image is displayed on the display screen. Is configured to display
A plurality of types of display modes in which the display modes of images on the display screen are different from each other are set.
An operation reception means (production operation device 48) that accepts operations by the player, and
A display mode switching means (a function for executing an operation occurrence command corresponding process in the display CPU 131) that sequentially switches the display mode based on the operation being received by the operation receiving means, and
With
The grouping means groups the image data of a plurality of types used for displaying images for one update timing included in the display mode for at least a specific display mode among the plurality of types of display modes. The image data after grouping is stored as the grouping data in the grouping storage area.
The grouping data setting means is stored in the grouping storage area when the specific display mode is switched to and the drawing data corresponding to the update timing immediately after the switching is created. The gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F7, wherein the grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode is set in the setting storage means.

According to the feature F8, since a plurality of types of display modes in which the display modes of the images on the display screen are different from each other are set, the display modes can be diversified. In this case, when the grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode is created and the drawing data corresponding to the update timing immediately after the switching is created when the specific display mode is switched to, the grouping is performed. Data is used. Thereby, even if the switching to the specific display mode is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the operation to the operation receiving means at an arbitrary timing, the processing load at that time can be reduced.

Feature F9. In each of the plurality of types of display modes, a display effect is set in which individual images for variation are displayed in a variable manner in front of the background image over a period of a plurality of update timings.
The plurality of types of display modes are set so that at least the types of the background images are different from each other.
The gaming machine according to feature F8, wherein the grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode is a group of a plurality of types of image data for displaying a background image of the specific display mode.

According to the feature F9, even if the switching to the specific display mode is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the operation to the operation receiving means at an arbitrary timing, the background image can be switched by using the grouping data. The processing load at the time can be reduced. Further, even if the switching to the specific display mode occurs in the situation where the variation display of the variation individual image is performed, the grouping data corresponds to the background image as described above, so that the variation of the variation individual image is changed. It is possible to switch only the background image while maintaining the display and suppressing the processing load.

Feature F10. The plurality of types of display modes are set so that at least the types of the background images are different from each other and the types of the individual images for variation are also different from each other.
Further, in the variation display mode of the variation individual image, after the variation display is varied in a low identification mode in which the variation individual image is relatively difficult to identify, the variation display mode is a high identification in which the variation individual image is relatively easy to identify. Aspects that vary depending on the mode are included.
The case where the individual image for variation is switched to the specific display mode in a situation where the individual image for variation is displayed in a variable manner in the low identification mode, and the drawing data corresponding to the update timing immediately after the switching is created, the said. Adjustment means immediately after mode switching that causes the setting storage means to set the grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode stored in the grouping storage area without changing the type of the individual image for variation ( The gaming machine according to feature F9, characterized in that the display CPU 131 is provided with a function of executing arithmetic processing for a display mode background and arithmetic processing for a symbol).

According to the feature F10, when the change display mode is switched to the specific display mode in the situation where the change individual image is changed and displayed in a low identification mode, the grouping data is used for the background image and the change individual image up to that point is used. The data set in the display mode is used. As a result, the processing load when the specific display mode is switched to can be reduced. Further, in a situation where the individual image for variation is displayed in a variable manner in a low identification mode, the distinctiveness of the individual image for variation is low, so the type of the individual image for variation is switched to one corresponding to the specific display mode as described above. Even if it does not exist, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Features F11. The individual image includes an effect image that is displayed in a state in which the color information of the individual images that overlap on the back side of the individual image is reflected when the individual image is displayed on the display screen.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8, wherein the plurality of types of image data grouped by the grouping means include image data corresponding to the effect image.

According to the feature F11, a plurality of types of effect images can be used individually, and a plurality of types of effect images can be used in a grouped state.

Feature F12. When the plurality of types of image data are grouped, the grouping means groups the plurality of types of image data by using a part of the plurality of types of image data as reference image data and the rest as dependent image data. Create and
When the grouping data setting means sets the grouping data in the setting storage means, the grouping data setting means sets the parameter information specified for the reference image data to the reference image data and the dependent image dependent on the reference image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F11, which is set in the setting storage means in a state of being applied to data.

According to the feature F12, when handling a plurality of types of image data, if parameter information is set in the reference image data, it is also applied to the dependent image data, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Feature F13. The display storage means includes a plurality of types of front-side image data (image data PD39 to PD42) used for displaying the front-side image included in the image for one update timing, and the one update timing. A plurality of types of rear image data (image data PD43 to PD45) used for displaying the rear image included in the image for the update timing after the image of the above are stored in advance.
The grouping means creates grouping data by grouping the plurality of types of front image data.
The grouping data setting means
The grouping data to which the plurality of types of rear image data are set in the setting storage means and parameter information is applied so that a part of the front image is hidden is transferred to the rear of the plurality of types. Duplicate setting means (function to execute the process of steps S2302 to S2305 in VDP76) that sets so as to overlap in front of the side image data, and
Switching means (a function of executing the process of step S2308 in VDP76) for performing the setting by the overlapping setting means so that the non-display range is widened over the display period for a plurality of update timings.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F12.

According to the feature F13, the wipe effect can be performed while reducing the processing load.

Feature F14. The display control means
The setting target grasping means (function for executing the process of step S1702 in VDP76) for grasping the image data to be set in the setting storage means, and
For the image data grasped by the setting target grasping means, the derivation means (process of step S1603 in the display CPU 72) for deriving the parameter information that determines the setting mode when the image data is set in the setting storage means is executed. Function) and
A function of executing the process of step S505 in the image data setting means (VDP76) for setting the image data grasped by the setting target grasping means in the setting storage means in a state where the parameter information derived by the derivation means is applied. )When,
With
The game according to any one of features F1 to F13, wherein the grouping means groups a plurality of types of image data in a state to which the parameter information derived by the derivation means is applied. Machine.

According to the feature F14, since the parameter information has already been applied to the plurality of types of image data in the grouped state, when the grouped data is used, the plurality of types of image data included in the grouped data are individually subjected to the parameter information. There is no need to apply parameter information. As a result, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature F15. The image data includes image data of an object which is three-dimensional information for displaying an image.
The display control means
An arrangement means for arranging the image data in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of steps S3602 to S3604 in VDP135) and
A viewpoint setting means (a function of executing the process of step S3605 in VDP135) for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, and
Drawing setting means (steps S360-10 in VDP135) for setting the drawing data in the setting storage means using the projection data created by projecting the image data on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint. (Function to execute the process of S3613) and
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F14, wherein the grouping means groups the data after the plurality of types of image data are projected onto the projection plane.

According to the feature F15, when grouping data is used, it is not necessary to perform geometry calculation or rendering for a plurality of types of image data included in the grouping data. As a result, the processing load can be reduced.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature F group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character etc. are stored in the memory for the image data. Has been done. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon which is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture which is 2D image data such as characters and patterns is pasted on the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon with a texture attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a three-dimensional image is displayed.

Here, the image displayed on the display screen is updated so as to be performed at a predetermined update cycle, and drawing data for one frame is created in time for the update cycle and displayed on the display device. The signal output needs to be done. For example, in a configuration in which only one frame buffer for creating drawing data is set for VRAM, drawing data is created within a range of one update cycle and signal output based on the drawing data is output. Need to be completed. Further, for example, in a configuration in which a plurality of frame buffers are set, in a situation where signal output is performed based on drawing data created in one frame buffer, the next update cycle is supported for other frame buffers. It is necessary to create drawing data.

In any of the above configurations, in order to simultaneously display the individually defined individual images on the display screen, the coordinates and size of each individual image are specified, and all of the individual images are drawn in the frame buffer. If it is necessary to do so, the processing load required to create the drawing data for one frame increases. Then, if the processing load exceeds the update cycle, processing omission will occur.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features F1 to F15, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the above features C'1, the above features D1 to D10, and the above features E1. ~ E8, the following features G1 to G9, the following features G'1 to G'2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. The configuration limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. An arrangement means for arranging image data of an object in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of steps S3602 to S3604 in VDP135) and a viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (step S3605 in VDP135). (Function to execute the process of) and a drawing setting means (in VDP135) that projects the image data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generates generated data based on the data projected on the projection plane. The function of executing the process of steps S361 to S3613), the storage means (frame areas 142a, 142b) for storing the generated data (drawing data) generated by the above, and
A display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) that outputs and displays an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means to the display means (design display device 31), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The object includes a plurality of partial objects with a predetermined connecting portion sandwiched between them, and a connecting object capable of displacing the relative positions of the partial objects with respect to the connecting portion. ,
The concatenated object used when displaying the same type of special character includes a plurality of types of special concatenated objects (concatenated objects PC35 and PC36) in which the positions of the concatenated portions are different from each other.
The display control means switches the connected object used when displaying the special character to any one of the plurality of types of special connected objects (step S4507, step S4516, step S4523 in the display CPU 131). A gaming machine characterized in that an image corresponding to the generated data generated by using the above-mentioned processing is displayed on the display means.

According to feature G1, one of a plurality of types of special concatenated objects is used to display the same type of special character. The positions of the connection portions of these plurality of types of special connection objects are different from each other. As a result, it is possible to keep the data capacity of the special connection object alone smaller than the configuration in which a single special connection object is provided in which the connection portions are collectively set, and the reading of one special connection object can be performed. Can be performed well. Further, by providing a plurality of types of special connection objects as described above at the development stage of the gaming machine, it becomes easy to adjust the movement of the special character when developing the gaming machine.

From the above, it is possible to handle the concatenated object well.

Feature G2. The plurality of types of special concatenation objects include a first concatenation object (first concatenation object PC35) and a second concatenation object (second concatenation object PC36).
The concatenated object switching means has a configuration in which the object for displaying the special character is switched from the first concatenated object to the second concatenated object at a specific display switching timing.
The arrangement means arranges the second connected object together with the first connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space in a situation where the first connected object is set as an object for displaying the special character. It is provided with overlapping arrangement means (a function of executing the process of step S4602 and step S4603 in VDP135) for arranging the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing. The gaming machine according to the feature G1.

According to the feature G2, the object for displaying the special character is switched from the first connected object to the second connected object at the specific display switching timing, and the movement of the special character changes. In this case, the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space at a timing prior to the specific display switching timing. As a result, at a specific display switching timing, it is not necessary to execute the process for starting the placement of the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the parameter information of the second connected object that has already been placed is updated. Just do it. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which both the arrangement processing and the update processing of the second connected object are performed at the specific display switching timing.

Feature G3. Parameter updating means for updating parameter information including at least the coordinate and angle information of the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space in order to change the display content of the image (processes of step S4605, step S4613, and step S4619 in VDP135). (Function to execute) is used when generating the generated data,
The processing load for updating the parameter information of the object is smaller than the processing load for starting the placement of the object in the virtual three-dimensional space.
Further, the plurality of types of special connection objects include a first connection object (first connection object PC35) and a second connection object (second connection object PC36).
The concatenated object switching means has a configuration in which the object for displaying the special character is switched from the first concatenated object to the second concatenated object at a specific display switching timing.
The arrangement means arranges the second connected object together with the first connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space in a situation where the first connected object is set as an object for displaying the special character. It is provided with overlapping arrangement means (a function of executing the process of step S4602 and step S4603 in VDP135) for arranging the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing. The gaming machine according to the feature G1.

According to the feature G3, the object for displaying the special character is switched from the first connected object to the second connected object at the specific display switching timing, and the movement of the special character changes. In this case, the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space at a timing prior to the specific display switching timing. As a result, at a specific display switching timing, it is not necessary to execute the process for starting the placement of the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the parameter information of the second connected object that has already been placed is updated. Just do it. Therefore, the processing load at a specific display switching timing can be reduced.

Feature G4. The parameter updating means is the first in a situation where both the first connected object and the second connected object are arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space and before the specific display switching timing. The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein not only the connected object but also the parameter information of the second connected object is updated.

According to the feature G4, not only the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space but also the parameter information of the second connected object is updated before the specific display switching timing. As a result, when a specific display switching timing is reached, the parameter information that has been updated up to that point can be used, and the processing load at that timing can be reduced.

Feature G5. The generated data is derived by a derivation means (a function of executing arithmetic processing for connected objects in the display CPU 131) for deriving parameter information of objects arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space according to the display content of an image to be updated. Used in the generation of
The parameter updating means updates the parameter information derived by the derivation means as parameter information of an object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, and also updates the first connected object and the first connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space. In a situation where both of the two connected objects are arranged and before the specific display switching timing, the parameter information determined by the derivation means for the first connected object is transmitted to the first connected object. The gaming machine according to feature G4, which is updated as parameter information of both the second connected object and the second connected object.

According to the feature G5, in the configuration in which the parameter information of the second concatenated object is updated even before the specific display switching timing, the parameter information of the first concatenated object is used as the parameter information for the second concatenated object. Will be done. As a result, compared to the configuration in which the parameter information is individually applied to each of the first connected object and the second connected object at the timing before the specific display switching timing, the display switching timing is earlier than the specific display switching timing. The processing load at the timing can be reduced.

Feature G6. 2. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature G6, in the configuration in which the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing, the second connected object is arranged at the same coordinates as the first connected object. , The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the coordinates are individually specified for the second connected object.

Feature G7. By adjusting the transparency value information applied to the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, the transparency value setting means (in VDP135) for setting the object as either a display target or a non-display target on the display screen. The function of executing the processing of step S4604, step S4612, and step S4618) is used when generating the generated data.
In the concatenated object switching means, the transparent value information that the first concatenated object becomes the display target and the second concatenated object becomes the non-display target at the timing before the specific display switching timing is transmitted to the concatenated objects. In addition to being set, transparent value information in which the first concatenated object is the non-display target and the second concatenated object is the display mode after the specific display switching timing is set in the concatenated objects. The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G6.

According to the feature G7, in the configuration in which the second connected object is arranged before the specific display switching timing, the switching of the connected objects to be displayed before and after the specific display switching timing is applied to each connected object. It is done only by switching the transparent value information. As a result, the processing load related to the switching of the connected objects to be displayed can be reduced.

Feature G8. As the display effect over the display period for a plurality of update timings, the number of the first specific display effect (first effect period) and the number of individual images displayed on the display screen is increased as compared with the first specific display effect. A second specific display effect (second effect period) in which an individual image is displayed, which has a larger processing load than the individual image displayed in the first specific display effect. Has been set and
The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G7, wherein the specific display switching timing is a timing at which the first specific display effect is switched to the second specific display effect.

According to the feature G8, since the switching from the first specific display effect to the second specific display effect is performed at the specific display switching timing, there is a concern that the processing load will be extremely increased at that timing. Since it has a configuration such as G2, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature G9. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of update timings, a first specific display effect (first effect period) and a second specific display effect (second effect period) in which the processing load when displaying an image becomes large. ) And, are set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G7, wherein the specific display switching timing is a timing at which the first specific display effect is switched to the second specific display effect.

According to the feature G9, since the switching from the first specific display effect to the second specific display effect is performed at the specific display switching timing, there is a concern that the processing load will be extremely increased at that timing. Since it has a configuration such as G2, the processing load can be reduced.

The invention of the feature G group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, those provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, an object that is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as characters and patterns is pasted on the object. Drawing data is created by projecting the textured object onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a three-dimensional image is displayed.

Here, as an object for a character, a connected object having a plurality of partial objects with a predetermined connecting portion sandwiched between them and capable of displacing the relative positions of those partial objects with respect to the connecting portion is set. By doing so, the movement of the character can be made smooth. However, since the connected object has a connecting portion as described above, it is more complicated to create the connected object at the game machine development stage than the object having no connecting portion. Under such circumstances, when it is desired to change the movement of the character in the process of developing a gaming machine, if the connected object is recreated from the beginning, the development period will be prolonged. On the other hand, if the connection part is set so as to correspond to all movements from the beginning, the data capacity of the connection object will increase accordingly.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features G1 to G9, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the above features C'1, the above features D1 to D10, and the above features E1. ~ E8, the above features F1 to F15, the following features G'1 to G'2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. The configuration limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic G'group>
Features G'1. A display means having a display screen and
A display storage means that stores image data in advance,
A display control means for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data and updating the content of the image for one frame at a predetermined update timing.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores specific image data used when displaying a specific image as an individual image of a specific type.
The display control means
A first display control means for displaying the specific image by using the specific image data, and
A second display control means for displaying a simple image, which requires a smaller processing load for displaying an image than when displaying the specific image using the specific image data, as an individual image of the specific type.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G'1, when displaying a specific type of individual image, the specific image data to be used can be selected according to the processing load of the update timing at which the display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable display according to the processing load.

Feature G'2. A display means having a display screen and
A display storage means that stores image data in advance,
A display control means for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data and updating the content of the image at a predetermined update timing.
In a gaming machine equipped with
As image data used when displaying a specific type of individual image in the display storage means, the first specific image data and the processing load required for displaying the image are different from the case of the first specific image data. The second specific image data is stored,
The display control means
The first display control means for displaying the specific type of individual image by using the first specific image data, and
A second display control means for displaying the specific type of individual image by using the second specific image data, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G'2, when displaying a specific type of individual image, the specific image data to be used can be selected according to the processing load of the update timing at which the display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable display according to the processing load.

The inventions of the above-mentioned feature G'group are effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character etc. are stored in the memory for the image data. Has been done. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Here, the image displayed on the display screen is updated so as to be performed at a predetermined update cycle, and drawing data for one frame is created in time for the update cycle and displayed on the display device. The signal output needs to be done. Further, when creating drawing data, an operation for specifying the coordinates and size of each of the individual images displayed at the same time on the display screen is performed, and the drawing data is created based on the calculation result.

In the above configuration, the processing load increases as the number of individual images to be calculated at the same time increases. Then, when the processing load is locally increased, there is a concern that processing omission may occur.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features G'1 to G'2, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the above features C'1, and the above features D1 to D10. , The above features E1 to E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. The configuration limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) composed of a large number of dots arranged vertically and horizontally, and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
By setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame areas 82a, 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, drawing data is created in the setting storage means, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is generated. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) for displaying an image on the display screen based on output to the display means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means
Image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to the individual images so that the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen (a function of executing the processes of steps S1104 to S1105 in the VDP 76, step S1403 in the VDP 76). ~ Function to execute the process of step S1404) and
Regarding the data in the unit setting area where the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, the image data of the overlapping portion of the back side individual image is reflected on the image data of the overlapping portion of the front side individual image. Overlapping reflection means (function to execute the first effect addition process in VDP76, function to execute the second effect addition process in VDP76) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature H1, when a plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction, the function of displaying the image data of the overlapping portion of the back side individual image in a state of being reflected on the image data of the overlapping portion of the front side individual image. have. As a result, when displaying the front side individual image, it is possible to display the image in a state in which the color of the back side individual image is reflected, and it is possible to display a preferable image in appearance.

Feature H2. The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with numerical information that defines color information.
The duplicate reflection means
Arithmetic processing execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S1204 in VDP76, step S1506 in VDP76) for executing predetermined arithmetic processing using the numerical information of each unit image data overlapping with each other in the plurality of individual images. Function to execute processing) and
A setting process executing means (a function for executing the process of step S1205 in the VDP 76, VDP76) for setting the calculation result data of the calculation process in the unit setting area corresponding to the overlapping unit image data in the setting storage means. Function to execute the process of step S1507 in
The gaming machine according to the feature H1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.

According to the feature H2, by executing the arithmetic processing using the numerical information of the unit image data corresponding to the overlapping portions in the depth direction, the excellent effect as described in the feature H1 can be obtained.

Feature H3. Each unit setting area has a configuration in which numerical information can be set within a range up to the limit value, and the display control means corresponds to the unit setting area as a large numerical value is set as the numerical information. The image signal is output so that bright colors are displayed at the dots.
The arithmetic processing execution means according to feature H2, characterized in that, as the predetermined arithmetic processing, an addition processing for adding numerical information of each unit image data overlapping with each other in the plurality of individual images is executed. Game machine.

According to the feature H3, when the image is displayed based on the drawing data set in the setting storage means, the brighter the dot corresponding to the unit setting area in which the numerical information of a large numerical value is set is displayed. Since it is configured, the complexity of the dot display control can be suppressed. In the configuration, the unit setting area in which the result of adding the numerical information of each unit image data corresponding to the overlapping portion in the depth direction is set has a numerical value larger than that in which the image data of the individual image on the front side is simply set. Numerical information is set. Therefore, it is possible to display an image that reflects the color and brightness of the individual image on the back side at the overlapping portion. As a result, while utilizing the relationship between the numerical information set in the unit setting area and the image display for the numerical information, and further utilizing a relatively simple arithmetic process called addition process, as described in the above feature H1. It can produce excellent effects.

Feature H4. When the overlapping reflection means reflects the image data of the overlapping portion of the front side individual image with respect to the image data of the overlapping portion of the front side individual image, the ratio of the back side image data reflected is reduced. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, which comprises a reflection reducing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1502 to S1504 in VDP76).

According to the feature H4, it is possible to reflect the image data of the front side individual image in the state of reducing the reflection ratio of the image data of the back side individual image. As a result, for example, if the image data of the individual image on the back side is reflected as it is, the ratio of reflecting the image data of the individual image on the back side is reduced when the display of the individual image on the front side cannot be performed well. It is possible to satisfactorily display the front side individual image in a state where the side individual image is reflected.

Feature H5. The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with numerical information that defines color information.
The duplicate setting means
An arithmetic processing execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S1506 in VDP76) that executes a predetermined arithmetic processing using the numerical information of each unit image data that overlaps each other in the plurality of individual images.
A setting process executing means (a function of executing the process of step S1507 in VDP76) for setting the calculation result data of the calculation process in the unit setting area corresponding to each overlapping unit image data in the setting storage means. ,
Of the unit image data to be calculated in the calculation process, the reflection reduction means for reducing the numerical information of the individual image on the back side (the function of executing the processes of steps S1502 to S1504 in VDP76) and
The gaming machine according to the feature H1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.

According to the feature H5, by executing the arithmetic processing using the numerical information of the unit image data corresponding to the overlapping portions in the depth direction, the excellent effect as described in the feature H1 can be obtained.

Further, it is possible to reflect the image data of the front side individual image in the state of reducing the ratio of reflecting the image data of the back side individual image. As a result, for example, when the image data of the individual image on the back side cannot be displayed well when the image data of the individual image on the back side is reflected as it is, the ratio of reflecting the image data of the individual image on the back side is reduced and the back side is reduced. It is possible to satisfactorily display the front side individual image in a state where the individual image is reflected.

In particular, since the target for reducing the numerical information in the arithmetic processing is not the front side individual image but the back side individual image, the color tone of the front side individual image positively added in front of the back side individual image is not suppressed. , The individual image on the back side can be reflected.

Feature H6. Each unit setting area has a configuration in which numerical information can be set within a range up to the limit value, and the display control means corresponds to the unit setting area as a large numerical value is set as the numerical information. The image signal is output so that bright colors are displayed at the dots.
The arithmetic processing execution means is configured to execute, as the predetermined arithmetic processing, an addition processing for adding numerical information of each unit image data overlapping with each other in the plurality of individual images.
The gaming machine according to feature H5, wherein the reflection reducing means reduces the numerical information of the individual image on the back side at a predetermined ratio among the unit image data to be added in the addition process.

According to the feature H6, when the image is displayed based on the drawing data set in the setting storage means, the brighter the dot corresponding to the unit setting area in which the numerical information of a large numerical value is set is displayed. Since it is configured, the complexity of the dot display control can be suppressed. In the configuration, the unit setting area in which the result of adding the numerical information of each unit image data corresponding to the overlapping portion in the depth direction is set has a numerical value larger than that in which the image data of the individual image on the front side is simply set. Numerical information is set. Therefore, it is possible to display an image that reflects the color and brightness of the individual image on the back side at the overlapping portion. As a result, while utilizing the relationship between the numerical information set in the unit setting area and the image display for the numerical information, and further utilizing a relatively simple arithmetic process called addition process, as described in the above feature H1. It can produce excellent effects.

However, in the configuration in which the addition processing of the numerical information is executed as described above, it is assumed that the numerical information as a result of the addition processing exceeds the limit value of the unit setting area, and then the display of the individual image on the front side is displayed. I can't do it well. On the other hand, it is possible to reflect the numerical information of the unit image data of the individual image on the back side in the image data of the individual image on the front side in a state of being reduced at a predetermined ratio. As a result, it is possible to prevent the numerical information of the result of the addition process from exceeding the limit value of the unit setting area, and it is possible to satisfactorily display the front side individual image in a state where the back side individual image is reflected. Become.

Feature H7. The display storage means stores in advance transparent value adjustment data (partial addition data PD19) in which a transparent value is set corresponding to each unit image data of the front side individual image.
The reflection reducing means is set in the transparency value adjusting data for each of the image data of the front side individual image and each unit image data in which the calculation process is executed in the image data of the back side individual image. The gaming machine according to feature H5 or H6, wherein each of the transparent values is applied.

According to the feature H7, in order to reduce the ratio of reflecting the individual image on the back side, the transparency value adjustment data may be read from the display storage means and applied to the image data of the individual image on the back side. , The complexity of the process for reducing the ratio can be suppressed.

Feature H8. The setting storage means is provided with coordinate specifying means (a function of executing arithmetic processing for the second effect effect in the display CPU 72) for specifying coordinates when the image data is set in the setting storage means.
The reflection reducing means is set in the transparency value adjusting data for each of the image data of the front side individual image and each unit image data in which the calculation process is executed in the image data of the back side individual image. The description in feature H7, wherein the transparency value adjustment data is set for the coordinates specified in the front side individual image by the coordinate specifying means so that each of the transparent values is applied. Game machine.

According to the feature H8, when the ratio of reflecting the back side individual image is reduced, the transparency value adjustment data is read from the display storage means, and the transparency value adjustment data is further used as the image data of the front side individual image. Since it is sufficient to set the coordinates to be the same as the coordinates to which is set, the complexity of the process for reducing the ratio can be suppressed.

Feature H9. The front side individual image is an effect image (effect image CH2) having a large number of unit image data in which numerical information defining color information is associated with the image data and a transparency value applied to the numerical information is set. ). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8.

According to the feature H9, the effect image can be displayed satisfactorily.

Feature H10. The effect image is used to give a visual effect to a predetermined base image (character CH1).
The game according to feature H9, wherein the display storage means individually stores the image data of the base image (sprite data PD16) and the image data of the effect image (effect data PD17). Machine.

According to the feature H10, when the base image is displayed, it is possible to display the base image alone, and it is also possible to display the base image in a state where the effect image is applied.

Features H11. The unit image data is configured so that numerical information that defines color information is associated with it and a transparent value applied to the numerical information can be set.
The image data setting means is the case where the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, and the transparency corresponding to the information to be transmitted to the unit image data of the front side individual image corresponding to the overlapping portion. When the value is not set, the unit image data of the front side individual image is set in the unit setting area of the setting destination without reflecting the unit image data of the back side individual image.
The duplication reflecting means is a case where the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, and the transparency value corresponding to information to be transmitted to the unit image data of the front side individual image corresponding to the overlapping portion. When is set, the unit image data of the front side individual image is applied to the unit image data of the front side individual image in a state where the transparent value is applied to the numerical information with respect to the unit setting area of the setting destination. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H10, characterized in that data in a state reflecting the above is set.

According to the feature H11, it is possible to determine whether or not to reflect the image data of the individual image on the back side based on the setting status of the transparency value for the unit image data of the individual image on the front side, and the process related to the determination. The complexity of the configuration is suppressed.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature H group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character etc. are stored in the memory for the image data. Has been done. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon which is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture which is 2D image data such as characters and patterns is pasted on the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon with a texture attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a three-dimensional image is displayed.

Here, as a kind of display effect, a smoke screen for showing the appearance of an explosion may be displayed. In addition, clouds may be displayed to indicate that the weather is cloudy, or rain may be displayed to indicate that the weather is rainy. These individual images are supplementarily displayed in front of the background or the character. In this case, if the individual image is displayed regardless of the background or the color tone of the character, the player feels uncomfortable, which is not preferable.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features H1 to H11, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the above features C'1, the above features D1 to D10, and the above features E1. ~ E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the above features G'1 to G'2, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. The configuration limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) and
A display storage means (memory module 74) in which image data is stored in advance corresponding to individual images individually displayed on the display screen, and
Setting storage means (frame areas 82a, 82b) in which drawing data is set using the image data, and
Derivation means (a function of executing task processing in the display CPU 72) for deriving parameter information including coordinate information of the setting destination of the image data in the setting storage means, and
The drawing data is created by setting the image data in the setting storage means according to the parameter information derived by the derivation means, and the image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Display control means (VDP76) for displaying an image on the display screen based on
In a gaming machine equipped with
The derivation means
When there is image data for which the derivation of the parameter information should be newly started, the start derivation means (in the display CPU 72) for executing the derivation start process for newly starting the derivation of the parameter information for the image data. (Function to execute the process of steps S612 to S614) and
For the image data for which the derivation start process has already been completed, the update derivation means for executing the update process for updating the parameter information in accordance with the change in the display content of the image (steps S615 to S617 in the display CPU 72). Function to execute processing) and
Although it is not included in the display target on the display screen at the image update timing corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start process, it may be included in the display target on the display screen at the subsequent update timing. Preliminary derivation means (a function of executing the processes of steps S607 to S611 in the display CPU 72) for executing the derivation start process for the image data corresponding to the individual image, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature I1, drawing data is created by setting image data in the setting storage means according to the parameter information derived by the derivation means, and an image signal is output to the display means according to the drawing data. By doing so, the image is displayed on the display screen.

In the above configuration, in the derivation means, when there is image data for which the derivation of the parameter information should be newly started, the derivation of the parameter information is started by executing the derivation start process for the image data, and then the derivation of the parameter information is started. At the image update timing of, the parameter information that started the derivation may be updated. As a result, when a predetermined individual image is displayed over a display period for a plurality of update timings, it is not necessary to repeatedly set the parameter information for the image data of the individual image. It suffices to repeatedly update the parameter information that has already been set.

In addition, although it is not included in the display target on the display screen at the image update timing corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start process, it may be included in the display target on the display screen at the subsequent update timing. Derivation start processing may be executed for the image data corresponding to the image. As a result, it is possible to complete the derivation start processing for the individual images outside the display screen in advance. For example, when there are many individual images to be displayed on the display screen, those individual images can be displayed. It is possible to distribute the execution timing of the derivation start process so as to prevent the derivation start process from being executed at the same time for the image data.

From the above, it is possible to reduce the processing load for displaying an image.

Feature I2. The advance derivation means is included in the display target on the display screen at the image update timing corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start process, but the derivation start process has not been completed yet. For the image data corresponding to the image, priority within the display range for executing the derivation start process with priority over the individual image not included in the display target on the display screen at the update timing. The gaming machine according to feature I1, characterized in that it includes means (a function of executing the processes of steps S609 to S610 in the display CPU 72).

According to the feature I2, in a configuration having the above feature I1 and capable of executing the derivation start processing in advance for the image data of the individual image outside the display screen, the display target on the display screen is more than the image data. The image data corresponding to the individual image that is included in but has not yet completed the derivation start process is executed with priority given to the derivation start process. As a result, in the configuration in which the execution timings of the derivation start processing are distributed as described above, the occurrence of inconvenience such that the individual images that should be originally displayed are not displayed can be suppressed.

Feature I3. The advance derivation means is not included in the display target on the display screen at the image update timing corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start process, but is displayed on the display screen at the subsequent update timing. When the derivation start process is executed for the image data corresponding to the individual image that may be included in the target, priority is given to the image data of the individual image on the earlier side to be displayed on the display screen. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, characterized in that it includes a priority means outside the display range (a function of executing the process of step S611 in the display CPU 72) so that the derivation start process is executed. ..

According to the feature I3, when there are a plurality of individual images that are outside the display screen but may be included in the display target at the subsequent update timing, the timing of the display target on the display screen is earlier. Since the derivation start processing is preferentially executed from the image data of the individual images of the above, the processing load can be well distributed.

Feature I4. The derivation means outputs to the display control means drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information that specifies image data of individual images included in the image for one update timing and parameter information derived for the image data. A drawing instruction means (a function of executing the process of step S408 in the display CPU 72) is provided.
The display control means sets the image data in the setting storage means according to the information instructed by the drawing instruction information, and creates drawing data for the update timing corresponding to the drawing instruction information. can be,
Further, when the drawing instruction means outputs the drawing instruction information corresponding to the image corresponding to one update timing, the image data of the individual image not included in the display target on the display screen at the update timing is described. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the drawing instruction information is output so as not to include the information corresponding to the image data even if the derivation start processing is completed.

According to the feature I4, even if the derivation means starts the derivation of the parameter information in advance, only the image data of the individual images in the display screen is provided as the drawing instruction information output to the display control means. , Information corresponding to the image data of the individual image outside the display screen is not provided. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of drawing instruction information output to the display control means. Further, the display control means does not need to determine whether or not the designated individual image is in the display screen, and even if the determination is not made, the display control of the individual image outside the display screen is useless. No need to do.

Feature I5. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which the individual image is displayed at a predetermined position in the range of the back image in front of the back image, and the update timing of 1 is included as the back image. Includes a wide range rear image set wider than the minute display range,
The wide-range rear image is provided with display changing means (a function of executing the process of step S604 in the display CPU 72) for changing the display range for the update timing of 1 to a position different from the display range at the previous update timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4.

According to the feature I5, since the display range for the update timing of 1 may be changed, the standardization of the display effect can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the image can be increased. In this case, since the configuration of the above feature I1 is provided and the derivation start processing is executed in advance for the individual images outside the display screen, even if the display range for the update timing of 1 is switched. On the other hand, it is possible to satisfactorily derive the parameter information of each individual image.

Feature I6. Equipped with an operation reception means (production operation device 48) that accepts operations by the player.
The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein the display changing means changes the display range for the update timing of 1 based on the operation being received by the operation receiving means.

According to the feature I6, since the display range for the update timing of 1 may be changed based on the operation of the operation receiving means by the player, the standardization of the display effect is suppressed and the degree of attention to the image is reduced. It becomes possible to increase. However, in a configuration in which the display range for one update timing is changed based on an operation on the operation receiving means, it is difficult to predict the timing at which the change will occur. In this case, since the configuration of the above feature I1 is provided and the derivation start processing is executed in advance for the individual images outside the display screen, even if the display range for the update timing of 1 is switched. On the other hand, it is possible to satisfactorily derive the parameter information of each individual image.

Feature I7. The advance derivation means is not included in the display target on the display screen at the image update timing corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start process, but is displayed on the display screen at the subsequent update timing. The gaming machine according to feature I5 or I6, wherein it is determined whether or not an individual image that may be included in the target exists based on the display range at that time.

According to the feature I7, the individual image to be the start target of the derivation of the parameter information is grasped with reference to the set display range. As a result, in the configuration in which the display range is switched, the execution timing of the derivation start process is distributed according to the currently set display range, and the dispersion can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature I8. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which an individual image is displayed in front of the rear image.
Further, an operation receiving means (production operation device 48) that accepts operations by the player, and
A display changing means (a function of executing the process of step S604 in the display CPU 72) for changing the contents of the rear image based on the operation being received by the operation receiving means, and
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, characterized in that

According to the feature I8, since the content of the rear image may be changed based on the operation of the operation receiving means by the player, the standardization of the display effect can be suppressed and the degree of attention to the image can be increased. It becomes. However, in a configuration in which the content of the rear image is changed based on the operation to the operation receiving means, it is difficult to predict the timing when the change occurs. In this case, since the configuration of the above feature I1 is provided and the derivation start processing is executed in advance for the individual images outside the display screen, even if the contents of the rear image are switched, each of them It is possible to satisfactorily derive the parameter information of individual images.

Feature I9. The advance derivation means is not included in the display target on the display screen at the image update timing corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start process, but is displayed on the display screen at the subsequent update timing. The gaming machine according to feature I8, wherein it is determined whether or not an individual image that may be included in the target exists based on the content of the back image at that time.

According to the feature I9, the individual image to be started from the derivation of the parameter information is grasped based on the content of the set back image. As a result, in the configuration in which the content of the rear image is switched, the execution timing of the derivation start process is dispersed according to the content of the rear image currently set, and the dispersion can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature I10. The derivation means includes a derivation storage means (work RAM 73) used when deriving the parameter information.
The derivation means used for deriving the parameter information of the image data when there is image data to newly start the derivation of the parameter information as the derivation start process. At least the search process for searching the area in the storage means (step S612 in the display CPU 72) and the area initialization process for initializing the area secured based on the search result (step S613 in the display CPU 72) are executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I9, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature I10, in the derivation start process, not only the process of setting the parameter information but also the process of searching the area used for deriving the parameter information and the process of initializing the area secured based on the search result are initialized. Since the processing to be performed is executed, the processing load is larger than that of the update processing. On the other hand, since the configuration of the above feature I1 is provided and the execution timing of the derivation start processing can be dispersed, the processing load can be dispersed.

The invention of the feature I group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character etc. are stored in the memory for the image data. Has been done. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon which is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture which is 2D image data such as characters and patterns is pasted on the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon with a texture attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a three-dimensional image is displayed.

Here, the image displayed on the display screen is updated so as to be performed at a predetermined update cycle, and drawing data for one frame is created in time for the update cycle and displayed on the display device. The signal output needs to be done. Further, when creating drawing data, an operation for specifying the coordinates and size of each of the individual images displayed at the same time on the display screen is performed, and the drawing data is created based on the calculation result.

In the above configuration, the processing load increases as the number of individual images to be calculated at the same time increases. Then, when the processing load is locally increased, there is a concern that processing omission may occur.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features I1 to I10, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the above features C'1, the above features D1 to D10, and the above features E1. ~ E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the above features G'1 to G'2, the above features H1 to H11, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. The configuration limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) composed of a large number of dots arranged vertically and horizontally, and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
Drawing data creating means (a function of executing the process of step S505 in VDP76) for creating drawing data in the setting storage means using the image data, and
An image signal output means (display circuit 94) that displays an image on the display screen based on outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
A data adjusting means (scaler) that adjusts the data size of the drawing data created in the setting storage means to create adjusted data and outputs an image signal corresponding to the adjusted data from the image signal output means. 97) and
By changing the adjustment magnification of the data adjusting means, a change effect executing means (setting process for zoom-in effect in VDP76) that causes a size change effect that is at least one of enlargement and reduction of the individual image displayed on the display screen. Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J1, by adjusting the data size of the drawing data and changing the adjustment magnification when creating the adjusted data, the size change effect of the individual image displayed on the display screen is performed. As a result, the size change effect can be performed while reducing the processing load, as compared with the configuration in which the magnification is individually adjusted for each of the image data set in the setting storage means. From the above, it is possible to satisfactorily execute the size change effect.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the drawing data creating means creates the drawing data in the same size regardless of the adjustment magnification when the drawing data is created in the setting storage means.

According to the feature J2, since the drawing data creation means may create drawing data of a certain size regardless of the presence or absence of the size change effect and the content, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the processing related to the creation of the drawing data. You can change the size.

Features J3. The initial adjustment magnification is set as the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment means.
In the situation where the initial adjustment magnification is set, the data adjusting means is adjusted so that an image corresponding to the entire drawing data is displayed in a state adjusted to the resolution of the display screen. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, which is characterized in that data is created.

According to the feature J3, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described in the feature J1 or the like by using a configuration in which the resolution of the created drawing data is adjusted according to the display screen.

Features J4. The change effect executing means changes the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment means to an enlargement magnification larger than the initial adjustment magnification, thereby performing the size change effect corresponding to the enlargement of the individual image displayed on the display screen. The gaming machine according to feature J3, characterized in that it is provided with an expanding execution means (a function of executing the process of step S2701 in VDP76).

According to the feature J4, the size change effect corresponding to the enlargement of the individual image is performed based on the initial adjustment magnification. As a result, the drawing data creating means may create drawing data of a certain size regardless of the presence or absence and content of the size change effect. Therefore, it is possible to perform the size change effect while suppressing the complexity of the processing related to the creation of the drawing data.

Feature J5. The change effect executing means is smaller than the enlargement magnification within the range from the initial adjustment magnification to the enlargement magnification in the situation where the size change effect corresponding to the enlargement is performed by the enlargement execution means. It is provided with a reduction execution means (a function of executing the process of step S2701 in VDP76) for performing the size change effect corresponding to the reduction of the individual image displayed on the display screen by changing to the magnification. Characteristic The gaming machine according to the feature J4.

According to the feature J5, after setting the adjustment magnification to a predetermined enlargement magnification, the size change effect corresponding to the reduction of the individual image is performed by returning it to the initial adjustment magnification side. As a result, the drawing data creating means may create drawing data of a certain size regardless of the presence or absence and content of the size change effect. Therefore, it is possible to perform the size change effect while suppressing the complexity of the processing related to the creation of the drawing data.

Features J6. A power supply unit (power supply and launch control device 57) that is connected to an external power source and supplies the required operating power in the gaming machine, and
Initial setting means (a function of executing the process of step S305 in the display CPU 72) for setting the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment means to the initial adjustment magnification based on the start of supply of operating power from the power supply unit.
The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J5.

According to the feature J6, in the configuration in which the size change effect is performed by changing the adjustment magnification of the data adjusting means, for example, when the power ON operation of the gaming machine is performed and the supply of the operating power from the power supply unit is started. The above adjustment magnification is set to the initial adjustment magnification. As a result, the initial adjustment magnification can be set satisfactorily.

Feature J7. When the adjustment magnification of the data adjusting means is changed from the initial adjustment magnification in order to perform the size change effect, the magnification return means (enlargement flag in VDP76) for returning to the initial adjustment magnification after the end of the size change effect. The gaming machine according to any one of the features J3 to J6, which is characterized by having a function of clearing the above.

According to the feature J7, it is possible to display an image according to the resolution of the display screen after the size change effect is completed.

Features J8. The data adjusting means creates the adjusted data based on performing linear interpolation processing (processes in step S2802 and step S2806 in the display circuit 94) on the drawn data. The gaming machine according to any one of J7.

According to the feature J8, the linear interpolation processing can be used to obtain an excellent effect as described in the feature J1 and the like.

Features J9. The change effect executing means is such that a specific individual image among a plurality of individual images included in the image for one update timing when the size change effect is performed is included in the display screen as a whole. Individual adjustment means for adjusting parameter information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage means by the drawing data creation means (function of executing the processes of steps S2608 to S2612 in the display CPU 72). The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, characterized in that

In the configuration where the size change effect is performed by changing the magnification of the drawing data, it is assumed that the size of the specific individual image for which the entire image is to be displayed is changed and a part of the image is placed outside the display screen. Will be done. On the other hand, according to the feature J9, the parameter information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage means is adjusted so that the entire specific individual image is included in the display screen. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to display the entire specific individual image on the display screen while achieving the effects as described in the above-mentioned feature J1 and the like.

Features J10. In the change effect executing means, the specific individual image among the plurality of individual images included in the image for the update timing of 1 when the size change effect is performed is 1 when the size change effect is not performed. Parameter information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage means by the drawing data creating means so as to be the same as at least one of the size and the position displayed in the image for the update timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, characterized in that it includes individual adjusting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2608 to S2612 in the display CPU 72).

In the configuration where the size change effect is performed by changing the magnification of the drawing data, the size is changed even for a specific individual image for which at least one of the size and the position is not desired to be changed, and the element that is not desired to be changed is changed. It is expected that it will end up. On the other hand, according to the feature J10, the image data of the specific individual image is stored for setting so that at least one of the size and the position of the specific individual image is the same as when the size change effect is not performed. Parameter information when set to means is adjusted. As a result, it is possible to maintain the elements that are not desired to be changed for the specific individual image while achieving the effects as described in the above-mentioned feature J1 and the like.

Features J11. In the change effect executing means, the specific individual image among the plurality of individual images included in the image for one update timing when the size change effect is performed is the update timing immediately before the start of the size change effect. The size and coordinate information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage means by the drawing data creating means is adjusted so as to be the same as the size and position displayed in the image of. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, characterized in that it includes individual adjustment means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2608 to S2612 in the display CPU 72).

In a configuration in which the size change effect is performed by changing the magnification of the drawing data, the size and position of the size and position of the specific individual image that is desired to be the same as the image at the update timing immediately before the start of the size change effect. It is expected that changes will be made. On the other hand, according to the feature J11, the image data of the specific individual image is set so that the size and the position of the specific individual image are the same as the image of the update timing immediately before the start of the size change effect. The size and coordinate information when set in the storage means is adjusted. As a result, it is possible to maintain the display mode for a specific individual image while achieving the effects as described in the above-mentioned feature J1 and the like.

Features J12. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which the individual image for variation is variablely displayed in front of the rear image.
The gaming machine according to any one of features J9 to J11, wherein the specific individual image is the individual image for variation.

According to the feature J12, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the individual image for variation from fluctuating due to the size change effect.

Feature J13. The display effect includes a reach effect that displays the image for reach while the individual image for reach is displayed in standby mode.
The gaming machine according to feature J12, wherein the specific individual image is an individual image for the reach that is displayed on standby.

According to the feature J13, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the individual image for reach from fluctuating due to the size change effect.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature J group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character etc. are stored in the memory for the image data. Has been done. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions instead of simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon which is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture which is 2D image data such as characters and patterns is pasted on the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon with a texture attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a three-dimensional image is displayed.

Here, it is considered that the display effect can be diversified by performing the display effect of enlarging or reducing the image for one frame. However, it is not preferable that the processing load becomes large and the processing is dropped in order to perform the display effect, and on the other hand, for example, the number of individual images to be displayed is intentionally reduced in order to perform the display effect. If measures are taken to simplify the display content, the degree of attention to the display effect cannot be suitably increased.

Incidentally, for the configuration of any one of the above features J1 to J13, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the above features C'1, the above features D1 to D10, and the above features E1. ~ E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the above features G'1 to G'2, the above features H1 to H11, the above features I1 to I10, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. The configuration limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) for displaying an image on the display screen using image data stored in the display storage means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores a plurality of types of compressed moving image data used for reproducing a moving image.
The display control means
An expansion means (video decoder 93) that expands any of the moving image data into the expansion area and creates still image data for a plurality of update timings for the image corresponding to the moving image data.
By using the still image data for a plurality of update timings developed by the expansion means in the order specified in the moving image data, the moving image of the image corresponding to the moving image data can be used for the plurality of update timings. Video display execution means (function to execute setting processing for video in VDP76) to be displayed over the display period of
Of the plurality of types of moving image data, the second moving image data (moving image data PD55 for post-branching A) after the moving image based on the first moving image data (moving image data PD54 before branching) is displayed. A plurality of moving image production executing means (a function of executing arithmetic processing for moving images in the display CPU 72) for performing a group of display effects having a display period in which moving images are displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature K1, a group of display effects is performed using at least the first moving image data and the second moving image data, instead of using a single moving image data. As a result, for example, the first moving image data or the second moving image data can be commonly used to perform other display effects, and the moving image data can be individually used for each display effect. Compared to the set configuration, the storage capacity required to store moving image data can be reduced. Further, for example, at the start of the display effect of the group, the first moving image data is subjected to the development processing, and the second moving image is displayed during the period when the moving image is displayed by the first moving image data. It is possible to execute expansion processing on the data. In this case, the processing load at the time of starting the above-mentioned group of display effects can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the development of both moving image data is performed collectively.

From the above, it is possible to satisfactorily perform a display effect using moving image data.

Feature K2. Described in feature K1, the display control means includes means for causing a group of display effects by using either one of the first moving image data and the second moving image data. Gaming machine.

According to the feature K2, either one of the first moving image data and the second moving image data is commonly used to perform the other display effect. As a result, the storage capacity required for storing the moving image data can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the moving image data is individually set for each display effect.

Feature K3. The moving image based on the first moving image data corresponds to a series of display effects, and the moving image based on the second moving image data is a continuous display effect for the series of display effects based on the first moving image data. The gaming machine according to the feature K1 or K2, which is characterized in that it corresponds to.

According to the feature K3, since the first moving image data independently corresponds to a series of display effects, it is possible to perform a display effect using only the first moving image data. In this case, by separately preparing the first moving image data and the second moving image data, a single moving image data in which the first moving image data and the second moving image data are combined can be prepared in advance. Compared to the configuration in which the first moving image data is prepared in advance as well as being prepared, it is possible to perform multiple types of display effects while reducing the storage capacity required to store the moving image data. Become.

Features K4. When the group of display effects is performed by the plurality of moving image effect executing means, the developing means performs expansion processing on the second moving image data during a period in which the moving image is displayed by the first moving image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, characterized in that it is executed.

According to the feature K4, the expansion process is executed for the second moving image data by utilizing the period during which the moving image is displayed by the first moving image data. As a result, the processing load at the start of the group of display effects can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the development processing is collectively executed on the bipolar image data at the start of the group of display effects.

Feature K5. The plurality of moving image production execution means
A first moving image effect executing means for displaying a moving image based on the first moving image data (a function of executing the processes of steps S2913 to S2915 in the display CPU 72) and
A second moving image effect executing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2917 to S2919 in the display CPU 72) for displaying the moving image based on the second moving image data after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed, and
A third moving image effect executing means (steps S2920 to step S2920 in the display CPU 72) for displaying a moving image based on the third moving image data (moving image data PD56 for B after branching) after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed. Function to execute the processing of S2922) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4.

According to the feature K5, the first moving image data can be commonly used in each of the display effect using the second moving image data and the display effect using the third moving image data. As a result, a single moving image data that summarizes the first moving image data and the second moving image data, and a single moving image data that summarizes the first moving image data and the third moving image data. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned plurality of types of display effects while reducing the storage capacity required for storing moving image data, as compared with the configuration in which the moving image data is individually prepared.

Feature K6. Equipped with an operation reception means (production operation device 48) that accepts operations by the player.
The plurality of moving image effect executing means is based on the fact that the operation is received by the operation receiving means at the period when the moving image is displayed by the first moving image data or at the timing after the moving image display is completed. The feature is that the effect distribution means (a function of executing the process of step S2908 in the display CPU 72) for setting the subsequent effect execution target to the second moving image effect executing means or the third moving image effect executing means is provided. Features The gaming machine described in K5.

In a configuration in which the branch from the previously executed video display to a predetermined video display or a video display different from the predetermined video display is performed based on an arbitrary operation by the player, the operation itself is arbitrary, so that the operation itself is arbitrary. One moving image data cannot handle it. On the other hand, according to the feature K6, the first moving image data is prepared for the moving image display executed first, and the second moving image data and the third moving image data are prepared for the moving image display executed after the branch. The moving image data of is prepared. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect in which the content of the video display of the development destination is changed in the middle of the video display based on an arbitrary operation by the player.

Feature K7. When the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed and then the moving image based on the second moving image data or the moving image based on the third moving image data is displayed, the developing means displays the first moving image. The description in feature K6, wherein the expansion process is executed only for the first moving image data among the first to third moving image data before the start timing of the moving image display by the data. Game machine.

According to the feature K7, the processing load when starting the display effect of the group can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the development process is collectively executed for each moving image data at the start of the display effect of the group.

Feature K8. The effect distribution means is the operation reception means at the determination timing, which is in the middle of displaying the moving image based on the first moving image data and is several minutes before the determination update timing before the end timing. When it is specified that the operation is accepted, the effect execution target after the moving image display by the first moving image data is set to the second moving image effect executing means or the third moving image effect executing means. The gaming machine according to the feature K6 or K7.

According to the feature K8, since the determination of the moving image data of the distribution destination is performed before the timing when the moving image display by the first moving image data ends, the moving image display by the first moving image data is performed. During this period, a period for performing expansion processing on the moving image data of the distribution destination is secured. As a result, a new moving image display can be smoothly started after the moving image display based on the first moving image data is completed.

Feature K9. When the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed and then the moving image based on the second moving image data or the moving image based on the third moving image data is displayed, the developing means starts from the determination timing. The gaming machine according to feature K8, characterized in that the expansion processing for the moving image data of the distribution destination by the effect sorting means is executed in the period until the end timing of the moving image display by the first moving image data.

According to the feature K9, the expansion process is executed only for the moving image data of the distribution destination among the second moving image data and the third moving image data. As a result, the processing load of the expansion process can be suppressed, and the storage capacity required in the expansion area can be reduced.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature K group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character etc. are stored in the memory for the image data. Has been done. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Further, as image data, a configuration including moving image data is also known. Since the data capacity of the moving image data is larger than that of the still image data, the moving image data is stored in the image data memory in a compressed state. Therefore, when moving image data is used, the moving image data is expanded into a predetermined memory area by using a decoder to obtain a plurality of still image data, and the plurality of still image data are used in advance each time the image update timing is reached. It is necessary to use in the specified order.

Here, since it is necessary to decode and use the moving image data compressed as described above, there are restrictions on its use, and accordingly, there are restrictions on diversifying the display effect using the moving image display. Also occurs. On the other hand, a configuration in which the data is stored as a collection of still image data without compression is conceivable, but in this case, the storage capacity of the memory for the image data is extremely increased.

Further, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features K1 to K9, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the above features C'1, the above features D1 to D10, and the above features E1. ~ E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the above features G'1 to G'2, the above features H1 to H11, the above features I1 to I10, the above features J1 to J13, and the following features L1 to L19. The configuration limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
A display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) that displays an image on the display screen using the image data and updates the content of the image at a predetermined update timing.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores specific image data used when displaying a specific image as an individual image of a specific type.
The display control means
By using the specific image data at a predetermined first update timing, the specific image is displayed as a part of a plurality of types of individual images included in the image displayed on the display screen. The first display control means (function to execute step S504 and step S505 in VDP76) and
A second update timing in which the processing load related to the display of the individual images excluding the specific type of individual images among the various individual images included in the images displayed on the display screen is larger than that of the first update timing. In the second display control means (step S3302 in the display CPU 72), an image that requires less processing load to display the image than when the specific image is displayed using the specific image data is displayed as the specific type of individual image. Or the function of executing the process of step S3307 and the processes of step S504 and step S505 in VDP76) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature L1, at the second update timing in which the processing load related to the display of the individual images excluding the specific type of individual images is larger than that at the first update timing, the processing required for display as compared with the specific image. An image with a small load is displayed. As a result, the processing load related to the image display can be reduced at the second update timing. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the display mode such as displaying a plurality of types of individual images at the same time while suppressing the occurrence of processing omissions.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the second display control means displays a single-color image as an image having a small processing load.

According to the feature L2, a single color image is displayed on the display screen instead of the specific image. In this case, the processing load for displaying an image having a small processing load is smaller than that for displaying an image of a plurality of colors, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Feature L3. The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein the color of the single color image is set to the same color as the base color of the specific image.

According to the feature L3, since the color of the single color image and the base color of the specific image are the same, the player feels uncomfortable when the single color image is displayed instead of the specific image. Hard to give. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load while reducing the discomfort given to the player.

Feature L4. The specific image is configured to be modifiable.
When the color that is the base color of the specific image is changed due to the change of the specific image, the second display control means sets the color of the single color image as the base color of the changed specific image. The gaming machine according to feature L3, characterized in that the display CPU 72 includes a color changing means (a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the display CPU 72).

According to the feature L4, since the specific image can be changed, the display mode can be diversified. Here, when the color of the specific image is changed, the color of the single color image as the image having a small processing load is changed to the base color of the changed specific image. As a result, a single color image having the same color as the base color of the changed specific image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player and reduce the processing load while diversifying the display mode.

Feature L5. The display screen is composed of a plurality of dots arranged vertically and horizontally.
The display control means controls each dot output based on the image data to display an image corresponding to the image data on the display screen.
The second display control means is any one of the features L2 to L4, characterized in that, when a predetermined inspection condition is satisfied, the single color image is displayed on the entire display screen. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature L5, when a predetermined inspection condition is satisfied, a single color image is displayed on the entire display screen. As a result, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on, a single color image is displayed on the entire display screen when the initial setting process is executed as an inspection condition, thereby inspecting for missing dots. Can be done.

Feature L6. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which an individual image is displayed in front of the background image.
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, wherein the specific type of individual image is the background image.

According to the feature L6, an image having a small processing load is displayed as a background image. In this case, since the background image is less noticeable than other types of individual images, it is less likely to give the player a sense of discomfort. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's discomfort and reduce the processing load.

Feature L7. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
Based on setting the image data in the predetermined setting storage means (frame areas 82a, 82b), the image is displayed on the display screen, and the content of the image is displayed each time the predetermined update timing is reached. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) to be updated,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means
Display execution means (display CPU 72 executes V interrupt processing) so that a predetermined base image is displayed in a display area corresponding to a storage area in which the image data is not set in the setting storage means. And the function to execute steps S504 and S505 in VDP76)
By not setting the image data in the storage area of the setting storage means corresponding to the specific range of the image according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen, the specific range The base display utilization means (a function of executing the process of step S3302 or step S3307 in the display CPU 72 and the processes of step S504 and step S505 in VDP76) for displaying the base image in
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature L7, the base image is displayed in the display area corresponding to the storage area in which the image data is not set. As a result, when the content of the image is updated, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the image before the update remains.

Here, the image data is not set for the storage area of the setting storage means corresponding to the specific range according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen. As a result, the base image is displayed in the specific range. In this case, since it is not necessary to set the image data for the storage area of the setting storage means corresponding to the specific range, the processing load can be reduced. Therefore, for example, by setting a plurality of types of image data in the setting storage means, a plurality of types of individual images can be displayed simultaneously on the display screen, while a base image is displayed as a specific range in a range that is relatively inconspicuous in the display screen. By displaying the image, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing omissions while diversifying the display mode.

In addition, the processing load secured for the display of the base image has a margin in advance so as to be able to cope with the change in the display area of the base image that may occur due to the change of the image data set in the setting storage means. May be set with. In this case, the margin can be effectively utilized by displaying the base image in a specific range.

Feature L8. The gaming machine according to feature L7, wherein the base image is set to a single color image.

According to feature L8, a single color image is displayed as the base image. In this case, the processing load related to the display of the base image is smaller than that in the configuration in which the base image is set to the image of a plurality of colors, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Feature L9. The display storage means stores specific image data used when displaying a specific image as an individual image of a specific type.
The specific range is included in the range in which the specific image is displayed.
The base display utilization means does not set the specific image data in the storage area of the setting storage means corresponding to the specific range according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen. ,
The gaming machine according to feature L8, wherein the color of the base image is set to the same color as the base color of the specific image.

According to the feature L9, the specific image data is not set in the storage area of the setting storage means corresponding to the specific range according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen. As a result, the base image is displayed in the specific range instead of the specific image.

Here, since the color of the base image and the color that is the base tone of the specific image are the same, it is unlikely that the player feels uncomfortable when the base image is displayed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load while reducing the discomfort given to the player.

Feature L10. The specific image is configured to be modifiable.
When the base color of the specific image is changed due to the change of the specific image, the base display utilization means changes the color of the base image to the base color of the changed specific image. The gaming machine according to feature L9, which comprises a color changing means for changing (a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the display CPU 72).

According to the feature L10, since the specific image can be changed, the display mode can be diversified. Here, when the color of the specific image is changed, the color of the base image is changed to the base color of the changed specific image. As a result, the base image of the same color as the base color of the changed specific image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player and reduce the processing load while diversifying the display mode.

Feature L11. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which an individual image is displayed in front of the background image.
The gaming machine according to any one of features L7 to L10, wherein the specific range is a part or all of a range in which the background image is displayed.

According to the feature L11, the base image is displayed in a part or all of the range in which the background image is displayed. In this case, since the background image is less noticeable than other types of individual images, it is less likely to give the player a sense of discomfort. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's discomfort and reduce the processing load.

Feature L12. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which an individual image is displayed in front of the background image.
The specific type of individual image is the background image.
A plurality of types of display modes (first display mode, second display mode) in which the underlying colors of the specific image used as the background image are different from each other are set.
The display control means includes display mode switching means (a function of executing the process of step S3202 in the operation generation command corresponding process) for sequentially switching the display modes based on a predetermined trigger.
The feature L10 is characterized in that the color changing means changes the color of the base image to the base color of the specific image in the display mode after the switching in response to the switching of the display mode. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature L12, since a plurality of types of display modes in which the display modes of the images on the display screen are different from each other are set, the display modes can be diversified. In this case, as the display mode is switched, the color of the base image is changed to the base color of the specific image used as the background image in the display mode after the switch. As a result, the base image of the same color as the base color of the specific image in the display mode after switching is displayed. Therefore, the effect shown in the feature L10 can be obtained while diversifying the display mode.

In addition, "based on a predetermined opportunity" means that, for example, "an operation receiving means (directing operation device 48) for receiving an operation of a player is provided, and the operation is received by the operation receiving means". Based on, "or" based on the fact that a predetermined specific effect has been performed "and the like can be considered.

Feature L13. The display screen is composed of a plurality of dots arranged vertically and horizontally.
The display control means controls each dot output based on the image data set in the setting storage means to display an image on the display screen.
Described in any one of features L7 to L12, wherein the base display utilization means displays the base image on the entire display screen when predetermined inspection conditions are satisfied. Gaming machine.

According to the feature L13, when the predetermined inspection conditions are satisfied, the base image is displayed on the entire display screen. This makes it possible to inspect for missing dots by checking the base image. That is, by using the base image used when performing the inspection as a part of the display mode, it is possible to realize diversification of the display mode and reduction of the processing load.

Feature L14. A base information storage means (register 92) for storing the base information corresponding to the base image in a rewritable state is provided.
The display execution means displays a base image of a color corresponding to the base information based on the base information stored in the base information storage means.
The display control means executes an initialization process (initial setting process) when operating power is supplied.
When the initialization process is performed as the inspection condition, the base display utilization means obtains the base image having a color corresponding to the base information based on the base information stored in the base information storage means. It executes the inspection process to be displayed on the entire display screen.
The gaming machine according to feature L13, wherein the base information is initially set to initial base information corresponding to a predetermined inspection color at a timing prior to the execution timing of the inspection process. ..

According to the feature L14, it is possible to correspond to the color change of the base image by rewriting the base information. In the case of such a configuration, since the color of the base image used for the inspection may change, there is a concern that the reliability of the inspection result may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the color of the base image is initially set to a predetermined inspection color in the pre-stage of the inspection process for displaying the base image on the entire display screen. As a result, it is possible to easily cope with the color change of the base image and suppress the deterioration of the reliability of the inspection result.

Feature L15. The display screen is composed of a plurality of dots arranged vertically and horizontally.
The setting storage means has a plurality of unit setting areas capable of storing unit information as the storage area.
The display execution means is
It has an initialization means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3402 and S3403 in VDP76) that initializes the setting storage means by setting the unit information of each unit setting area to predetermined initial information. Further, after the initialization by the initialization means is performed, the drawing data is stored in the setting storage means by performing an update process for updating the unit information of the unit setting area corresponding to the image data using the image data. It is equipped with a drawing data creation means (a function of executing the process of step S505 in VDP76) to be created.
The display executing means outputs an image signal corresponding to the unit information of each unit setting area in the drawing data set in the setting storage means to the display means, and an image corresponding to the unit information of each unit setting area. By making the output performed at each dot corresponding to each unit setting area, the base image is displayed in the display area corresponding to the unit setting area where the unit information is the initial information, and the unit information is displayed. The individual image corresponding to the image data is displayed in the display area corresponding to the unit setting area where the update is performed.
The base display utilization means is such that the drawing data creating means creates drawing data in which the unit information of the unit setting area corresponding to the specific range is not updated according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen. The gaming machine according to any one of features L7 to L14.

According to the feature L15, since the unit information of the unit setting area is updated by using the image data after the initial information is set in the unit information of each unit setting area, it corresponds to the unit setting area where the unit information is updated. While the image corresponding to the image data is displayed in the display area, the base image which is an image corresponding to the initial information is displayed in the display area corresponding to the unit setting area where the above update is not performed. As a result, an image corresponding to the image data is displayed with the base image as the background.

Here, drawing data in which the unit information of the unit setting area corresponding to the specific range is not updated is created according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen. When the image is displayed based on the drawing data, the base image is displayed in a specific range. In this case, since it is not necessary to update the unit information of the unit setting area corresponding to the specific range, the processing load related to the update is reduced. As a result, the processing load required for displaying the image can be reduced.

Feature L16. The display storage means stores specific image data used when displaying a specific image as an individual image of a specific type.
The specific range is included in the range in which the specific type of individual image is displayed.
The display executing means provides drawing instruction means (a function of executing the process of step S408 in the display CPU 72) for creating drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information for designating the image data and parameter information of the image data. Prepare,
The drawing data creating means performs an update process for updating the unit information of each unit setting area based on the information instructed by the drawing instruction means after the initialization by the initialization means. The drawing data is created in the setting storage means.
In the base display utilization means, the drawing instruction information that does not include the information of the specific image data corresponding to the specific image is created by the drawing instruction means according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen. The gaming machine according to feature L15, wherein the unit information of the unit setting area corresponding to the specific range is not updated.

According to the feature L16, the information corresponding to the specific image data is set not to be included in the drawing instruction information according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen. As a result, since the unit information of the unit setting area corresponding to the specific image data is not updated, the base image is displayed in the specific range instead of the specific image. In this case, since it is not necessary to include the information corresponding to the specific image data in the drawing instruction information, the processing load can be reduced.

Further, in this case, since it is not necessary to grasp the display area of the base image including the specific range, it is not necessary to execute a process for grasping the display area of the base image such as a mask process. Therefore, the processing load required to display the base image can be reduced.

Feature L17. An initial information storage means (register 92) for storing the initial information in a rewritable state is provided.
The initialization means initializes the setting storage means by acquiring the initial information stored in the initial information storage means and setting the unit information of each unit setting area to the acquired initial information. It is a thing
The display control means executes an initialization process (initial setting process) prior to display control for displaying an image for a game on the display screen when operating power is supplied.
The gaming machine according to feature L16, wherein the initial information is initially set so that the color of the base image is the same as the base color of the specific image in the initialization process. ..

According to the feature L17, it is possible to correspond to the color change of the base image by rewriting the initial information. Thereby, the configuration of the feature L10 can be easily realized.

Here, the initial information is initially set in the initialization process in correspondence with the color that is the base color of the specific image. As a result, since the specific image and the base image are associated with each other before the game is started, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the game is started in a situation where the association is not performed. ..

In particular, according to the relationship with the feature L12, "The display mode switching means is initially set to a specific display mode predetermined in the initialization process, and the initial information is obtained in the initialization process. The color of the base image is initially set to be the same as the base color of the specific image used as the background image in the specific display mode. "

The "game image" includes an image for demo display that is displayed when the game is in a standby state.

Feature L18. A display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) and
A first display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
A display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) that displays an image on the display screen using the image data and updates the content of the image each time a predetermined update timing is reached.
In a gaming machine equipped with
When the image data read from the first display storage means is stored and the image data of the same capacity is read out and compared, the period required for reading the image data is read out from the first display storage means. A second display storage means (work RAM 73), which is shorter than the case,
A third, in which specific data used for displaying an image is stored, and the period required for reading the specific data is shorter than the period required for reading the image data stored in the second display storage means. Display storage means (register 92) and
With
The display control means
A first display executing means that reads out image data stored in the second display storage means and executes a process of displaying an image corresponding to the image data on the display screen based on the image data.
A second display execution means that reads out specific data stored in the third display storage means and executes a process of displaying an image on the display screen based on the specific data.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature L18, the specific data used for displaying the image is stored in the third display storage means, and the period required for reading the specific data is stored in the second display storage means. It is shorter than the period required to read the image data. As a result, for example, at the update timing in which the processing load is relatively large among the image update timings, the process of displaying the image based on the specific data stored in the third display storage means having a relatively short read period is executed. By doing so, the processing period can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the display mode such as displaying a plurality of types of individual images at the same time while suppressing the occurrence of processing omissions.

Feature L19. The image data is stored in the second display storage means as data having a large number of unit image data (pixels) associated with color information, and the specific data is stored in the third display as common unit information. It is stored in the storage means
A setting storage means (frame areas 82a, 82b) having a plurality of unit setting areas capable of storing unit information is provided.
The first display executing means reads out the image data stored in the second display storage means and executes a process of applying each unit image data of the image data to the unit information of the corresponding unit setting area. Therefore, the individual image is displayed on the display screen.
The second display executing means reads out the specific data stored in the third display storage means, and executes a process of uniformly applying the specific data to each unit setting area of the setting storage means. The gaming machine according to feature L18, wherein an image is displayed on the display screen.

According to the feature L19, the image data stored in the second display storage means has a large number of unit image data, while the specific data stored in the third display storage means has common unit information. It has become. As a result, the amount of data related to the storage of specific data is smaller than that of image data. Therefore, for example, even in a configuration in which a register having a storage capacity smaller than that of a memory or the like is used as the third display storage means, specific data can be easily stored.

Further, in the process of uniformly applying the specific data to each unit setting area, it is not necessary to grasp the unit image data corresponding to each unit setting area. As a result, the processing load related to the image display is reduced as compared with the process of applying the unit image data corresponding to each unit setting area. Therefore, the processing period can be further shortened.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature L group is effective for the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a game machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

To explain in more detail the case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data, the image data for displaying the background and the image data for displaying the character etc. are stored in the memory for the image data. Has been done. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created for a storage means such as VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Here, the image displayed on the display screen is updated in a predetermined update cycle, and the drawing data is created and the signal is output to the display device in time for the update cycle. Need to be done. Further, when creating drawing data, an operation for specifying the coordinates and size of each of the individual images displayed at the same time on the display screen is performed, and the drawing data is created based on the calculation result.

In the above configuration, the processing load increases as the number of individual images to be calculated at the same time increases. Then, when the processing load is locally increased, there is a concern that processing omission may occur.

Further, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features L1 to L19, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the above features C'1, the above features D1 to D10, and the above features E1. ~ E8, the above-mentioned features F1 to F15, the above-mentioned features G1 to G9, the above-mentioned features H1 to H11, the above-mentioned features I1 to I10, the above-mentioned features J1 to J13, and the above-mentioned features K1 to K9. You may. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

The basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied are shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 31 ... Design display device, 48 ... Production operation device as operation reception means, 50 ... Main control device as upstream control means, 53 ... ROM, 70 ... Display control device, 72 ... Display CPU , 73 ... Work RAM, 74 ... Memory module, 76 ... VDP, 81c ... Synthetic data area as grouping storage area, 82a, 82b ... Frame area as setting storage means, 93 ... Video decoder as expansion means , 94 ... Display circuit, 97 ... Scaler as data adjustment means, 101 ... Controller, 102 ... NAND flash memory, 111 ... I / F, 113 ... Controller CPU as management means, 114 ... Control as management information storage means ROM, 117 ... cache memory as storage means, 119 ... boot memory, 131 ... display CPU, 132 ... work RAM, 133 ... memory module, 135 ... VDP, 142a, 142b ... frame area as setting storage means , 143 ... Z buffer as storage means for comparison, 145 ... Mode buffer as storage area for grouping, 155 ... Display circuit, 161 ... Controller, 162 ... NAND flash memory, 171 ... I / F, 173 ... Management Controller CPU as means, 174 ... Control ROM as management information storage means, 177 ... Cache memory as storage means, 179 ... Boot memory, CH5 ... Sprite for smooth movement, G ... Display screen, PA1 ... Overlapping Area, PC35, PC36 ... Concatenated object, PD2 to PD10 ... Divided part data, PD12 to PD15 ... Divided data group, PD19 ... Partial addition data as transparency value adjustment data, PD22 to PD25 ... Partial α data, PD26, PD27 ... Design sprite data, PD30 to PD33 ... Partial α data, PD37, PD38 ... Partial α data, PD48, PD49 ... Sprite data, PD54 to PD56 ... Moving image data, PPC0 ... Rearmost image, PPC1 to PPC13 ... Individual image.

Claims (1)

A display means having a display screen composed of a large number of dots arranged vertically and horizontally, and
A display storage means that stores image data in advance,
Based on setting the image data in the setting storage means having a large number of unit setting areas, drawing data is created in the setting storage means, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. A display control means for displaying an image on the display screen and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with numerical information that defines color information.
Each unit setting area has a configuration in which numerical information can be set within a range up to the limit value.
The image signal is output by the display control means so that the larger the numerical value is set as the numerical information, the brighter the color is displayed at the dots corresponding to the unit setting area.
The display control means
An image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to the individual images so that the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, and
An addition processing execution means for executing an addition process for adding numerical information corresponding to each unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images.
A setting process executing means for setting the data of the result of the addition process in the unit setting area corresponding to each overlapping unit image data in the setting storage means.
Of the back-side individual image and the front-side individual image displayed so as to overlap in the depth direction, the numerical information of the unit image data corresponding to the portion of the back-side individual image that overlaps with the front-side individual image is reduced. Reflection reduction means that does not reduce the unit image data corresponding to the portion of the back side individual image that does not overlap with the front side individual image.
Is equipped with
The gaming machine
After setting the image data of the back side individual image in the setting storage means, the image data of the front side individual image can be set in the setting storage means.
When the image data of the front side individual image is set in the setting storage means, the means capable of executing the reduction by the reflection reduction means is provided.
The addition processing executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that the numerical information of the front side individual image corresponding to the overlapping portion is added to the numerical information of the back side individual image on which the reduction is executed.

Images